••-.% 
 
 %?• A <?,. ♦JET* .o* V '...« vv <* *;77r< 
 
 
 
 » • o„ «> 
 
 
 , e «^. °*W^ a*^ ".. 
 
 ^ A* ** 
 
 
 
 
~-f ?v 
 
 
MODERN GREEK GRAMMAR 
 
 FROM THE ORIGINAL FRENCH OF 
 
 JULIUS DAVID 
 
 FORMERLY ONE OF THE PROFESSORS IN THE 
 GREEK COLLEGE OF 
 
 S C I o 
 
 t 
 
 MODIFIED AND ADAPTED TO THE ENGLISH STUDENT 
 B Y 
 
 THE REV.* GEORGE WINNOCKA.B. 
 
 CHAPLAIN TO THE FORCES IN THE IONIAN ISLANDS. 
 
 S^ ^ ,, /$rzt. 
 
 Printed for the Translator, and sold by Parker and Co: Oxford. 
 
 Deighton : Cambridge. Rivington and Co: Waterloo Place, 
 
 and Souter and Co: S. 1 Paul's Church Yard ; LONDON. 
 

 & 
 
 * ^ 
 
TO 
 
 HIS EXCELLENCY 
 
 SIR FREDERICK ADAM 
 
 KNIGHT GRAND GROSS OF THE MOST DISTINGUISHED ORDER OF 
 S. 1 MICHAEL AND S.' GEORGE, 
 
 KNIGHT COMMANDER OF THE MOST HONOURABLE MILITARY ORDER 
 
 OF THE BATH, 
 KNIGHT OF THE AUSTRIAN IMPERIAL MILITARY ORDER OF 
 
 MARIA TERESA, 
 
 KNIGHT OF THE RUSSIAN IMPERIAL ORDER OF 
 
 S.« ANN OF THE FIRST CLASS , 
 
 THE PROTECTING SOVEREIGN'S 
 
 LORD HIGH COMMISSIONER 
 
 TO THE UNITED STATES OF THE JONIAN ISLANDS 
 
 AND 
 
 LIEUTENANT GENERAL COMMANDING THE FORCES 
 
 SERVING IN THE SAME , 
 
 8$c. , 8$c. , 85c. 
 
 This humble attempt to facilitate to his Countrymen the acquisition 
 of the present Language of Greece is respectfully- 
 Dedicated 
 
 By the 
 
 EDITOR. 
 
ADVERTISEMENT, 
 
 J. he proposal of a New Grammar has in it certainly 
 nothing very extraordinary to Englishmen , particularly 
 since Foreign Languages have been so much more studied 
 than formerly. Commerce and Travelling, and the conse- 
 quent interest and curiosity about the Literature , Anti- 
 quities, Customs, Manners and Resources of almost every 
 People , have of late greatly quickened the zeal of our 
 Countrymen in Philological Pursuits. New Grammars of 
 the French and Italian Languages, though they have long 
 since attained a high classical character , are continually 
 issuing from the British press. 
 
 In a language till lately little cultivated, even amongst 
 those who speak it, it is not to be wondered at , that a 
 good Grammar should long be a desideratum ; and that 
 many attempts should be made , before any thing like 
 an approximation to excellence should be attained : but 
 this is least of all to be wondered at in a Language flow- 
 ing directly from a source of the very highest celebrity 
 in Literary Annals , from the Language of Homer. The 
 Greeks themselves who write on the subject , wish very 
 naturally to overleap, if it were possible, the Great Gulf, 
 the corruptions of ages , lying between them and their 
 far famed Ancestors , and to bring their Disciples into 
 immediate contact with the perfection of speech. This is 
 utterly impracticable. 
 
It has been almost invariably the misfortune of those 
 who have written before this Author to perplex rather 
 than illustrate their subject. Nothing previously written 
 by a Foreigner could lay any just claims to the Title of 
 a Grammar. All attempts of the kind by natives have been 
 so very meagre as to afford little assistance to Foreigners : 
 many have been more perplexing than useful even among 
 themselves, from being shackled by some unbending Theory, 
 or from a very natural propensity to lean more, than at 
 the present epoch is justifiable, to their Ancient Classics. 
 
 Of these latter Athanasius Christopulo is considered to 
 have higher pretensions than most of his contemporaries ; 
 but even he has spent more than one third of his small 
 Volume on matter quite irrelevant , wherever his Student 
 is not already a deeply read Hellenist , His sixty two first 
 pages are devoted to proving that the proper Name of the 
 existing Language would be^Eolo-Doric; it being manifestly, 
 according to him , little more than a substitution , or ge- 
 neral pre valence of the iEolic and Doric Dialects over all 
 the others of Ancient Greece. Little of general utility could 
 be expected from such a work as this. The Grammar of 
 Darvaris , as far as foreigners are concerned , has even 
 lower pretensions. Are we then to stop till the language 
 be perfect , be as classical as its Parent, before Merchants 
 and Travellers , unacquainted with Ancient Greek , are to 
 have a guide for the exigencies of the Day, 
 
 Christopulo , aware of the warping partialities, and very 
 general failure of his countrymen, gives them this excellent 
 counsel: though his Devotion to his own Creation , the 
 iEolo-Doric Theory , has made him almost as regardless of 
 General Usefulness as others. 
 
 » An Author who writes a Grammar ( he says ) ought 
 s> to compose it with a reference , not to what he wishes 
 -j) a Language should be , but to what the Language, he 
 » undertakes to teach , actually is. Otherwise it is not a 
 a Grammar , but like the Monster in Homer » 
 
VII 
 
 » TJpouh Azov, ottiQiv Se fyay.uv , fjiicwn Se X/^ta^a* » 
 
 The Translator must trespass on his Reader's patience 
 for one moment more; and he will then leave him with 
 his Author. That a Work of this nature , tolerably well 
 executed , has long been desired by that part of the 
 British Public interested in the subject, will be , he is 
 sure , universally allowed. Whether his Readers will think 
 as highly as himself of the Original ; Whether , by translat- 
 ing , modifying and adapting the Work to the use of the 
 English Student , he have in any degree supplied the chasm 
 in the series of Philological Auxiliaries ; or whether he 
 have but added one to the almost daily disappointments 
 of the Literary World, he must submit , with hopes of 
 indulgence, to the Public. 
 
 If, however , the Work be of any Value to an English- 
 man , it is most certainly worthy of appearing in an 
 English Costume , for as, in sound Logic, it is a manifest 
 error to explain one Term by another , more, or equally 
 obscure or difficult, and it is the perfection of illustration 
 to use the easiest and most explicit ; so in a Science , 
 materially connected , as Grammar is, with sound reason- 
 ing, it is at length , fortunately, deemed an absurdity to 
 teach one foreign Language through the medium of ano- 
 ther , whenever the Master can avail himself of the lan- 
 guage of his pupil. 
 
THE AUTHOR'S PREFACE. 
 
 Another Grammar! and after that Grammar probably- 
 very shortly a double Dictionary. What a multitude of 
 Books to learn Nothing ! When will men speak one lan- 
 guage only ? When will one Grammar and one Vocabulary 
 alone be sufficient to enable Men from pole to pole to 
 understand each other? I join the Friends of Science in 
 their philosophic Wish , and am no more inclined than 
 they , to burthen my memory with words and phrases , 
 without the acquisition of a single additional idea. But 
 since this aspiration will not , it is probable , be very 
 soon attended to ; and the imperfection inherent in human 
 nature will long, and perhaps for ever, maintain a differ- 
 ence of idioms , I think that to increase their means of 
 understanding , and of communicating with each other , 
 is to render a real service to Men , as well as to Science. 
 And if what has bfeen often repeated be true , that there 
 is no book so bad as to contain nothing good , how much 
 more certain it is , that there is no people ; whatever may 
 be its state of civilization and mental advancement, with 
 which it is not interesting to be made acquainted , and 
 which may not furnish some curious observation , some 
 useful lesson to the sage. But this proposition , true in 
 general , is much more so with respect to the Greeks , 
 who are the descendants of the Ancient Preceptors of the 
 Human Race , of that Sublime Nation which is the settled 
 object of our grateful admiration. It is more particularly at 
 such a juncture as the present , when , by generous efforts 
 arid Heroic Sacrifices , they are struggling to regain their 
 liberty, and raise themselves to the distinguished eminence 
 
of their ancestors, that it becomes peculiarly interesting to 
 form relations , anc} be made acquainted with them. To 
 this end the study of their language is indispensable : ami 
 this consideration , of having a real and general object of 
 utility in view, has enabled me to overcome the repugnance 
 I felt to retouch a subject I had treated in a former work, 
 and to frame an elementary Grammar of the Modern Greek 
 Language. 
 
 Many persons , whose Judgment and Learning I esteem, 
 have advised me to give a French translation of my lately 
 published comparative view or parallel of the Ancient and 
 Modern Greek languages. But I have not deemed it expe- 
 dient to adopt their advice. That was a book written for 
 Hellenists , and they have no need of a translation to 
 enable them to understand it. Those who are unacquainted 
 with the the Ancient language would not understand it 
 better in French than in Greek; and it would be very far 
 from being sufficient for removing the difficulties in the 
 study of the existing language. 
 
 A book therefore was wanting, which should treat ex- 
 clusively of the Modern Greek Language , and enable 
 those , who have no knowledge of the Hellenic or Ancient 
 Greek , to study it. Such is the Work I have undertaken, 
 and which I now present to the public. It was a deside- 
 ratum in our language, and, I believe, in every language of 
 Europe , the German excepted , which has a Grammar of 
 the Modern Greek framed by Erdmann Schmidt, a sworn 
 public Interpreter of that Language. 
 
 This work did not fall into my hands till after I had 
 closed my labours , and I do not regret it. It is a confused 
 medley of principles and forms of the ancient and modern 
 Greek , an undigested chaos , combining the simplest 
 principles of general Grammar with a few rules peculiar 
 to the Greek , always ill conceived , awkwardly developed, 
 and frequently faulty. The Author for example gives the 
 conjugation of the ancient verbs in f/.i. To what purpose ? 
 What remains of it is so trifling, that it. may without 
 
disadvantage be classed amongst those of irregular Verbs. 
 Its display of Hellenic and obsolete forms is calculated only 
 to disgust youth with the study of a language, which is in 
 itself already sufficiently difficult, and needs not that those 
 who teach »it , instead of smoothing the course , should 
 render it more rugged. Such a work was not of a character 
 to induce me to change my plan. I have confined myself 
 to the language now in use , without establishing any 
 comparison with the Hellenic , whence it is derived. I often 
 notice different forms ; but all I notice are in present use , 
 and I am careful to inform my Reader which is the most 
 correct. 
 
 The Modern Greek preserves some few trifling phrases, 
 some forms and turns of speech, as vestiges of the Hellenic. 
 This trifling number of exceptions to general usage has not 
 induced me to increase the bulk of this elementary work 
 with nominal or verbal forms , which have no analogy with 
 the existing language, and in which they are quite isolated. 
 Is it necessary that I should admit the dative, for example, 
 into the declension , because persons sometimes say b Koiifu 
 apropos, by the bye , b J, while. Certainly not. I think 
 that , in the present state of the language all these 
 formulae should be considered as belonging to the Dic- 
 tionary. 
 
 I cannot say the same of certain tenses of the ancient 
 conjugation, which Authors sometimes employ , such as the 
 Aorist of the Participle <S^c. It would certainly be right to 
 make the student of Modern Greek acquainted with them 
 But this is no sufficient reason for admitting them into the 
 Grammar of that language. They do not as yet form any 
 integral part of it ; and if Authors sometimes employ them, 
 it is always temperately , and with a view to enrich the 
 language , and raise it above itself by well timed experi- 
 ments. As for us we ought to incorporate with it that only 
 which actually belongs to it. We refer therefore our Readers 
 to Grammars of the Ancient language for all Hellenic forms, 
 which are not given here , and seize the opportunity of as- 
 
XII 
 
 suring them most unreservedly, that the sole means of at- 
 taining any eminent success in the study of the Modern 
 Greek is to know the ancient, as well with respect to the 
 Grammar as the Dictionary. 
 
 In the present state of infancy of the Modern language 
 Authors are daily borrowing from the ancient turns of 
 phraseology Words and Idioms ; so that it is impossible to 
 determine where , in elementary Books , a stand should be 
 made , or to draw a precise line of demarcation between 
 the two languages. 
 
 We have given but few principles or elementary Rules , 
 but we have endeavoured that all given should be just and 
 explicit. Our Syntax , though short , is a brief collection of 
 the most generally used idiomatic forms or peculiarities. 
 All the phrases therein adduced are exact , and properly 
 constructed. We have avoided the error, with which we 
 have reproached Schmidt who has frequently given , as 
 examples of his pretended rules, phrases incompatible with 
 the genius and construction of the Greek language , more 
 calculated to mislead than to inform the Reader. Thus 
 page 198 after having proposed as an example of the con- 
 struction of the article the following elevated style of phrase, 
 o W W UowfAJLTcLrn MyaLTos d'//;^cc, Homer immortal throngh, 
 or on account of his poems , cites this as more in use, 
 o ti'/uvfe Solvcltoc hx V Hoiv^v.7 ci7* ; that is he substi- 
 tutes a solecism for a correct phrase. I have shewn 
 Chapter 29 , § 3 how it ought to be corrected. Page 197, 
 lie gives us this macaroni construction as elegant , 
 iTrxivu rnv ri /uxhr* kynuekuxv , I commend the Scholars dili- 
 gence « es ist zierlicher und eclier, » says he, it is more 
 elegant and sustained. He might have said that it was Hel- 
 lenic of the lower ages ; for in this language one should 
 rather express nimself thus, eVa/vw tov ^'Arh tjk £T/ ( «e\£/ac, 
 so that what he recommends as elegant and sustained is 
 neither good ancient nor Modern Greek. We could prove 
 from a variety of other examples that Schmidt has not seized 
 the genius of the Greek language , but we shall content 
 
xin 
 
 ourselves with these two , and no longer trifle with the 
 patience of our reader. 
 
 We shall close with observing that the Book we now 
 present to the public is an Essay 9 which may receive 
 ulterior developement ; but such as it is , it will prove 
 sufficient to enable the Reader to prosecute alone his 
 study of the Modern Greek. Should this essay be well 
 received by the public, we propose , in a second edition, to 
 enrich it with exercises and a more copious collection of 
 examples, as customary in Grammars of Modern Languages, 
 without making any change in the Rules, which we consider 
 sufficiently developed. We have endeavoured to hold a 
 mean course between conciseness and prolixity. 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 Chap. i. Of Pronunciation. Pag. i 
 
 2. — Accent - Enclitics . . •. 4 
 
 3. — Signs used in Writing - Aspirates - Iota under- 
 
 written - Apostrophe - Stops 1 1 
 
 4- — Words — Numbers, Genders, Cases i3 
 
 5- — Declensions, and of the Article. .....— 
 
 6. — First Declension Isosyllabic . i5 
 
 7- — Second Declension Isosyllabic 17 
 
 8* — Third Declension Isosyllabic- ..... ....... 2.0 
 
 9- — First Declension Imparisyllabic 22 
 
 10. — ■ Second Declension Imparisyllabic. 24 
 
 11. — Heteroclites 25 
 
 12. — Augmentatives and Diminutives. . . 29 
 
 '3. — Comparatives and Superlatives . . 3o 
 
 i-4. — Nouns of Number. 3i 
 
 1 5. — Pronouns Personal. ............ 1 ....... 34 
 
 i0 *. Possessive. . 35 
 
 *7. Demonstrative ................ 35 
 
 i ^- — Relative. .................. ■'>7 
 
 19. Reflective. ...... \ ........... 38 
 
 20. — — — Interrogative ................. ^9 
 
 21. Indefinite. ... . . - ........... 4o 
 
 22. — Verbs. 4i 
 
 2 3. — Conjugation 4i 
 
 2/f J- — Formation of the Tenses - Augment -Character- 
 istic - Termination 4^ 
 
 2!:) - — Compound Tenses 43 
 
 20. Tpacp-o) Barytoned Active Voice. 45 
 
 — rpafo-oaou Passive Voice ............... 5i 
 
 — ITar-w circumflexed from eo> Active. ........ {17 
 
 *■ naT-oufxa: from soaat Passive 60 
 
 Tiw.-w from aw Active 64. 
 
 ■ K.Giu.-«{j.at from aeaai Passive . 67 
 
 Ecuat ...;..................... 71? 
 
 ^7- Remarks on Verbs - their Accent .......... 74 
 
 The Characteristic and its Changes 75 
 
 Certain instances of syncope ........ r * .-. • 80 
 
 28. -* List of Irregular Verbs ....... ; ....... 8r 
 
XVI 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 Chap. 29. Of the Article , . . . g$ 
 
 30. — Numbers. 96 
 
 3 1 . — Nouns of Number * . . — 
 
 32. — Pronouns Personal, 91 
 
 33. Possessive-relative 94 
 
 34. Demonstrative g5 
 
 35. — Relative — 
 
 36. — Reflective , . • 96 
 
 37. — Interrogative 97 
 
 38. Indefinite • 98 
 
 39. — Oblique Cases - Genitive 99 
 
 — Accusative. 100 
 
 40. — Comparatives and Superlatives 102 
 
 4 1- — The Verb -its Voices ....... 1 . . io3 
 
 4a. — Tenses io5 
 
 43. — Moods - Indicative and Subjunctive 109 
 
 — Infinitive 112 
 
 — Participle. . . r . . n3 
 
 44- — Prepositions n4 
 
 45. • — Adverbs 118 
 
 46- — Conjunctions „ 122 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 SECTION L 
 
 Of the Alphabet and its Sounds • • . . i . 129 
 
 — Syllabication 
 
 — Accent - when alone the Sign of the grave should 
 
 be used 
 
 — General Rules for accenting Nouns and Verbs. . . . i3o 
 ■ — Vulgar Mode of declining Nouns i3i 
 
 SECTION It- 
 Principles on which the Greek Tenses are translated. i3$ 
 
 Dialogues. 
 
 Qnomasticon or Vocabulary; 
 
CHAPTER L 
 
 OF PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 VV hat is said in the original on this subject , having 
 reference to the French language only , I shall substitute 
 an attempt to illustrate the Modern pronunciation of the 
 Greek Vowels , Consonants and Diphthongs , with reference 
 to the English Alphabet ; and , where that is impossible 7 
 I shall give as correct an analysis, as I am able*, of 
 the Greek articulation. 
 
 (r) 
 
 (*) 
 
 CT 
 
 
 NAMES 
 
 ENGLISH. 
 
 A a 
 
 Alpha <& 
 
 A in Father. — *'/ ' 
 
 B p 6 
 
 Veta 
 
 V. 
 
 r y r 
 
 Gamma 
 
 G. 
 
 A S 
 
 Thelta 
 
 Th in Them. 
 
 E 6 
 
 Epsilqn 
 
 A and E in Ale, Men, aijjcsvcc, 1&6. 
 
 z K 
 
 Zeta 
 
 1. 
 
 H r, 
 
 Eta 
 
 E in Me. 
 
 e e 
 
 Theta 
 
 Th in Theme, 
 
 i i 
 
 Eota 
 
 E in me. 
 
 R i 
 
 Rappa 
 
 K. 
 
 A 1 
 
 Lamtlia 
 
 L. 
 
 M [f 
 
 Me 
 
 M. 
 
 N v 
 
 Ne 
 
 N. 
 
 £ 5 
 
 Xe 
 
 X in Axiom and never as in 
 
 Alexander ', as ^ ? not as #*\ 
 
 o 
 
 Omicron 
 
 in &o/2e« 
 
 rx * l 
 
 Pee 
 
 P. 
 
 p p 
 
 Rho 
 
 R. 
 
 ^t-J 
 
 ^u^> ^° 
 
/«^^:^^^l AJii-aU^ 
 
 
 2 «r 
 
 j. Sigma 
 
 
 S in £&, never as in &, except 
 before p, & and p.. 
 
 (4) 
 
 T r 
 
 Taf 
 
 
 T. 
 
 
 Y u 
 
 ^psilon 
 
 
 E in me* 
 
 
 $ 9 
 
 Phee 
 
 
 Ph. 
 
 es) 
 
 x * 
 
 Khee 
 
 
 Kh. 
 
 
 ¥ <ji 
 
 Psce 
 
 
 Ps. 
 
 
 Q ca 
 
 Omega 
 
 
 The two Os are pronounced 
 
 in the same manner by all 
 modern Greeks. 
 
 li 
 
 as 
 
 A in 
 
 Al 
 
 
 Ei 
 
 
 E in 
 
 ihe 
 
 
 Oi 
 
 
 E irt 
 
 me 
 
 
 Cu. 
 
 
 U in 
 
 b) 
 
 uid. 
 
 It tt 
 
 
 E in 
 
 /?;e 
 
 
 -^ \ before 
 E>j J 
 
 ;i y o £ A j7. v 
 
 p and the Vowels as \ A ^ English. 
 ( zip & 
 
 11; 
 
 
 
 
 Eve'i 
 
 Ao ) 
 E.) 1 
 
 before 
 
 the olher lettei 
 
 s ai f -j^. English. 
 
 Hu 
 
 
 
 
 EEf, 
 
 (i) F This letter has two very different sounds, one hard 
 or guttural before a o to, and before \ v p : it exactly answer* 
 to the German G in the words Lage, Tage, gutturally pro- 
 nounced , as in the south : it is very nearly , if not exactly, 
 met by the sound in the beginning of the Gaelic Words 
 ffdhomb » in « thoirdhomb » give me, and « dhruadhach » 
 the brides maid. To the South Briton it may be well to 
 observe, that it very nearly, if not exactly, corresponds with 
 the sound produced, by attempting to sound a g before an 
 h aspirated, in the words g-heart g-horn g-home The soft 
 or liquid sound , used before the slender vowels , and the 
 diphthongs of equivalent force, is exceedingly easy: it is, as 
 
3 
 
 ma'Ay as possible, tliat ofy fa yis^ymr. Before y % I £ ^»«- 
 
 &t has the nasal sound of ng Englishfe(c®^^^ir *^ ^V^^ 
 
 ( y before y * $ £. ^ OrU****^ 
 
 (i) N Is changed into ( pt before B jj. « <p <j/. 
 (1 p 5 before "X p c. 
 
 (3) II. This letter, when subjoined to M, is sounded as B # 
 English: Tobacco is, by the Greeks, Spelt Ta^ira;cxo. Whatever 
 might, have been the sound attached by the Ancients to (3, 
 the Moderns have no single sign for the English articula- 
 tion of B. 
 
 (4) T. The Modern Greeks have no sign for the English 
 sound of D ; but t after v has this sound, even when the v is. 
 in one word, and the t in the following ; as tov Tpoirov 
 is sounded ton dropon. 
 
 (5) X. The sound of this letter is unknown to the Native* 
 of the South of Britain; but is very familiar to the Scotch, 
 Irish, Welch, Spanish, and German ear; though, as a neces- 
 sary caution, it should be observed, that the Greek y , as 
 pronounced by females , or persons at all attentive to 
 euphony, is perhaps the softest modification of a guttural 
 aspirate in any language , and adds great beauty to the 
 Romaic. Indeed, when it is very softly pronounced , as it 
 often is by females , it has so very slight a guttural sound , 
 that, to the unpractised ear, it would appear purely palatial. 
 It is produced by making the breath sensibly strike the 
 palate in its utterance, with a very slight sound of K before. 
 it as k-here. The following are very nearly the same sounds. 
 
 Scotch Irish Welch Span i six 
 
 Ch in Ch in Ch in J in 
 
 Loch Lochy Auchnacloy Sach Gijon 
 
 Italian German 
 
 C by Florentines ch in 
 in 
 
 Casa Goso-. Welehen. 
 
 ccJ if pjtc jul, U cn> U ix<r{ fTu> 4-u>*t,*ced , <rc <AJ&et&*t fft* ce^pifK-- 
 h'wv of Jfw hvo -CeJU^a p-eo-dnozJ >&*> Jtnind afJ3. Jfua of ' Z ^ C Y 
 
CHAPTER II. 
 
 OF ACCENT. 
 
 T shall in this chapter omit all said by the Author that 
 exclusively hears on the French Language , except such 
 observations as appear better calculated to illustrate the 
 subject to an English Reader, than any illustration drawn 
 from his own language. 
 
 1. The Accent of the Greeks is an elevation of voice , 
 communicated to one of the syllables of a word , so that 
 that syllable , striking the ear in a more sensible and 
 emphatic manner , appears to predominate over the rest. 
 Thus , the peculiar office of Accent is to regulate the mo- 
 dulation and cadence of pronunciation. It affects only the 
 Ultimate, Penultimate, and Antepenultimate syllables. 
 
 2. The Modern Greeks write with the Accent: All Books 
 are printed with it: It is not, however, as far as the Greek 
 is concerned, necessary. He, when he first learns a word, 
 learns with it , its accent ; and there is no Native, who would 
 not read his language with an equally exact pronunciation , 
 ■whether the hook were accented or not. The custom of 
 marking, with a peculiar sign, the point of elevation of the 
 voice was introduced by ancient Grammarians, to enable 
 them to teach the Language to Foreigners, (i) 
 
 3* Three signs are in use to indicate the accent or eleva- 
 tion of the voice on a syllable r the acute ('), the grave ('), 
 and the circumflex ("). The acute and the grave have always 
 been equivalents , though they have affected different parts 
 of a word: but it is highly probable , that the circumflex 
 originally served to indicate a different elevation of voice 
 
 (i) Just as we see in the Italian Translation of the Peruvian let- 
 ters, for the use of persons learning that language, though by Ita- 
 lians thejuselyei marts of accent are but rarely used. 
 
s 
 
 from that signified by the other two, since it was peculiarly 
 applied to the long vowels. This alone sufficiently shews 9 
 -that it was the sign of a different inflection of Voice from 
 that indicated hy the acute or grave accent , which were* 
 indifferently applied to the long or short Vowels. This dis- 
 tinction in cadence , or inflexion of Voice, whatever it might 
 have been, has been lost, together, with the precise charac- 
 ter of quantity. The modern Greeks pronounce all the ac- 
 cents in the same manner , and pay no attention to what 
 we call quantity. 
 
 4. The acute accent may be applied indifferently to the* 
 three last syllables , the circumflex to the two last, but tho 
 grave to the last only. 
 
 6. When the Acute Accent is on the last syllable , the? 
 word is called OJutovov , when on the penult wapoStrrovov ,■ 
 when on the Antepenult wpowapo^urovov , A Word, with the 
 circumflex on the last syllable, is called 7irepu77r<o[./.evov, on tho 
 penult, wpo-Treptcr7ttofJL8vov. Lastly a Word with the grave ac- 
 cent on the only syllable to which it is applicable, the last, is 
 called papuxovov. Every Word, not having the acute or cir- 
 cumflex on the last syllable , is considered to have the grave, 
 and is (3apuTovov. (1) 
 
 7. All Words, with the exception of some few monosyl- 
 lables , have an accent , because all have one syllable parti- 
 cularly marked by emphasis , or an elevation of voice. 
 
 8. This accent undergoes a change of character and posi- 
 tion (a i ). In its movements, it sometimes passes from the ante- 
 penult to the penult , as o-avOpcorco; the Man , tou avOpiorcou , 
 of the Man • from the antepenult and the penult to the 
 
 (1). As these definition^ ■will frequently occur, and could not be 
 expressed without continual periphrases , I shall adopt them in the 
 neuter, as epithets of the word p/iaa , and give them their regular 
 plurals, as established in our Language, in the instance of Pheno- 
 menon, Phenomena. 
 
 (9.) To avoid confusion I shall confine the word change to change 
 *>f character, aa$ adopt the word movement for change of position. 
 
6 
 final ; as at /mUrfiui , the pupils j raw ^a8»Tf#»* , of the 
 pupils ; a/ yurctfxtf, the Women, tcov yvtxmir. It changes its. 
 form , -when the acute is substituted for the circumflex ; as 
 v /Ao7fx late, tyiq pcifVLQ of fate , or the circumflex for the 
 acute; as h fe£g; , the simpleton, r©» £a,8cu, of the simpleton; 
 and the grave for the acute, in the course of a phrase ; as 
 I laCbt; arbfuzrsG , the silly man. 
 
 The whole Theory of accent in the ancient Language was 
 grounded on quantity. This determined its nature , and 
 regulated its changes and movements. Quantity having no 
 existence in the modern Language , accent is now almost 
 independent ; and thence is subject to much less move- 
 ment, but it is very far from being, as the Author states, 
 « nearly as fixed as in the Italian. » If so, there would have 
 been no need of his numerous special Rules, subjoined to his 
 several forms of Declension. 
 
 The rules for its movement, because it affects the pro- 
 nunciation, must, indispensably, be known; but not those 
 for the change of form , from acute to circumflex ; as 
 I ^aSjfTjjV, the pupil, tov (aSvitgv^ of the pupil ; or from the 
 circumflex to the acute; as to ro ( ua , the body, tow aup.<tToc t ot 
 the body. As this change of form in no way affects the pro- 
 nunciation , and is merely a mark or sign in orthography , 
 it is almost useless that a person should know it, if his sole 
 object be the modern Language. We refer those , who wish 
 to be thoroughly informed on this subject, to the numerous 
 Grammars of the ancient Greek. 
 
 If a person's main object be to make himself understood 
 by Greeks , and to understand them , I would advise him, 
 at first, to attempt only what is indispensable , with respect 
 to accent; that is, to acquaint himself with what is called 
 the primitive accent of Words , and the more prevalent 
 changes of its position , without regarding its change of 
 character, from acute to circumflex , or the reverse. The 
 Greek understands what is written , as well without accent 
 as with : all the accents affect pronunciation equally ; and 
 therefore in a Man's effort to acquire a copia verborum for 
 
7 
 ®ral intercourse , it is only necessary, as to all inflexions ^ 
 
 by habit, and aii attention to the more common principles^ 
 to learn where a word is to be accented , without caring how. 
 When the copia Verboruin is once acquired , the mystery 
 Will, almost without an effort , gradually unfold itself. Exam- 
 ples and Exceptions will then readily present themselves ; 
 and a difficulty which , unseasonably encountered , lias 
 excited disgust, and deterred numbers from prosecuting the 
 study of the Language , will be insensibly stript of ail its 
 forbidding character. 
 
 Mons. 1 ' David's Details of the variations of accent accom- 
 pany the several forms of Declension, given in the regular 
 course of the grammar , which are the forms used in most 
 Modern Greek Books of any reputation. Reference is made 
 to the appendix , in every instance where the Vulgar de- 
 cline such Words , or class of Words , in any way differ- 
 ently: that difference is there pointed out; and at the same 
 time the liberties taken by the Vulgar , with respect to ac- 
 cent , are noticed. I trust this Mode will enable a person 
 utterly unacquainted with the Language to commence his 
 study with ease , and to avail himself of the different for- 
 mula according to his progress. No one can have a tole- 
 rably correct idea of the Modern forms of declension , 
 without an opportunity of comparing them with their proto- 
 types. It indeed would be altogether impossible, without a 
 reference , to class them at all ; but the variations being , 
 in some instances , considerable , they ought to be kept 
 distinct, that a person may, at pleasure, apply his attention 
 imdividedly to his more immediate object. Instead of the 
 Author's Special Rules for almost every form of each de- 
 clension, which are exceedingly perplexing, and difficult to 
 bear in mind, I have attempted to reduce the Rules to 
 a small number, applicable generally, and resting on the 
 leading principles of the Theory of quantity ; though for 
 common purposes they do not require a knowledge of it. 
 1 will not venture to say that they will admit of no exceptions; 
 but 1 think they will admit but of few. 
 
8 
 
 These I have annexed to the Forms in the Appendix ; 
 but I have not that degree of confidence in them , that will 
 allow me to substitute them for those of the Author ; of 
 which I have in the first part of the Treatise given the> 
 substance , though with an attempt at greater perspicuity. 
 Any set of Rules not embracing the whole Theory of 
 quantity, as it affects accent, and not noticing its many 
 exceptions, can be but an approximation towards precision ; 
 but where the difficulties in the way of infallibility are so 
 great, I am persuaded approximations will, by all but 
 pedants, be indulgently received. To them neither the lan- 
 guage of which we treat can, in its present state, be a wor-. 
 thy object of criticism ; nor can auy work, making an 
 humble attempt to assist those in acquiring it, who aim not 
 at scholastic fame. 
 
 For the due placing of the accent in pronunciation, two 
 points must be ascertained , the primitive accent , and its 
 movements, or change of position. That is termed the primi- 
 tive accent, which belongs to a word in its primitive state, or 
 before it undergoes any grammatical change from de- 
 clension , conjugation , juxtaposition etc. It is on the- 
 nominative singular of nouns , and in verbs, on the 
 first person singular of the present tense indicative. The 
 primitive accent being once ascertained, its movements , 
 and even its changes of form are easily determined.. We will 
 endeavour to indicate both , particularly its movements , in 
 the course of our observations on the Declensions and 
 Conjugations ; but , as to the primitive accent , use alone 
 can teach it. That of Verbs is easy : it is sufficient to know, 
 whether they be Barytona, or Ferispomena; but that of 
 Nouns and indeclinable words is more varied and difficult. 
 Ear, and a quickness of observation can alone secure preci- 
 sion in this particular (i). 
 
 (i) At least unless a man choose to burthen his Memory with all 
 the Rules of Prosody , and the v cry numerous exceptions to the -i. 
 
9 
 
 Another important acquisition, on this head, is a know- 
 ledge of the vwi£n7i<; , or fusion of Vowels. This species of 
 contraction , whereby two or more vowels form hut one 
 articulation , is much in use in Modern Greek. We have it 
 in English , and may thence form an accurate idea of it. It 
 corresponds with the union of io in tion, ia in tian, and the 
 fusion of the y with its following vowel in yellow, young, etc. 
 Thus, in Modern Greek, the Word sra<W children, consists 
 hut of two syllables in sound, though it has really three , 
 to. being blended , as indicated by the acute accent on the 
 final vowel. If it be wished that the two vowels should be 
 separately sounded , the acute accent must be placed on 
 the ;, and the word be written as in ancient Greek,. «r«/$/<z. 
 This termination must otherwise be pronounced, as an 
 Englishman would pronounce ia in Justinian, as though 
 it were written Jus^tinyan , where there are evidently only 
 three syllables in sound. 
 
 This fusion of Vowels sometimes occurs in the middle 
 of Words ; and then the accent appears to be placed a 
 syllable farther back than it really is; thus, in Ivvowaaa, / 
 have perceived, it may seem that the fourth syllable from the 
 end of the Word is accented; but that fourth in appearance 
 is but the third, or antepenult in sound; since the syllables 
 01 and a are blended in the pronunciation: ww^/wi, cmor/Wcre, 
 it is cloudy , it is gloomy , are pronounced in the same 
 manner. 
 
 A v before the wn'Qnir is sounded as gn in french and Ita- 
 lian, in ognon, degno, pronounced in English, ownyong, 
 den-yo; thus sfwotwaa should be pronounced, as though it were 
 written, en-yo-sa, ^^.,en-yd , just as mignonette , though 
 the combination of letters is quite foreign , is pronounced 
 by every working gardener, as if written min-yo-net. 
 
 OF ENCLITICS, 
 
 All Words have an accent, but some few monosyllables 
 and dissyllables , which , in pronunciation 7 unite with the 
 
IO 
 
 preceding word , and st em to form but one with it , loss 
 their accent , or rather transfer it to the word with 
 which they are united. They are called enclitics from eyxhJvQfieu 
 to incline ; because they incline towards , or , as it were , 
 rest upon the preceding word. Thus y.cv , of me, bears the 
 circumflex accent ; but in the phrase © ipfho^ov , my friend, 
 it becomes enclitic , and is closely blended in pronunciation 
 with the word (pihcc ; and for that reason loses its circumflex 
 accent. 
 
 It may be well to observe, as it regards orthography, that 
 when the enclitic follows a proparoxytonon, or a properispo- 
 mcnon , it passes its accent to the final syllable of its antece- 
 dent, which then has two accents , its own, and that of the 
 enclitic; as b oLytyuzrbtpov, my Man; to Itlwvbv fiov, my supper, (i) 
 
 When it follows a paroxytonon , or perispbmenon , the 
 enclitic loses its accent, without affecting its antecedent, as 
 ixpihoc /uov, my friend, rov tratiiov p«Z^ of my Child. 
 
 If it follow an oxytonon , the acute accent is retained , 
 even in those situations in a phrase, where the general rule 
 would demand the grave. 
 
 The circumflex of the enclitic, wherever an additional 
 accent is given to the antecedent , is changed for the acute , 
 its in the example,' b avfyuvrbs (jlov. 
 
 The principal Enclitics are the monosyllabic oblique cases 
 of personal pronouns (aqv ^.e y.0Lg gov ul ode tov rns rov mr tq 
 
 rO)V TQ'OQ TOLIS TCC. 
 
 (i) Our Language abounds with these enclitics in pronunciation; 
 and they are among the most perplexing difficulties with which Fo- 
 reigners , in conversing , have to contend ; because they have no in- 
 dication of them in prose Writings. Thus the verbs to be , and to 
 have, often lose their accent ; and are so blended with the preceding 
 pronoun, as to form with it a monosyllable ; I've , you've, they've . 
 been, he's, she's, they're gone : the auxiliary will undergoes still 
 greater mutilation , and merges into its subject ; I'll , you'll , they'll 
 attend. The pronoun sometimes resigns its distinction ; as in 'tis , 
 'twaS. 
 
m % ** U~7*~ 
 
 **~*L<f j&h^-j/ tV^* %-<^o X*-* &<*s A. &-£ \*^'P r '4 
 
 The pronoun t/c, as in on whatever; the adverhs crey, norl 
 ,-£<■, where, never, how, etc. as, yJI woti, kx ktuc^ kol wgv. 
 
 These are not however always enclitics : Thus the pronoun 
 ?<k 9 and the adverbs <gtoZ •arotl are not so when used interroga- 
 tively: hxTi, why? &Q7t When? -crcr*, crM, never , never , 
 negatively. 
 
 The oblique cases of personal pronouns are not enclitics, 
 when they precede the verb on which they depend , as 
 l/X hlyu, he tells me /y.ae ythi he deceives us , see the Syntax. 
 
 Resides these ordinary enclitics , some verbs beginning 
 with a vowel, or diphthong, which lose it by elision, become 
 enclitics , and are completely blended with the preceding 
 Word; as y.ov ri 'tuxt , he gave it me, instead of yxu il *&fy-h 
 rjv rfVa, instead of tcv iq e/W, I told it him. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 pF THE DIFFERENT SIGNS USED I3J WRITING 
 OF THE ASPIRATE. 
 
 The aspirate is placed over vowels, whenever they com- 
 mence a word, and is of two sorts termed the soft and the 
 rough aspirate. It formerly marked the degree of aspiration, 
 or breathing communicated to those vowels. The soft a 
 slighter , and the rough a stronger breathing. Among the 
 consonants the f alone is aspirated , or rather is marked 
 with the sign. It has always the rough aspirate at the 
 beginning of a word ; and when two $ follow in the middle 
 of a word , the first has the soft , and the second the 
 rough aspirate , as in V^mo hail x in the sense of salutation. 
 
 It is probable that there was a sensible difference in the 
 pronunciation of these two aspirates by the Ancients. 
 The rough being a strong breathing, the consonants termed 
 slender , whenever followed by it , were changed into their 
 aspirated cognates , whether in separate words , or in com- 
 pound terms, as xa6' v^ta? , instead of xar y\vsj.i , or v.-Mkc-j, 
 generally, from k%t& and ohev. This Aspirate lias been com- 
 
• 13 
 
 pared to tliat produced by the German h , in Ao&, Jiaueii ; 
 but this idea is rather ingenious than exact ; for we do not 
 see that the German h affects the Words, with which it 
 comes in contact, as the rough aspirate ; or that it produces 
 the same changes. Whatever may be conjectured , it is 
 certain that its peculiar properties no longer exist in the 
 modern language. All vowels are pronounced in the same 
 manner , and without any breathing or aspirate , whether 
 marked by the one or the other sign : It's only use in the 
 Modem Greek is to indicate when the above elision may 
 take place. 
 
 OF THE IOTA. UNDERWRITTEN. 
 
 It indicates the elision of an / after the vowels, under 
 which it is written. It is commonly the last of the second 
 and third persons singular of the Tenses of the subjunctive 
 Mood in w , 7?*f*c, y?<*j>'>u y? ap9?i£, y^^n. 
 
 OF THE APOSTROPHE. 
 
 The apostrophe in Greek, as in French , denotes the 
 elision of a vowel, or diphthong , whether at the end of 
 words, as to crip diA.e<rw ihuGt, he forthwith opened his mouth, 
 instead of to crop* • u/oko yyuvU , it is entirely of gold, in- 
 stead of ihai) or at the beginning; as, tcv rb Va. instead of 
 tlzjx, V 7nv trr'oKiv^ instead of*/; rm vrohiv To Constantinople. 
 
 OF PUNCTUATION. 
 
 A point (. ) placed as in English, indicates the completion 
 of the sense. 
 
 When placed parallel with the upper, instead of the 
 lower part of the letters, it is equivalent to a colon. 
 
 The comma ( , ) is of the same value as in English. 
 
 The combination forming our semicolon (;) is used as a 
 sign of Interrogation. 
 
 Some Editors make use of the Note of Exclamation ! 
 
1 3 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 OF WORDS. 
 
 The Modern follows the Ancient Greek, in acknowledging 
 fcine sorts of Words , called parts of Speech, Viz. The 
 Substantive , Adjective, Article, Pronoun, Verb, Participle, 
 Preposition, Adverb, Conjunction. 
 
 The Interjection is classed with adverbs. 
 
 OF NUMBERS. 
 
 There are two IN umbers: The Singular and Plural. 
 
 OF GENDERS. 
 
 There are three Genders : The Masculine , Feminine , 
 and Neuter. 
 
 OF CASES. 
 
 There are four Cases : The Nominative , Genitive , Ac- 
 cusative , and Vocative. Of these four , the Nominative , 
 Accusative, and Vocative are always alike in Neuters, as in 
 Latin. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 There are in Modern Greek, according to Mons/ David's 
 classification, three Declensions : the i. A Comprising Nouns 
 in ac, »c. , a h ,n~i the 2. d Nouns in <>c, and ov , and also those 
 in / , and o ? mostly from ancient Diminutives in in : and the 
 3. d All the varieties that do not fall under the forms given 
 in the first two, in the following succession : it can hardly be 
 called order. 
 
 NS. GS. N.PL 
 
 I 
 
 T'^QYT 
 
 a; 
 
 a 
 
 i? 
 
 2 
 
 Ayovfio 
 
 a 
 
 ag 
 
 *S 
 
 3 
 
 Jl^dy^ 
 
 a 
 
 <xroc 
 
 otra 
 
 4 
 
 faf 
 
 aq 
 
 a 
 
 cilis 
 
 5 
 
 Xari 
 
 Y>-Q 
 
 n 
 
 ilif 
 
 £ 
 
 MctytvK 
 
 c» 
 
 QV$ 
 
 evo-eff 
 
NS. GS. HP. 
 
 7 
 
 $££01/4. 
 
 0/ 
 
 arc 
 
 8 
 
 Tea. 
 
 fC 
 
 Oir 
 
 9 
 
 rv«<r 
 
 l< 
 
 tic 
 
 JO 
 
 A^/U 
 
 ia.Q 
 
 iX 
 
 12 
 
 2&)^a r 
 
 m. 
 
 QV$ 
 
 J2 
 
 Ey ae3 
 
 viz 
 
 qvq 
 
 13 
 
 Ba9 
 
 Jc 
 
 stcij 
 
 )4 
 !5 
 
 B*8 
 
 ( 
 
 E'.O'J 
 
 The classification of Greek Nouns has ever been, and 
 still remains, among Grammarians, disputed ground. Whe- 
 ther what is here attempted will be thought to furnish 
 more precise lines of distinction, than the distribution of 
 the Author, must be left to the Public to determine* 
 
 I shall venture to divide all regular Nouns between 3 
 Declensions Iso-syllabic and i Declensions Imparisyllahic; 
 and shall , after the regular forms , give as Heteroclites , 
 the few that will not conform to this arrangement. 
 
 Before we proceed to examples of these, we will decline 
 the Article. As it very commonly accompanies Nouns , it 
 is necessary to know the Declension of the one , before 
 we attempt that of the other: It has three Gende 
 
 .icrs. 
 
 DECLENSION OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 Masculine b as h i\«c the Sun 
 
 Feminine n n Qcihwm the Sea 
 
 Neuter 73 to (pQivovfofov the Autunla, 
 
 
 
 SING CLAP, 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 isculine. 
 
 Feminine 
 
 Nominative 
 
 
 b 
 
 n 
 
 Genitive 
 
 
 ruu 
 
 TTfC 
 
 Accusative 
 
 
 TiV 
 
 r<;y 
 
 Neuter. 
 
I 3 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 HfJLAL. 
 
 
 'Nominalive 
 
 61 
 
 «/ or 
 
 ito 
 
 Genitive 
 
 rav 
 
 7cJr 
 
 
 Accusative 
 
 TC'JQ 
 
 ri 
 
 
 7* 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 FIRST DECLENSION ISOSYLXABIC. 
 
 This Declension comprises nouns Masculine in «c gen fc 
 and w , gen y , and Femmines in a , gen wc and *c and in h, 
 gen ni (2). 
 
 N. 
 
 
 kvecy 
 
 / etc 
 
 Amt 
 
 i 
 
 a: or at; 
 
 G. 
 
 (?) 
 
 — . 
 
 • — ' a or cv 
 
 — 
 
 Z=L 
 
 QV 
 
 A. 
 
 
 __' 
 
 — ' m 
 
 — 
 
 ' 
 
 a; or cue 
 
 V. 
 
 
 — ~- 
 
 - — ' a 
 S 
 
 ~ 
 
 P 
 
 at or aK 
 
 H. 
 
 
 M«9 
 
 tfr /?; 
 
 Ma9 
 
 nr 
 
 a 1 Or a/'c 
 
 G. 
 
 
 . — 
 
 ■ — n or cv 
 
 — 
 
 — . 
 
 (Jy 
 
 A. 
 
 
 — 
 
 , . yj V 
 
 — 
 
 ■ — 
 
 as or a/r 
 
 V. 
 
 
 _ 
 
 • — ;; 
 
 "I 
 
 I~ 
 
 cti or cci'c 
 
 (1) For the peculiarities of the Language, as it is spoken vulgarly, 
 and written in books designed for the Vulgar , see the Appendix , 
 where all the forms here given , with the terminations used by the 
 greater part of Writers of reputation, are repeated , with all the ir- 
 regularities of accent and termination , in use among the vulgar. 
 
 (2) I am aware that some would form 1 Declensions of the forms 
 that are here given as one, but, except with respect to the Genitive 
 Singular the Analogies in Orthography and accent are so great , 
 that the subdivision would answer no good purpose. 
 
 (3) Instead of repeating the whole Word , I have preferred giving, 
 in the oblique cases , the Termination , or variable part only, substi- 
 tuting, for the rest, lines. Of two lines, when the first is accented, it 
 answers to the Antepenult, when the second to the Penult. The double 
 lines , without accent, shew where the accent is sometimes thrown by 
 the Vulgar. The French circumflex is more conspicuous over lines 
 
iG 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 Mow 
 
 MeOV «/ O/* a/c 
 
 0)V 
 
 • — ' «c Or die 
 
 — ^ ai 6/7' a/; 
 
 N. T> 
 
 A. — 
 V- — 
 
 at or zt4 
 
 af Or cut 
 
 — at Or gu£ 
 
 INCLINE LIKE. 
 
 Atef/ ac ua.hr vc juov<t a rut >j 
 
 Ae&w'oac 
 Ilaya-tfi'/tff 
 Am/ a? 
 
 MlGTY.Q 
 
 X*f* 
 
 hVGT'fl 
 
 •tiyyiriai 
 
 (pihta. 
 
 ™X» 
 
 khezr t v\$ 
 
 •foVtCL 
 
 iky t;; 
 
 KTlffTHC 
 
 KOhXKit 'a- 
 
 TthftYl 
 
 tlian the Greek, and , therefore, iri such situations, has been 'pre- 
 ferred. This Mode as it appears to me , presents the Termination , 
 and the situation of the Accent most prominently to the eye ; and ; 
 if it do, must greatly assist Memory. The supply of the deficient part 
 of the Word , though immediately above , requires a certain degree' 
 of attention , which , in young Scholars ,. it is , however important,- 
 extremely difficult to fix. 
 
 (i) Some Authors write 6 ; instead of «».« that they may not seem to 
 violate the principles of accentuation , for whenever the Nominative 
 and Vocative plural are written at? , instead of a-., the accent ought to 
 be the same as in the Accusative plural. 
 
 Nouns ending in £ a , Qa, pa, and in- tt pure (that is where a. of itself 
 forms a distinct syllable ) terminate the genitive singular in a; ; as 
 -h vjuipa, the day, T ri; iuAoa;, of the day, 75 cp-.Xta, friendship, ni; ouSv.;- AB 
 others form the genitive in y i; , as r, tiouffa , rrfc jiousvj;, i\ £&i-a, tx; &'$$&* 
 The termination aj is, however, very general, among the Vulgar. 
 
17 
 
 AH Genitives plural in this Declension are circumflexed, 
 
 except of adjectives, whose Masculine and Neuter, of the 
 5. d declension , are proparoxytona, ( see aypos «Vf' a Hypo* ) 
 and of feminine substantives , derived from Masculine 
 paroxytona in oq ; as lav ho; , Iovkyi , lovhar. 
 
 Paroxytona as A^/ac, and properispomena , as piovaa. , /2i?- 
 ver move the accent, except in the genitive plural , ac- 
 cording to the above rule. 
 
 Oxytona, as t/^', rce^r move their accent; but , in the 
 genitive singular and plural , substitute the circumflex for 
 the acute. 
 
 Properispomena as povvx, acute the genitive singular, and 
 accusative plural. 
 
 Proparoxytona, in the same cases, advance the accent, to 
 
 the penult^ a$ 6aAac<70, , 9aAa<rcr»jff 4 Oa hdcaas . 
 
 CHAPTER VIL 
 
 This Declension comprises all Nouns isosyllabic, whether 
 substantives or adjectives , whose genitive singular termi- 
 nates in ov , from a nominative in oq , or ov , « , or /. 
 
 S P S P 
 
 N. 
 
 ay 
 
 (^cj-sr oc | aV 
 
 = 
 
 01 
 
 
 7TOLf 
 
 QiV ,0C 
 
 G. 
 
 sz: 
 
 . — ' ov 1 
 
 — ' 
 
 ov 
 
 
 
 OV 
 
 A, 
 
 M 
 
 0> \ 
 
 ' 
 
 OVQ 
 
 
 
 OV 
 
 y. 
 
 
 — £ i -? 
 s 
 
 ;= " 
 
 01 .. ~ 
 
 — • i 
 
 p 
 
 
 N. 
 
 ITf>C'cra?tfr 
 
 ov 
 
 
 nf 
 
 GVUGF 
 
 
 G. 
 
 -J 
 
 ov 
 
 
 — 
 
 ' 
 
 
 A. 
 
 ' 
 
 ov 
 
 
 — ' 
 
 
 
 
 V. 
 
 ' 
 
 oy 
 
 
 ~~i 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 P 
 
 
 N. 
 
 Aw\ocra/d 
 
 
 
 Aa>\oara^ 
 
 
 G. 
 
 
 
 io5 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 A. 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 V. 
 
 — ' — 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
sg 
 
 BF. 
 G. 
 
 A. 
 
 $a£" 
 
 
 at 
 
 G. 
 
 A. 
 ¥. 
 
 KA£;i 
 
 Kkifb 
 
 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 F 
 
 N. 
 
 2 of 
 
 k 
 
 -0<p 
 
 i 
 
 n 
 
 G. 
 
 
 
 cv 
 
 ■ — 
 
 He 
 
 A. 
 
 
 
 QV 
 
 
 
 tjv 
 
 Y. 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 F 
 
 G. 
 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 ?c? 
 
 avisos 
 ctyytAoe 
 
 turi'hoyot; 
 
 <T7 9 t 'A<X^o; 
 
 VfOOJUTTOV- 
 
 5<j(p at OV vSic, 1 Sop 
 
 — uv 
 
 a/ or out; 
 
 DECLINE LIKE. 
 
 (pant \ %Ktm 
 
 axixoi 
 
 Xifl 
 
 c<7<p'e q 
 hivKoi; 
 
3 9 
 
 M 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 F 
 
 N. 
 
 N. 
 
 ayf/ of 
 
 33 yf/ « 
 
 G. 
 
 ft- — ' ou 
 
 S3 i — ' as 
 
 A. 
 
 -J' — or 
 
 e= — ' cck 
 
 V. 
 
 .-*. — . e 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 N. 
 
 ay^/ o; 
 
 E3 yjj/ «/ or aiQ 
 
 G. 
 
 pS — ■ &v 
 
 £S — ~ 60K 
 
 A, 
 
 S3 — ' oi/c 
 
 33 - — ' «f Ora/f 
 
 Y. 
 
 — ' ©I 
 
 33 — ' a/ <?r a;? 
 
 ay ft 
 
 ayft 
 
 Adjectives of three terminations are, for obvious reasons, 
 here declined throughout ; though the feminine form be- 
 longs to the first declension , and, in writings of Reputation, 
 regulates its accent accordingly ; but they are very com* 
 monly accented throughout, in all Genders, on the antepe- 
 nult , as indicated by the double lines. 
 
 M. and F. 
 
 N. t>U oc 
 
 G, — — ov 
 A, •— — cv 
 V. ~Z ~ f 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 N. M. and F. 
 
 tvUz, ov tvtcfc oi | tvoo% 
 
 fl - V >' j v 
 
 N. 
 
 DECLINE LIKE. 
 
 xcu n iv(iOZ,oQ 
 
 M( tf KOtrOlKOQ 
 
 KCtl n TTTpOyQi/OC 
 
 HOC. I V\ KKnPOVOfJLQQ 
 
 h Kai r\ Qv^vyoQ 
 
aw* 
 
 Proparoxytona move the accent from the antepenult to 
 llie penult ? in the genitive singular and plural , and in 
 the accusative plural of Masculines and Feminines : see 
 avti^Troc;. For the Vulgar exceptions to this Rule , see the 
 appendix. 
 
 Paroxytona neither move nor change their accent : see 
 
 Oxytona never move their accent; hut substitute the 
 circumflex for the acute in the genitive of both numbers r 
 see trtxpb'ty kkuoK 
 
 Properispomena never move their accent ; but substi- 
 tute tlie acute for the circumflex , in the genitive of 
 both Numbers ; and m the accusative plural of Masculines 
 and Feminines. 
 
 As the first of the above rules, with respect to Proparox- 
 ytona , is the only one that affects the pronunciation of 
 Nouns , beginners need attend to that only. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII; 
 
 The Third Declension Isosyllabic comprises Nouns 
 Masculine and Feminine in w ^ gen: eve ; as 5 kat jj ey\a£«$, 
 gen: ovq ; and Nouns Neuter in a and ce • as to vJ\u(&e , 
 tj rer^-cf , gen: ov<;. 
 
 CVQ 
 
 k 
 
 N. 
 
 o, n, 
 
 iUKCtC 
 
 he 
 
 0. 
 
 
 
 cv 
 
 A. 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 V. 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 7X?X 
 
 o? 
 
 
 G. 
 
 «=— 
 
 ev$ 
 
 
 A. 
 
 r> 
 
 c? 
 
 
 V. 
 
 *JT 
 
 o«r 
 
 s. 
 

 DE 
 
 CLIKE 
 
 LIKE, 
 
 
 tvxatfiw 
 
 ' 
 
 T&X°5 
 
 
 cpayoO 
 
 tvaiGnc 
 
 
 •gtolQqz 
 
 
 f/dycvh&v 
 
 ivyivyc 
 
 
 TtkOC 
 
 
 5TeoapoJ 
 
 d&Ka£)iC 
 
 
 X i7K °s 
 
 
 yoo/jiou 
 
 tv-sr jtwyfc 
 
 
 pyos 
 
 
 /aVKuvSO 
 
 iVTtKWC 
 
 
 fsJaoz 
 
 
 XMlb&POU 
 
 The singular of <pay-™, a female glutton , is given under 
 tli is declension ; but its plural is found irregularly declin- 
 ed ^ like that of the masculine fiya.^ by addiiig ha and 
 cm to the Vocative singular : see the Declension of Hete- 
 rochtes. 
 
 Oxytona , as wnfins 9 declined after this form , never 
 move the accent ; but substitute the circumflex for the 
 acute in the genitive and accusative singular , and in all 
 the cases plural. x 
 
 Paroxytona, as Qpwsj'W, never move nor change the accent, 
 except in the genitive plural , which is circumflexed. 
 
 Proparoxytona Neuter , declined after tvha€ie , as 
 xcut'onht; , from the Masculine paroxytonon xoxobOjif , never 
 change the accent , except in the genitive plural , whose 
 final is circumflexed ; but they advance the accent to the 
 penult in the genitive singular, and in the N, A , and V 
 plural. 
 
 Properispomena , declined as the above , never move the 
 accent, but in the genitive plural , whose final is circum- 
 flexed: they substitute the acute for the circumflex , in 
 the Gen: Singular , and in the N , A , and V. Plural. 
 
 Paroxytona, as rh.o; , never move nor change the accent, 
 but in the G. Plural , which has the final circumflexed. 
 
CHAPTER IX 
 
 l. st DECLENSION, IMPARJSYLLABIC. 
 
 This Declension comprises all nouns increasing , and 
 forming their genitive case in o< , except those in w? , which 
 fall under the 2. d Declension Imparisyllabic, and some few 
 in vof 7 classed among the Heterochtes. 
 
 
 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 
 
 
 
 SING. 
 
 PLUR. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 yk 
 
 UV 
 
 
 , yt? 
 
 err 
 
 *r 
 
 G. 
 
 — -' 
 
 OVT 
 
 OC 
 
 1 — • 
 
 — ' 
 
 ©J' 
 
 A, 
 
 — ' 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 — ' 
 
 — 
 
 otc 
 
 V. 
 
 ytf 
 
 ov 
 
 
 i — * ' 
 
 — 
 
 €? 
 
 
 
 SING. 
 
 PLUR. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 Tfit t 
 
 / av 
 
 
 rpy 
 
 ov 
 
 er 
 
 G. 
 
 
 
 ov 
 
 ot; 
 
 — 
 
 —J 
 
 &/ 
 
 A. 
 
 
 
 — ' 
 
 CL 
 
 — , 
 
 — ' 
 
 ac 
 
 V. 
 
 , 
 
 ov 
 
 
 — 
 
 — ' 
 
 # 
 
 N. 
 
 vr^oiyu a 
 
 G. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 *— - at eg 
 — a 
 
 r* 
 
 vryayu. 
 
 N. 
 
 (J)(3 
 
 fMC 
 
 a 
 
 £<? 
 
 f £ > 
 
 ar 
 
 G. 
 
 , 
 
 — ' 
 
 ar of 
 
 
 — 
 
 — ' 
 
 A. 
 
 ' ' 
 
 — 
 
 a 
 
 
 , — ' 
 
 — i 
 
 V. 
 
 — ' 
 
 — 
 
 a 
 
 
 _,' 
 
 ^ 
 

 DECLINE 
 
 LIKE, 
 
 
 ytfav 
 
 jevyw 
 
 <GTfccy ( ux 
 
 fopp* 
 
 thi^OiC 
 
 Ctf^lTiKTUr 
 
 XfijM 
 
 wzuoyiV/MX 
 
 yiyac 
 
 
 ytv ( ux 
 
 (AU^USl 
 
 <rcth-z*riy% 
 
 
 lyfAct 
 
 C7iPtVjU.CC 
 
 hd^uy^ 
 
 
 tzriTapx, 
 
 'ariPifpfctyuct. 
 
 <pVKtt% 
 
 1 
 
 KVfAOL 
 
 -js-ctarAo^x 
 
 
 
 
 The interrogative rU is acuted throughout on the same 
 syllahle ; x/c rim tim §*c. The indefinite rk advances the 
 accent to the increment, in all the increasing cases; and, in 
 the genitive plural , substitutes the circumflex for the acute* 
 Monosyllabic substantives advance the accent to the incre- 
 ment , in the genitive case singular and plural: as x il ? > 
 yiifa , X}7fcc , x i7 ^ > X u ?® y > X i7 ? a s •> £«?*c\ except T^V, 
 <p«c , ^cCiq and Iol\ , which advance it only in the genitive 
 singular. 
 
 Oxytona, except in the above instances , never move the* 
 accent ; but substitute the circumflex for the acute , when 
 the increment is short , preceded by a long Vowel ; as 
 
 GttiTYlO , CUTMPOC y (TUTU POL , GTOOTypti; , (TOTVlgOU; . 
 
 The exceptions as to the Vocative singular , considering 
 its rare occurrence, would lead to useless prolixity ; see 
 page 8 line 6. 
 
 Paroxytona never change the accent ; nor ever move it 7 
 except in the genitive plural , where it is advanced a sylla- 
 ble : see y'tpw. _ 
 
 Proparoxytona never change the accent; but, in all the 
 increasing cases, advance it; because the language does not 
 admit of the retraction of the accent beyond the antepenult. 
 In the genitive plural , the accent advances two syllables : 
 
 SCe (pOPi/AOt. 
 
 Properispomena never move the accent , except in the 
 
genitive plural, where they advance it a syllable ; they sub* 
 stitute.the acute for the circumflex in all the increasing 
 cases j see & fay pa. 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 2. d DECLEKSJON IMPARISYLLABrC* 
 
 This Declension comprises all nouns increasing ? and 
 forming their genitive singular in ios , or ea>;. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 SINGULAR 
 
 criK 
 
 cue 
 
 c* 
 
 PLURAL, 
 ci\ tig 
 
 ' £ tiV 
 
 I «$• or^ctdiKili 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 A, 
 V. 
 
 j3aff 
 
 N. 
 
 v£f 
 
 /f . 
 
 
 G. 
 
 r~2. 
 
 £ 
 
 d»j 
 
 A. 
 
 — c/ 
 
 .'f 
 
 
 V. 
 
 — ' 
 
 / or 
 
 *f 
 
 % 
 
 «/<r 
 
as 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 ^. 
 
 V. 
 
 yruo - 
 
 •*«■ i or i; 
 
 yvQ<r 
 
 tig 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 
 fixvixtvi; 
 
 fftly 
 
 $C$V{ 
 
 K 
 
 53 
 
 xp/V 
 
 e<c 
 
 t as 
 
 ,—, 
 
 _-' 
 
 i 
 
 IV 
 
 ^n 
 
 _' 
 
 £/C 
 
 i or i; 
 
 =2 
 
 —- ' 
 
 */f 
 
 3LINE LIKE. 
 
 
 
 Ca 0u yvtSviq 8f y^/c vvyxftcrie 
 
 <Tvyypa.<pive 
 
 fca^uf 
 
 bCifV 
 
 ttavatg 
 
 <Z3-ifl'(JTCt.<j}$ 
 
 qCLKHfiVS 
 
 'srharvz 
 
 vKoitv 
 
 K^OLItQ 
 
 S>! ( « ewns 
 
 wpojui^wc 
 
 fyxxvc 
 
 fy*** 
 
 *u 
 
 «r«fao3<r/c 
 
 ivftipivz 
 
 yhVKVt; 
 
 y^vxy 
 
 ZfiVlQ 
 
 fc'/W/f 
 
 i&TTtVC 
 
 l$tp.vz 
 
 QP/^ttt/ 
 
 vhr.it 
 
 *f«5« 
 
 
 
 ACCENTUATION. 
 
 
 Oxytona of this declension /zetw move the accent , 
 that is , it is always on the same syllable as in the nomi- 
 native. In the plural isosyilabic cases , the circumflex is 
 substitued for the acute?: see CaW*; as also in the Vocative 
 Singular , when the nominative ends in e«V: scejSamsuV. 
 
 Paroxytona neither move, nor change , the accent : see 
 
 Proparoxytona never change the accent ; but in the ge- 
 nitive singular , and in all the cases plural , advance it a 
 syllable : see <Tuy^m<;, 
 
 Propenspomena never move the accent , but substitute 
 
26 
 
 the acute for the circnmflex, in the genitive singular, an<3 
 in all the cases plural : see ymmu 
 
 CHAPTER XL 
 
 OF HETEROCLITES. 
 
 l. st We will notice those that are declined like nouns 
 of the i. st declension Isosyllabic in the singular , and in- 
 crease in the plural; as x xT &c a Pilgrim, <pxy&s 9 a glut* 
 tone us Man. 
 
 S P 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 (pay 
 
 <pxy 
 
 —J S 
 
 or istts 
 or hue 
 
 Or lux 
 
 Nouns in tw'c of the first declension , accented on the 
 final, are very generally declined like <paya^ ; as mc/Skrv,*; 
 MaQura'W- 
 
 S P 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 A. 
 V. 
 
 X« T l 
 
 x*l 
 
 1 
 
 *blC 
 
 or loue 
 
 — , 
 
 • — ' 
 
 bar 
 
 
 — 
 
 . — ' 
 
 See 
 
 or late 
 
 — . 
 
 ~J 
 
 fe 
 
 or lais 
 
 o.. A] ? Those in ov , sue , declined , in the singular, like 
 Neuters of the 3. d Declension Isoyllabic. They are the fe* 
 minines of nouns of the same nature as pa^ac , expressive 
 of some kind of excess , or indicating some trade or cal- 
 ling ; as p-xyQv\ a gluttonous Woman; nola^v , a Woman 
 having a large foot. 
 
N, 
 G. 
 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 
 p*y 
 
 f>ay 
 
 py 
 
 
 or hai$ 
 
 — 
 
 — ' 
 
 u 
 
 or W 
 
 — « 
 
 — . .' 
 
 h: 
 
 or S«/c 
 
 Some few Proper Names of Women are declined as follows: 
 
 N. 
 
 i 
 
 &k<rsr(>) 
 
 G. 
 
 rr.r 
 
 AfVcrwc 
 
 A. 
 
 TJJP 
 
 Aivza-d) 
 
 V. 
 
 a 
 
 Aivaroi) 
 
 3. dly Nouns borrowed from Foreign Languages , which 
 very slightly differ from the foregoing , such as Kxtpfk ? 
 coffee , or a cup of coffee , Koifpns , a coffee-house. 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 
 A. 
 
 V. 
 
 Hflt^ip 
 
 a^fp 
 
 dec or mc 
 
 or 
 
 or 
 
 hair 
 loug 
 
 DECLINE LIKE. 
 
 fayoic 
 
 frvhcovots 
 
 <puyov 
 
 •yCOJAQV 
 XKUOCtfGV 
 
 (/.ouyovhcj 
 
 xaytpii'k 
 
 (J.'&'jLM.Tiir 
 
 Nouns declined like the above never move their accent, 
 and are generally acuted throughout the plural , contrary 
 
 to general principles as; fdqw: pi }*, 
 
 :\KMt; , fchhriow. 
 
tiu$ 
 
 efo\ 
 
 ©r 
 
 eu 
 
 _ 
 
 COV 
 
 OUV 
 
 — 
 
 oi% 
 
 cu 
 
 -^. 
 
 of 
 
 a8 
 
 S P 
 
 N. cto*, 
 
 G. ~ 
 
 A. — 
 
 V. ~ 
 
 The Vulgar use dtrxoe , W\5c , &c, and decline them 
 regularly, like voyhs : r»uc , the plural of which is very httie 
 in use among the Vulgar, is declined as the above. Writers 
 decline the plural as the ancients , vo - tc - m -las - tc , and 
 sometimes use the resolved form of the genitive singular , 
 vo - c<r. 
 
 5. thly Nouns of the i . st Declension Imparisyllabic in «c 
 gen: vtoc -will be sometimes found declined in the singular 
 as Nouns of the i. st Declension Isosyllabic, with the excep* 
 tion of the genitive, which always ends in *c: thus /ja^ifo- 
 rurx from (fafGaffanc. The plural is always regular. 
 S 
 
 N. f ap(3apo T4T a 
 
 G. ~~ - 05 
 
 A. — ' — ■ a 
 
 V. _/—.;« 
 
 Nouns of the above class are also sometimes thus declined 
 in the singular /3a^a^ T v\ , m , nv , h 
 
 Some Nouns Imparisyllabic in i« , mostly proper Names, 
 are declined in the genitive singular , and throughout the 
 plural after Nouns of the i . st Declension Imparisyllabic ; 
 While , in the Accusative and Vocative singular , they ana- 
 logize with Nouns of the 2. d Declension Imparisyllabic- 
 S P~ 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 A, 
 
 TLdp 
 
 n«p 
 
 00$ 
 
 OCOV 
 
 tv 
 
 i; or t 
 
 _' — $£: 
 
Nouns in u 
 
 ? ucff have the 
 S 
 
 If. ly§ us 
 
 G. — u 
 
 A . ' — uv 
 
 Y. — u or 
 
 o; 
 
 same Irregularities* 
 P 
 
 r 
 
 — — a$ ty80> 
 
 The following are irregular in the singular , but have 
 the plural regularly formed , after the i. st Declension 
 Imparisyllabic. 
 
 & rcamfp or ssaT.spa^ genitive %%xp<; or warepa 
 
 6 aV/fp or av^pa<; dcv'SpIck or av&pa 
 
 & itoku<; xoX>vOu accusative roAuv 
 
 tq yuvii or yuvaika yuvaotcfe or yuvaixag 
 
 K] GuyaTTip or OuyaTsp* Guyarpo^ or 6uyaTspa$ 
 
 */j yacr/fp or yaartpa yacrpo; or yacTspa^ 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 Of AUGMENTATIVES AIN T I> DIMINUTIVES, 
 
 Nouns form Feminine Augmentatives in x?a : as from ro 
 arolctft, the foot , vi wold pa , fAe large foot , masculine Di- 
 minutives in aW which are for the most part proper 
 Names, or receive the addition from the speaker ? to express 
 endearment or affection ; as, from EyWa8«c, A^ht^c , are 
 formed o 27aj)aW , b Auju.nrfctjc.ns ; my little Eustathius y my 
 little Demetrius. Many Neuter appellatives also have this 
 termination ; as to vrafiani, the little infant; to Tfai&$ixi , 
 the little table ; to vrolxfuxi , the small foot , formed from 
 ©■aw/, Tfxvrefy, urohlfi. Feminine diminutives end in iVja &~ 
 
 Helen, from 4 y /C* > ^^ > an ^ ^rcwwA* ^.ay, and Sracr/rfo ^<w , 
 
So 
 my beloved or little Anas tada , from *kvwYcaici. These di* 
 minutives are often applied to grown persons , as more 
 polite and affectionate than the proper Name , without 
 the addition. 
 
 There are also adjectives in ovtZmgc - h ~ cv , which come 
 under this denomination , and answer to the words in Ita- 
 lian ending in ino , etto ; as yuy^ovr^oQ f n> QV , very small; 
 and in uccio as kcckovt'Iiko; - *j - cv , very pretty. 
 
 CHAPTER XIII. 
 
 OF COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES. 
 
 i. We have, in the course of the Declensions, referred 
 adjectives to three different forms: in oq , v , »v ; the second 
 vc , uoc, v ; and the third in w , ec. All these form their 
 comparatives &f superlatives from the nominative singular 
 of the neuter in % v , ec : thus , from the neuter of the 
 vulgar, to <T9<pb, is formed the comparative <ro<pcL>Ti$os, <joyuT^r lf 
 votpuTifev, wiser, or more wise, and the superlative vocpuTCLrot; , (i) 
 co$tlr&TY], votpcdTetTov wisest, or most wise. From £aQJ, deep , 
 the comparative fiMrifct; , faUn^n > £olQvti$ov deeper , and 
 the superlative /2a3-Jraroc , Qo&vtxtyi , P>Mto.7ov deepest; and 
 from euVs&y pious, the comparative vjm&gii^ , ivvifiw^fn , 
 vjviQiGTifov , more pious , and the superlative iwtQtirT&TQS , 
 
 ivv&ivry.TVi , i.vGi&(TTcncv , most pioilS. 
 
 i. Some few Nouns in o? change this termination into io-ftps, 
 ivrifvi , tcrrtfov , for the comparative , and , turctroc , fof&ffi ? 
 tiTTUTov , for the superlative; as , a^eToc has ayj s u\vri^ &c. , 
 in the comparative, and dx^ li0rrOLT0 ^ fy c —> m tne superlative^ 
 
 Comparatives and superlatives are , in the masculine and 
 neuter, declined after nouns of the first fy second, declension 
 of the same terminations. 
 
 (i) Writers generally terminate and accentuate the feminine thus 
 so - wrap!* - wTatr;; paO - uts'pa -y-raTVi; euasfS * ecTSfa - ecrTarvi. 
 
3r 
 
 3. The accent is uniformly oil the antepenult, as in ny^m* 
 f See Chapter 7 , Page 19) Good Writers, however, ad- 
 vance the accent to the penult, in the feminine; and, in the 
 masculine and neuter , follow the Rules for accentuating 
 proparoxyiona in oc , §v % of the second declension. 
 
 4. Though the intonation, is precisely the same, it is, for 
 the sake of orthography , necessary to remark a difference 
 in the formation of comparatives and superlatives from po- 
 sitives in oq — When h is preceded by a short syllable , the 
 comparative 8$ superlative are formed by changing oq into 
 &Tifo; S$c, , as from ayiog , the * being short , are formed 
 dyuijifOG, dyiuTQLTos &c. ; when preceded by a long syllable, 
 or by a a mute followed by a liquid , they are formed by 
 changing qq into on^os , otxtos 8§c. ; as from ztittcc , 6t>W*.e? are 
 
 formed tirwroTtfot , wktt'otoltoc , 8$ woxarKOTifa t ivo&Kqtsltq?, 8$C 
 
 5. Ka>oc, bad, makes in the comparative xtif'oTifoc, ^e/^re^, 
 yii^'on^v, worse ; in the superlative ax kit roe, kolkiwtv], koikittov, 
 worst-, xxk'gc , good) in the comparative jcz^'repof, kolmt^h 
 xoLMTifoY , and KOLKKiov. better ; in the superlative kcLkkittqq. 
 
 X-tiKKlTTV, KUKKlTTOV, best 
 
 6. The superlative is generally used absolutely; as, «- 
 qotztoS) generally means very wise, and not, the most wise; 
 when the quality is expressed relatively, it is more common 
 to use the comparative, particularly among the Vulgar; as, 
 
 i vofQTifog a arc rou; difyuwove , the wisest of men. 
 
 CHAPTER XIV. 
 
 NOUNS OF NUMBER. 
 
 The five following Cardinal Numbers are declined. 
 
 MASCULINE. FEMININE. NEUTER. 
 
 ST. tic, or eva; pja or ^i sv or h& 
 
 G, ivo; pa; evos 
 
 A« s'va piav or pixr ev or eva 
 
32 
 
 MASCULINE 5: FEMININE* 
 
 N£tT?ii&* 
 
 N. 
 
 Tf«$ 
 
 G. 
 
 tptSv 
 
 A. 
 
 Tpet; 
 
 N. 
 
 Teccaps? 
 
 <;. 
 
 T£cr<5ocptov 
 
 A. 
 
 tsssapas 
 
 three 
 
 four 
 
 ^ u vs. 
 
 tpia 
 
 T£<7G«p0t)V 
 
 With the compounds bx«rji«7'C) IwaTfia thirteen , and 
 WareVaftc , lixcLTtwufot. , declined like their simples. 
 
 The remaining Cardinal numbers, up to a hundred, are 
 indeclinable : they are. 
 
 TTsvre 
 
 OXTIri 07" O^TCO 
 
 £WEa or £vv£se 
 Sexa 
 
 o^oY/ta 
 
 ^£Xa7T6VTe 
 
 O£3ta£TwT0C 
 O£X,<X0X.Tfc) 
 &£X.a£VV£Ct 
 
 two 
 
 five 
 
 six 
 
 seven 
 
 eight 
 
 nine 
 
 ten 
 
 eleven 
 
 twelve 
 
 fifteen 
 
 sixteen 
 
 seventeen 
 
 eighteen 
 
 nineteen 
 
 twenty 
 
 eixoct Tpef; Tpta 
 eijcocrt T£craap£4 TeWapa 
 
 6WC0CI 7TEVT6 
 
 etXociETCTa 
 
 ElJtOfftOJtTto 
 
 Ewcocrisvvea 
 
 Tptavra 
 capavra 
 
 oyoo'/iVTa oydwvra 
 
 5VV£V7)VTa 
 
 exaTov 
 
 twenty one 
 twenty two 
 twenty three 
 twenty four 
 twenty five 
 twenty six 
 twenty seven 
 twenty eight 
 twenty nine 
 thirty 
 forty 
 fifty 
 sixty 
 seventy 
 eighty 
 ninety 
 one hundred 
 
 (i) £fy is used before words beginning with a consonant-?^ yOwh;. 
 
33 
 The hundreds beyond the first are declined. 
 
 kASCULINE. FEMININE NEUTER. 
 
 ''£iazo<7Loi oiaxo'ciai? 
 
 Tpiaxosiai Tpiaxdciai? 
 
 *-£TpaXQ<7tQ& TST.paXOGiai? 
 
 jtevraDufafioi TCEVTaftoGioEtg 
 
 i^axoaiot e^axdatais 
 
 iiCTontftaiw ETCTaxdcrtais 
 
 ^Xtocxogio t oxraxodia ig 
 
 €vv6a>cocriQt £vv£axd(7iat,<; 
 
 yCkioi yiAtai? 
 
 The following are the Ordinal Numbers, in the nomi- 
 native of each sender. 
 
 ^UXKOGiaC 
 
 200 
 
 Tpiaxdcia 
 
 3oo 
 
 TETpaxdeta 
 
 4 00 
 
 TcsvTax.daia 
 
 5 00 
 
 s^ay-ddia 
 
 600 
 
 eTTTajtdci'a 
 
 700 
 
 oxTaxdcia 
 
 800 
 
 ivve^ptoGria 
 
 900 
 
 5(iAia 
 
 1000 
 
 MASCULINE. 
 
 FEMININE!. 
 
 NEUTER. 
 
 irpwT^v 
 
 0'£UT£p©V 
 
 TptTOV 
 
 TET&pTOV 
 
 7C£[ATTTQV 
 
 SXTOV 
 
 SJ3oO£/.QV 
 
 oyooov 
 svvatoV 
 oexaroM 
 
 SVOEXOtTOV 
 QWOEXaTOV 
 
 oexoctoc TpiTO? fecaTYj TpiVn &x&Toy tpiVov thirteenth 
 
 osxaTosTETapTocSexaTviTSTapTTi Jexarbv TsrapTOV fourteenth 
 <)?xaT.o; -rcep/rcTO? §r. up to 
 
 eixogtos uxogtyj eixogtov twentieth 
 
 SutQ'trrdg wpwTO? eixogtyj xptoT"/} £ixocTov7rpwTav one §• twentieth 
 
 TptaxoaTo? TptaxoGTVj Tpta'xoGTOv thirtieth 
 
 TSGGapaxQGT§s TTGdapaxoVr^ TccsapaxoGTov fortieth 
 
 IT p WTO 5 
 
 '^£UT£pQ? 
 
 rpiTol 
 
 T£TKpTO? 
 k^TTTO? 
 §XTO§ 
 £-P6o(/.OS 
 
 Syaoof 
 
 tvVOCTO? 
 
 'SExaTOC 
 svSsxaTos 
 
 ©fe>OSXaTQg 
 
 ItpWTTl 
 
 0£UT£.ptt 
 TplTTf 
 
 T£TapTVj 
 
 •7r£^7TTia 
 
 £XT7) 
 
 £p^O[X71 
 
 oySdvi 
 evvaTvj 
 Sexccty) 
 
 EVOEXaTTJ 
 OWOEXC6T7] 
 
 first 
 
 second* 
 
 third 
 
 fourth 
 
 fifth 
 
 sixth 
 
 seventh 
 
 eighth 
 
 ninth 
 
 tenth 
 
 eleventh 
 
 twelfth 
 
34 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1?SVT7]Z0-GTQ<; 
 
 VI 
 
 ov 
 
 5o. tb 
 
 Staxoctoc-To? 
 
 * 
 
 ov 
 
 200* 
 
 £^7f/-0CT0<; 
 
 *4 
 
 ov 
 
 6o. Ul 
 
 TpiflOiOClOCTOS 
 
 4 
 
 GV 
 
 3oo> 
 
 sp6o|Av;xocT05 
 
 vi 
 
 ov 
 
 
 T£TpOCXOClOCTO; 
 
 vj 
 
 OV 
 
 4oo. lb 
 
 6yoovr/,ocTO£ 
 
 •^ 
 
 ov 
 
 So." 1 
 
 WSVTaXOClOCTO? 
 
 ^ 
 
 ov 
 
 5oo* 
 
 gwewfljcoffTos 
 
 ?i 
 
 ov 
 
 th 
 9°- 
 
 eqafcociocros 
 
 i 
 
 ov 
 
 fioo. 1 
 
 ex-aTocTa; 
 
 $ 
 
 ov 
 
 loo;" 1 
 
 <?/c. 
 
 ere. 
 
 etc. 
 
 CHAPTER XY. 
 
 OF PRONOUNS. 
 PRONOUNS PERSONAL, 
 
 FIRST PERSON. 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 * 
 
 syto I 
 
 •fylek §' £(A£t? 
 
 W€ 
 
 G. 
 
 [aoS of me 
 
 ^p.wv 
 
 of US 
 
 A. 
 
 p.e <^ ipva me 
 
 p.a$ 5f ^[xa; 
 
 ns 
 
 SECOND PERSON. 
 
 G. 
 
 CU vX £CU 
 
 coy 
 
 tliou 
 of thee 
 
 caf; 8j £c&% 
 
 ye 
 
 a; 
 v.- 
 
 Gs vSc icsva 
 co cu $$" ecu. 
 
 thee 
 o thou 
 
 co c£i'^ §* £G£?; 
 
 of you 
 o ye 
 
 THIRD PERSON. 
 
 M F N M F » 
 
 IS", aura; auTTj auTo he, she, it | auTol au^aTt- auTa they 
 
 G. tqu Tvi? toj of him, her,. it Itwv ofthem 
 
 A. tov t/jv to him, her, it |tou$ Tat"; ik them 
 
 The oblique c ses of the pronouns of the third person 
 are formed by aphaeresis , or elision of the first syllable of 
 the pronoun demonstrative on/rfc, «Jnj, avrl. Good Writers, 
 
35 
 
 however , and those who speak most correctly , disapprove 
 this elision , and write, <5f pronounce it, just as it is given 
 in the chapter on demonstrative pronouns. 
 
 2. There is also a compound pronoun , which ? as more 
 polite 8$ respectful , is used instead of the simple , in all 
 persons , numbers , ty cases , the accusative excepted ; as 
 follows. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 FIRST PERSON. SECOND PERSON. TpIRD PERSON. 
 
 you [xou too Xoyou cou tqu Aoyou fou or tyi; 
 of me. thou, oroi thee, he, she, or of him, her 
 
 ' [I, or 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 •vr o r> I T0 '^ ^°'y ou F- a $ T0 ^ Ao'you cr a ? T°S Aoyou tod; 
 * ^ ' | we, or of us ye, or of you they, or of them 
 
 CHAPTER XVI. 
 
 OE PRONOUNS POSSESSIVE. 
 
 I. The Modern Greek Language has, strictly speaking, 
 no pronoun possessive , answering to our pronouns my , 
 thy , his , her , our , your , their. 
 
 a. As a substitute, it has a form , compounded of the 
 adjective eWc , expressive of property, or peculiarity, and 
 the genitive singular, or the accusative plural of the per- 
 sonal pronoun. The adjective is thus declined , as other 
 adjectives in oc , n , cv % 
 
 FIRST PERSON. 
 SINGULAR. 
 MASCULINE. FEMININE. NEUTER. 
 
 iN\ d i<Sv/jiq [/.ou I y\ s&ljo) piou to Iotjcov [/.ou my, or mine 
 G. tou §&lxou [/.ou |ty;s eJw.visf/.ou tqu s&i/.qu [/-ou of my,or mine 
 A. tov sowo'v [jlou Styjv I^Dcviv J/.OU to s^ixov [./.ou my, or mine 
 
M F N 
 
 G.Ttovimxwv [XOU 
 
 or miner 
 
 t cov £ ^)cwv [xou twv eo tx&v f/.ou of in J, of mine? 
 Ta^ £^L7.aqxou |~-a £^V/.cc p.oi* my , or mine, 
 
 The above form answers for all the possessive pronouns, 
 by substituting for (aov, the gem lives jo v thy , r ov his, tv:, 
 her, ra>v , or the accusatives tck; , their , and |W ac , our , 
 exg , voar. 
 
 The lower classes usually indulge in the elision of the 
 incipient Vowel , and say b 'huh y-ov , rev &;c. 
 
 The personal pronouns //.ov, oav 8$c. , are enclitics in thes« 
 examples, as in that of the compound personal pronoun tc» 
 Koyov ^'oy^-and therefore lose their accent: see Chap. 12. 
 
 CHAPTER XVII. 
 
 OF DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUJVS. 
 
 1. The Modern Greek has three demonstrative Pronouns: 
 
 avrlQy qlvtv,, xvto ; tovtoc, tqvty], tovto, this ' and exfe/Voc , eafc/m , 
 tituvs", that: the former two indicating proximity, and the 
 latter remoteness : 
 
 2. They are thus declined. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 N; 
 
 auTo;, 
 
 aOTvi , 
 
 auTo 
 
 » 
 
 this 
 
 C- 
 
 auToi), 
 
 aOT'?,;," 
 
 auTOu 
 
 
 of this 
 
 A. 
 
 auTov, 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 ai»TO 
 
 
 this 
 
 N. 
 
 auToi , 
 
 aiiTaT; , 
 
 auToc 
 
 
 these 
 
 G. 
 
 auTcov , 
 
 O.'UTWV , 
 
 aiiTtov 
 
 
 of these 
 
 ki, 
 
 auTO'k , 
 
 ccuTai? , 
 
 aura 
 
 
 these 
 
 (1) Some Authors write &utrf c , r , o'v and in the plural feminine 
 W i&M.'. , A t£uut£ 
 
 (2) The above is the more usual Form j but many Writers prefer 
 $he Hellenic iOtc; , cc3tt) . 
 
 TOOT©. 
 
% 
 
 
 
 SJNCxULAR, 
 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 F 
 
 N 
 
 
 «r. 
 
 toutqc, 
 
 T0UT7] , 
 
 touto 
 
 this 
 
 <;. 
 
 TOUTOU , 
 
 TOUT?]? , 
 
 TOUTOU 
 
 of this 
 
 A, 
 
 TOUTOV, 
 
 TGUT7IV , 
 PLURAL. 
 
 tquto 
 
 this 
 
 N. 
 
 TOUTOL, 
 
 Toursa?, 
 
 Toura 
 
 these 
 
 G. 
 
 ■TOUTtoy, 
 
 TOUTWV , 
 
 TOUTCOV 
 
 of these 
 
 A. 
 
 TOUTOU? , 
 
 TouT-ai; ; 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 TOUTGf 
 
 these 
 
 y. 
 
 Ixeiyof, 
 
 ixe(v7] , 
 
 ixava 
 
 that 
 
 G. 
 
 £/.£LVOU , 
 
 exeiyviS., 
 
 .ixeivoy 
 
 of that 
 
 A. 
 
 Jjt&tyoy , 
 
 SXSIV71V, 
 PLURAL. 
 
 tokpyp 
 
 that 
 
 N. 
 
 £%e?vot, 
 
 ixsiyaig , 
 
 gxaya 
 
 those 
 
 G. 
 
 £/C£tVCOV, 
 
 l>i£lV&)V , 
 
 exsivcov 
 
 of those 
 
 A. 
 
 £>C£lVbU5J 
 
 exetvatg , 
 
 ixsivac 
 
 those 
 
 . The vulgar add a syllable to these pronouns, which 
 in general rhtmes with the vowel of the final syllable, and 
 receives the accent. Thus, they say , ocutouvou , kutyivyis , 
 auTo'vav , auTr'vav , ocutcovwv , ocutouvou? , auT'/jvat? , instead of 
 •tuTOlj! , ou-T/fe , ocutov , ocuttiv , auTwv , gcltou? , auTcag , and 
 
 TGUTOUVGU , T0UT7]V7JS , TOUTOVGC , TOUTYIVOC , TOUTOIVOI , TOUT7)VaL<; 
 
 toutwvwv , toutquvou; , instead of TOUTOU , TOUTY]? , TOUTOV , 
 touttiv, to'jtoi, toutou.;, toutwv, toutou?. In like manner gxeivova, 
 exsivTiva , £X£ivou, gjcavwv, instead of exejyoy , IxswTfjv , ? exeivov , 
 
 CHAPTER XVIII. 
 
 OF PRONOUNS RELATIVE. 
 
 The Pronoun relative is 6 oirofas , r, dxota , to otcoTov , 
 <*vV, or xv/wc/z: it is always preceded by the article, and is 
 declined like iypiof, ia, iov of the second declension; tbusj 
 
33 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 MASCULINE. FEMININE. NEUTER. 
 
 N. oottoTo; -ii oroia to dxoibv who, or which 
 
 G. tquojco&ou T'/j^oTroia; tou6~olqu of whom, or winch 
 
 A. tov ottoTov T/ivorotav to qtcoTov whom, or which 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 N. ol oiroibt at otcouxi; Ta drota who, or which 
 
 G. tcov oiroiwv TMvdiuoiwv twvotcoicov of whom, or which 
 
 A, tou; QTTOiou; ta$ oTCoia; toc ottoicc whom, or which 
 
 2. The Moderns use bc-tjc as a relative in the nominative 
 case only of each number ; thus : N. S. oerie , tine , , rt : 
 IN. PI. « rmc , ai rmc: the neuter has no plural. 
 
 CHAPTER XIX. 
 
 OF REFLECTED PRONOUNS. 
 
 The reflected Pronoun is/a Compound ; and is employed 
 to express the reflection of an action on the subject of a 
 Verb. It has only two cases, and agrees with all genders ; 
 as follows : 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 FIRST PERSON. SFCOND PERSON, THIRD PERSON. 
 
 G. tou iaurou (jlou tou eauTOu <jou isoft eauTOu too, or tyi$ 
 of myself of thy self of him or herself 
 
 A. tov eauToV-jtou t6v lauTov cou tov Ioutov tou, or rtfl 
 myself thyself him, or herself 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 G. tou socutou [/,#$ tou eauTOu <ja$ TOu&autou tou<; Ottwv 
 of ourselves of yourselves of themselves 
 
 A. tov eauTo'v {/.a$ tov Iocuto'v ccc<; tov lauTov tou$ 
 ourselves yourselves themselves 
 
CHAPTER XX; 
 
 --OF INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS., 
 
 
 M 
 
 F 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 N 
 
 K. 
 
 woto? , 
 
 wofo, 
 
 woibv 
 
 G. 
 
 WOtOU, 
 
 wow;, 
 
 wo toy 
 
 A, 
 
 WOIQV , 
 
 woiav, 
 
 TTOtOV 
 PLURAL. 
 
 N. 
 
 woibt, 
 
 wotat$ , 
 
 WOW 
 
 C, 
 
 WQIWV , 
 
 WQltay , 
 
 woiwy 
 
 A. 
 
 XGlOU?, 
 
 woias , 
 
 woTa 
 
 who or which ? 
 
 of whom or which? 
 
 whom or which? 
 
 who or which? 
 
 of whom or which? 
 
 whom or which? 
 
 This Pronoun is.J by Synezesis, contracted into a Monosyl- 
 lable , with a strong accent on the final vowel : as 
 
 tsoiqc, , 7:01a , TTOtO. 
 
 From wotou, woia?, the vulgar form wotavou, woiavvfe, 8$c a 
 FromoAwv, oXou;, they form oAov&v , qaqvqus of all, all ^c. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 MASCULINE §* FEMININE. NEUTER, 
 
 H. 
 
 Tl$ 
 
 Tt 
 
 which or what? 
 
 G. 
 
 TWO? 
 
 TWOS 
 
 of which or what? 
 
 A. 
 
 Tiva 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 which or what? 
 
 F, 
 
 TlVS^ 
 
 Ttva 
 
 which or what? 
 
 G. 
 
 TlVCOV 
 
 TlVtoV 
 
 of which or what? 
 
 A. 
 
 Tiva; 
 
 TtVOt 
 
 which or what? 
 
 The English Word " Wliat " is more indefinite in its 
 signification " which " more strictly relative ; as what 
 arguments did he adduce ; that is , indefinitely , of all the 
 arguments that might he adduced : which arguments did 
 he adduce; that is ? of those expected , or agreed upon ? or 
 knowiu 
 
4* 
 
 CHAPTER XXI. 
 
 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 T/i-jff or, tic some one, or some, or a certain one. This, 
 pronoun is used where we use the indefinite article > or, 
 speak in the plural indefinitely , without an article. 
 
 
 MASCULINE. 
 
 FEMININE. 
 
 NEUTER. 
 
 N, 
 
 TLva; , ti's 
 
 Tig 
 
 f\ 
 
 G. 
 
 TtVO? 
 
 Tivbs 
 
 flVQ£ 
 
 A. 
 
 TtV.i 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 tI 
 
 K- 
 
 Ttvj; 
 
 TIV££- 
 
 TW* 
 
 G. 
 
 TIV&V 
 
 TLVCOV 
 
 TtVtoV 
 
 A. 
 
 Tiya$ 
 
 %tykq 
 
 tw« 
 
 It is cteehned like the interrogative t/c, with the excep- 
 tion of having the accent on the final syllable ,. and being 
 sometimes an enclitic. 
 
 The Ynlgar use y^mo'i , ptpxat , pi find; 
 
 2. Keifi-mxr.-pcj, v, ov some , in the sense of quantity , i& 
 declined like 0-09-6; , n , o> v Ko:/rc/-cc , ce , ov y some r a certain^ 
 like ottc?5c , »' cttoiol , to oto?oi/ ; except that the accent is 
 throughout on the antepenult. The same exception , as to 
 the position of the accent, holds throughout oVo/oc , ottoix , 
 ovoiov, whosoever. 
 
 3. Kdvilr, or Kdmm , ndy.yJa ^Kdvh, any one, someone, is 
 declined like uq , ^/«, iv. It is compounded with negatives 
 and affirmatives , answering to our somebody , anybody , 
 nobody. 
 
 4- In o\iy to lt7m or To&e such an one, the article alone is 
 declinable, as ulot rm rdli ywa.7m, I have seen such a Woman 
 tlht roy rah, I have seen such a one. 
 
4? 
 
 CHAPTER XXIL 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 1. The modern Greek Verb has two Yoices ; the active 
 and passive. 
 
 2. Three Modes ; the Indicative, the Imperative, and the 
 Subjunctive, 
 
 It has also an active participle , undeclined , in ovrae; and 
 twrat;, uvroit; , agreeing with all numbers and persons, ann 
 swering to our participle in ing ; and \% has two passive 
 participles, declinable, the one present, yfa.$bp.-woc,uvi, wov 9 
 being written , the other past , y^y.^tvoQ } ivu 9 *w written. 
 
 Verbs that are both active and neuter , which are very 
 numerous, have this latter participle; oW<^ I rot, both 
 transitively and intransitively, participle past, trono-ftew. 
 
 3. The Modern Greek like other Modern languages has 
 both simple and compound Tenses. 
 
 Present 
 
 (Continuati 
 Imperfect 
 SAorist 
 Indefinite 
 
 J Pluperfect 
 Compound. < Future 
 
 [ Conditional 
 
 l\. The Indicative is the only Mood that has them alb 
 
 The two others have only the present , or rather the 
 
 continuative, and the Aorist, or indefinite. The imperative 
 
 has only the second person of each Number, taking the otjier 
 
 persons from the Subjunctive. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIII, 
 
 OF CONJUGATION. 
 
 *. There is, in Modern Greek, but one Conjugation; but 
 this contains barytona , \\\ u , and perispomena in «, 
 a. The first have the acute accent on the penult ; and 
 
are therefore called barytona ( see chapter i , §. 6 ) 
 Perispomena are formed , by contraction , from verbs in 
 ia &&). They follow the form of circumflcxed Verbs , or 
 Perispomena in the present , and the contmuative Tenses 
 only. 
 
 CHAPTER XXIV. 
 
 OF THE FORMATION OF THE TEXSES. 
 
 I. Tlie simple Tenses are all formed from the present. 
 TI13 derivatives differ from the present in the four follow- 
 ing particulars. i. st by the addition of an augment. 
 o.. iy By a change of the characteristic. 3. ly By a change 
 of termination. l\. iy and lastly , in a great number of 
 Verbs , by changing , in the aorist , and in the tenses 
 formed from it, the Vowel or Diphthong preceding the 
 ciiaracteristic of the present , ( see Chap. 24 , a/ Part 
 §•4,7.9-) 
 
 OF THE AUGMENT. 
 
 There are two kinds of augments ; the syllabic, and the 
 temporal. 
 
 The syllabic augment is an*, prefixed to certain tenses 
 of Verbs beginning with a consonant; as from ypfi>, I write, 
 tyra-iy.^ I wrote,- fi-srru I throw, 'if. fcx , I threw. 
 
 The temporal augment is a change of the mutable Tow- 
 els and Diphthongs x e, cu , ei , oat , w , into the im- 
 mutable Vowels vi , ©, and Diphthong m;; as from dxo-Ja , / 
 hear, ?jws <t,1 heard', i^yx^, 1 reproach 'i Kiyfy ••, I reproached. 
 
 Verbs beginning with e , sometimes , instead of the tem- 
 poral augment, assume an 1 in the augmented tenses , as 
 from t^«j I have , ef^s I had* The augments are in use 
 only in the indicative Mood : thus , from the aorist indi- 
 cative iyfx^x, I wrote, are formed the aorists imperative 
 y?dfa , write , and subjunctive vet yftya , that I write , or 
 may write , without augment. 
 
 The uneducated are fond of substituting the temporal 
 
43 
 for the syllabic augment ; as nypfa.for ly^a.. The lower 
 classes often omit the augment altogether , as will appear 
 in the conjngation of the verb. 
 
 OF THE CHARACTERISTIC, 
 
 The Characteristic is the consonant , or combination 
 of consonants , preceding the vowel , or vowels in the last 
 syllable : thus , a is the characteristic of 8s\&> , and ^ of 
 
 The change of the characteristic is the great difficulty 
 in the Theory for forming the Tenses. Its consideration 
 shall follow the conjugation of the Verb, the knowledge of 
 which will render the subject much more intelligible. 
 
 OF THE TERMINATION. 
 
 The termination is , as appears above , that part of the 
 word which immediately follows the characteristic ; in 8eA&> 
 it is a ; in £y:avf/-#, a; in eyp*<p3-->7X£Ti, riKtri. These tfirininai* 
 tions should be particularly attended to , in learning to 
 conjugate the Verb. 
 
 CHAPTER XXV. 
 
 OF THE COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 I. These Tenses are, as in all languages, in which they 
 exist , formed by means of a verb auxiliary united with. 
 the verb conjugated. 
 
 They are formed in three different ways ; but without 
 the slightest change of signification , on account of that 
 difference. In the first , the auxiliary alone is conjugated, 
 and the principle Verb remains invariable. In the other 
 two , on the contrary , the auxiliary remains invariable 
 while the principle Ferb alone is conjugated. The future 
 is compounded in three ways: the conditional in two : the 
 pluperfect only in the first. 
 
44 
 
 II. The auxiliaries are lyu I h ave ■> f° r the pluperfect , 
 and Kaw , I will z for the fitture and conditional. 
 
 The continuative of ihe former &/^a ? I /?^/, is the only 
 Tense which is. used as an auxiliary, and it is employed to 
 form the pluperfect. 
 
 The present , and the continuative of the second , 0£M» 
 and n^KOL are both employed , with and without variation. 
 When without variation , the third person is used through- 
 out $ [ ]\ku and >j8feAe. 
 
 The former, Sihu is contracted into, 9* ; and 8& kcs into 8 -A 
 
 III. The Tenses of the conjugated Verb, which enter into 
 composition, are the present, and the aorist of the subjunc- 
 tive Mohd. In the first form of composition , in Verbs 
 called BarVtona , these Tenses change their final u into u. In 
 verbs called perispomena, those of the first class like, mala 
 change the « into circnmflexed u , those of the second; like 
 71/j.u, the y into circumflexed S. The passive Voice admits 
 into this form of composition the aorist only, which change^ 
 the a> into >?, without the i underwritten , 6e\w , bihiit; y^% 
 ( see first composition in the conjugations ). 
 
 In the two other forms of composition , the subjunctive 
 is regularly conjugated ; but when with the third person 
 of the auxiliary, in its uncontracted form, >d is not admis- 
 sible ( see a. d composition. ) 
 
 IV. The future is compounded, i. st , of the auxiliary 9 ; aw 
 conjugated, and of the aorist or present of the subjunctive 
 unaltered , Ukv yftyu or Uku yfxtpu I shall write ; passive 
 0£A« yfGi$$ I shall be written ; the passive does not admit 
 the present , in this form of composition. 
 
 2, lv Of $L\u , the third person singular of the present 
 hihco unconjugated, and of tire aorist or present of the 
 subjunctive conjugated: Uku y%a-\-u , ;;c, r, or ypHf - a, m , n. 
 I shall , thou wilt , he wUl write; Uku y$&(pQ J , j?c,w or 
 y$d<p-ofAat, ivai, trjc/, \ shall, thou wilt, he will be written. 
 
 3. lv Of 0i for Seas/ , and of the subjunctive, preceded by 
 the particle^ : Be ?«' yj> a-i-w, wc, *, 07" 7j>ap<- »,#;*■* I shall write 
 6e r* 7/a^-w, j^Jf, or y$x f-opxi 9 cc-a^mci, I shall be written;and 
 
by synalcepha, 8a y^a^-w, v/^ ^ory^df-cs, wc ? w, 6a ypa<p9-«, w"c*w 
 ©/* yjj«V •/**{> £0 " Ci ? £Ta/ 5 which latter is the more usual form. 
 
 V. The conditional is composed i. st of the imperfect 
 %hhov or «0sA.a, and of the aorist or present of the subjunctive, 
 as above in the i. st form of the future; "A\-«^ ec, s, x^er, st?, 
 a*/ y^a^e/, 07' y^a'p*' I should Sec. , write; passive iSt\-a , £? , 
 e, 8$c, , yp<p0n I should <^c. , be written. 
 
 2# Of nfoKi, third person singular of the imperfect 
 iStKu, and of the aorist, or present of the subjunctive, as in 
 the second form of the future, 'iiQtxt y^a^-a, ;ic, *?, or yfoi<p-a),iK 9 
 y\ I should , thou wouldst ^c. , write, or have' written ; nhkt 
 7f«<p9 w,v;c,w, or y$d$ o/uoUjtvoLijiTixi I should be , or have been , 
 Ihou wouldst be ] or have been written &;c. , see the syntax, 
 
 YI. The pluperfect is compounded only in the first man- 
 ner , that is of the imperfect u^m or er^ot conjugated , and 
 of the aorist of the principal verb unconjugated u-^jx. , ilx^* 
 7fa\U/ , I had^ thou hadst written sJ^a, tt^ig, yfdffi I had , 
 thou hadst been written. 
 
 It may be well here to observe to the reader, that in the 
 following conjugation of the Verb, when a Tense has several 
 forms, the first is the most approved ; the last the mosfe 
 wlgar. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVI. 
 
 FIRST PART. 
 
 View of the Conjugation of Verbs called Barytona. 
 ACTIVE VOICE, 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 S. yfd<p-co I write 1 am writing (i) 
 
 y^-iu: thou wrifest thou art writing 
 
 yfi.<p-u he writes (2) he is writing 
 
 (1) For the principles on which the distinctions in the English- 
 Translation of the Tenses are grounded , see Appendix §. 2. 
 
 (2) He f she, or it in the 3. d person singular, in all Uae Tense*', 
 
p, ypx$-9fAW'C{A$ we Write we are writing 
 
 ypa<p-iTe ye write ye are writing. 
 
 -yod<p-ov<n,ow-ovvi they write they are writing 
 
 Imperfect , more properly called by the Greeks , 
 
 Continuatwe. (i) 
 
 VULG. 
 
 S. £yf«f-a »7F<F * I wrote, or was writing 
 
 iy$ct<p-iz viyfci$-i; thou wrotest, or wast writing 
 
 tyfxtp-t yiy?z(p e he wrote, or was writing 
 
 P. iy^q-xuiv yy$a<p-otpiv we wrote or were writing 
 
 iyfd<p-irt HyfcL<p-i7i ye wrote or were writing 
 
 'iyfeup-M iy $*$•&. they wrote or were writing, 
 
 AORIST OR INDEFINITE, (l) 
 
 S. ty^^'OL liyfot^-sL 1 wrote, or have written 
 
 tyfu^-ic ny^a^-tc thou wrotest , or hast written 
 
 typa^-t, ny^oL^-t he wrote , or has written 
 
 P. ryffy-apju vyfcc^-xpiv (3) we wrote, or have written. 
 
 iyfet^-iTi «7f«^ m ye wrote or have written 
 
 zypa-^-oir riyfx^-oLv they wrote or have written 
 
 (i) This Tense lias always reference to continued action, or are- 
 petition of action. 
 
 It is formed from the present \ by adding the augment, and chang- 
 ing © into a. in Barytona , and £> into oua* in perispomena. The 
 Vulgar say •ypacf., au.s, zrz, ave in the plural and thus confound the se- 
 cond persons plural of this and of the present tense. The Value of the 
 Term continuatwe, as a definition of this Tense, will more clearly ap- 
 pear when we come to the Imperative and Subjunctive Moods. 
 
 (2) This Tense in correct writing has always reference to action 
 completed at once , and never to continued or repeated action : by 
 using the same form I wrote for this and the preceding Tense, the 
 English Language confounds these two very distinct senses. 
 
 The English has the advantage over theModer Greek in not confound- 
 ing I wrote with I have written', but this distinction of Time is by no 
 means of equal importance with the other , as every Englishman 
 learning a foreign language must have felt. 
 
 The Aorist is , like the Imperfect , formed from the Present , by 
 assuming an augment , and changing the characteristic : In perispomena 
 S> is changed into tick; as war-u, erar-nora; tuiSj stiu.yjc*. 
 
 (3) The vulgar use fpa<j)-a t u.e- bts-qcvs in the plural. 
 
ifx* 
 
 yfot^it 
 
 li X i<: 
 
 yfayit 
 
 dX*r 
 
 yfd^u 
 yftyu (l) 
 
 yqx^ti 
 
 47 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE. 
 
 5. tfx& y?ot^u I had written 
 
 thou hadst written 
 he had written 
 uyx.uiv y?oL^u (i) we had written 
 
 ye had written 
 they had written 
 
 FUTURE TENSE FIRST FORM* 
 
 I. st EffG. FORM. 2. d ENG. FORM, 
 
 3. feW I shall write I will 
 
 &Ve/c thou wilt write thou shalt , 
 
 8r'\-t/ f ypflt-\f/£i he will write he shall 
 
 P. 6s\-OjUty (wy^x-fet we shall write we will 
 
 tilK-tt* ye will write ye shall 
 
 feh-ow they will write they shall 
 
 Hie first form of the English Translation is the true 
 English Future , indicating simply futurity of action ; the 
 second, form includes the idea of an exercise of volition on 
 the part of the speaker, and of compulsion towards the person 
 spoken to or of. This distinction renders the English singu- 
 larly correct in its expression of a simply future sense, « Je le 
 ferai, je te le promets, » means' « I will, or I am determined 
 to do it , I promise you;» J'espere que je le ferai demain, 
 means « I hope T shall Ao it to morrow. » The same confusion 
 I helieve holds in all the languages in Europe, ours( as spoken 
 by all classes in south Britain ) excepted; and therefore I am 
 obliged to give both forms here ; though not as our Gram- 
 marians have I think, always, hitherto, done, to the great 
 
 (i) The more correct or approved form alone is given in the com-* 
 pound tenses, The Yulgax use si^aus , efycvs , instead of si^aasv , <u%w* 
 
VShll 
 
 Qihtl 
 
 4| m 
 
 %ohfusion of foreigners, and, indeed, of the Natives of Ireland 
 and Scotland : as if it were indifferent which were used td 
 express simple futurity , shall or will. For the grounds of 
 the distinctive characters of shall and will, see appendix §. 5*. 
 
 FUTURE TENSE SECOND FORM. 
 
 I. st 1* 
 
 S. fekii yfoe \Lw or <pti I shall fyc. I will 8$c. 
 
 &KU - -^rt; ' - <p;^ thou wilt §'C. Thou shalt $jc, 
 
 - ^h - <pr! he will S$c. he shall §"C. 
 
 - -^vfjLiv '- (puyw we shall fye. we will 8$e. 
 Uku - -iiTi - pere ye will £fc. ye shall 8$c. 
 kzhu * ^ovv - cpow they will 8$c. they shall fy& 
 
 FUTURE TENSE THIRD FORM. 
 
 S. 8e vol or 0ot yp« \La o/* (pu as above 
 
 i>. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD (i) 
 PRESENT Or CONTINUATIVE TENSE. (2) 
 
 S. y?d(pz write thou 
 
 «V 7f«f w let him writ© 
 
 t\ aV yfcipufiit let us write 
 
 yfufpire write ye 
 
 aV y?x<povv let them write 
 
 @e fa 
 
 or 
 
 0* 
 
 yf* 
 
 \|/0 
 
 O/* (pw 
 
 6e ca 
 
 - 
 
 e* 
 
 - 
 
 4^ f 
 
 <pw 
 
 81 vcl 
 
 - 
 
 y 
 
 - 
 
 \j/»j 
 
 <pYI 
 
 6e ?* 
 
 - 
 
 Ac 
 
 - 
 
 ^W^.'K 
 
 <pQiJ.lv 
 
 6fe ra 
 
 - 
 
 e« 
 
 - 
 
 \^£7fc 
 
 (ptTt 
 
 fo ra 
 
 - 
 
 e* 
 
 - 
 
 ■v^oyy 
 
 - <povt 
 
 (1) The Name and Nature of the Mood implies futurity, 
 (a) This Tense is formed from the present of the indicative, by 
 shariging the final w into e in Barytona. The w, in perispomena of the 
 

 IMtst or. 
 
 indefinite. 
 
 (0 
 
 Sk 
 
 ypa-^e or 
 
 <Lov 
 
 
 Write thou 
 let him write 
 
 t\ 
 
 <«C ypa«-W{JLS9 
 »g ypa^ouv 
 
 
 
 let us write 
 
 write ye 
 
 let them write 
 
 SUBlUNCi?IVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT OR CONTINUATIVE TENSE. (2) 
 
 So Vi yp&p-w that I write , may , or should Write 
 va ypacp-?^ thou write, mayst or shouldst write 
 
 v& ypao-v] he write, may, or should write 
 
 P. va ypa^-wjxsv we write, may, or should write 
 
 vk ypaVers ye write, may, or should write 
 
 v« ypacp-ouv they Write, may, or should write 
 
 first class becomes &\, and in those of the second «. The reasons for 
 this shall be given in their proper places. 
 
 This Tense when used by correct speakers or writers always im- 
 plies continued or repeated action. Indeed the Vulgar generally make 
 the distinction : -^ac^e means write on, or write frequently; as, 'ypacpe pou 
 iasutic e'x?; ava-paiv t*fe goviGsta? p.ou, write to me, whenever you have need 
 of my assistance; -ypaks 'AyjXuca xaQe rj/ipav, write English every day. 
 It would be as great a grammatical error to use the Aorist in the 
 above cases, as this tense, whenever an action to be at once performed 
 is contemplated. 
 
 Both Tenses, as well as the corresponding tenses of the subjunctive, 
 notwithstanding their Names, have necessarily a reference to futurity : 
 the first of each always implying action to be continued , or repeated ; 
 the Aorist, in correct writing or speaking, never. 
 
 (1) This Tense is formed from the Aorist of the indicative, by the 
 suppression of the augment , and the change of the Termination « into 
 % or ov 
 
 (2) Formed from the present of the indicative, by changing- s< of the 
 final syllable into n with an 1 underwritten and p.ev, into w^ev as well in 
 barytonaas in perispomena. 
 
 This Tense implies action to be continued or repeatedi 
 
 The Vulgar use w^pups and 7pa<powvs in the 1 .st aiid 3.d psj'sons plural 
 
 4 
 

 5® 
 
 i 
 
 s. 
 
 va 
 
 
 
 vx 
 
 rp^w 
 
 
 \oc 
 
 ypa<j^ t 
 
 ft 
 
 va 
 
 ycsty-wtt.sv 
 
 
 va 
 
 ypad;-£To 
 
 
 va 
 
 vpa^-ouv 
 
 AOIUST OR T^BEFIKITE. (i) 
 
 that I write, may, or should write' 
 thou 8$e. , as above. 
 
 CONDITIONAL I. 51 FORM. 
 
 I. st E. F. 2. d E. F. 
 
 S. rifleVa ypa-tai or <psi I sliould I should \ ^ 
 
 r$£k-z$ ypa-tai or ost thou wouldst thou shouldst J 5 ^* 
 
 vfGeX-e ypa-t|/ei or epet he would he should \~ 3 
 
 P.^GeX-afxev ypa-^et or (pet we should we should 
 
 rfiik-stt ypa-^st or <pei V e would ye should 
 
 7-OcVav ypa^et or (pei they would they should 
 
 The second English form is used to express the hypo*, 
 thesis, the first the consequence , whenever that consequence 
 is necessary , and independent of volition or compulsion*. 
 as in form, so in sense, it is analogous with the first form 
 of the future. When the exercise of volition on the part of 
 the speaker, or of compulsion towards the person spoken 
 to or of is to be signified , a third form analogous with 
 the second form of the future is to be used: I would, thou 
 shouldst, he should ,. we would, ye should, they should. 
 
 (i) Formed from the Aorist Indicative , by suppressing the augment P 
 and changing the Terminations into those of the above tense. 
 
 It is evident , at the first glance , that these Terminations are the same 
 m sound as those of the present indicative, and differ only in orthogra- 
 phy. This has led some (--* ; mmarians to imagine that there is,properly 
 speaking, no subjunc^h e Mood in the Modern Greek. 
 
 This position might be tenable , if there were only the present tense 
 subjunctive. But where , in the indicative , are we to find the Aorist, 
 unless in the compound Tenses , which borrow it from the subjunctive? 
 This tense is never to be used where action to be continued, or repeated 
 is implied. 
 
5i 
 
 CONDITIONAL %*A FORM. 
 
 X. E. E. 
 
 2. a E. F. 
 
 
 I should 
 
 I should 
 
 i <^> 
 
 thou wouldst 
 
 thou sho ul dsti 
 
 
 he would 
 
 he should ' 
 
 i o ~ 
 
 we should 
 
 we should 
 
 
 ye would 
 
 ye should 
 
 \i'^ 
 
 they would 
 
 they should 
 
 1 % 
 
 $-> Y)6eXs ypa-^G) or cpco 
 
 viGs'Xe ypa-'^'/j — <p7) 
 
 •yjSs'Xfe YP^^ £T£ — 9 £T£ 
 vjOsXe Ypa°^ 0UV — 9 0uv 
 
 Participle un declined yfctfovrat; (i) writing. 
 
 What has been said of the proper rendering of the Greek 
 Tenses into English in the Active voice applies oj course 
 equally to the Passive voice. It has been thought more ad- 
 vantageous to subjoin the preceding notes to the particular 
 Tenses , than to reserve the subject altogether for an Ap- 
 pendix. 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE- 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 p. 
 
 Present tense. (2) 
 Ypacp-ouai 
 Yp«<p-effai 
 Ypa9~£Tai 
 Ypacp-o[x.eGa (3) 
 Ypacp-ecGe 
 Ypa(p-ovTai 
 
 I am written 
 thou art written 
 he is written 
 we are written 
 ye are w r ritten 
 they are written. 
 
 (i) From the present of the Indicative, by changing the Termination 
 to m b my ton a , into ovra? ; and &, in perispbmena , into cuvra; and 5vta?. 
 
 (2) From the present indicative active, bv changing w into ouat in lary- 
 tona, and, in perispomena in £> from so, into oup.ai, or stoupou, in £> from 
 aw into g)[j.at. 
 
£% 
 
 ]f]ft PERFECT OR COTvlTW NATIVE. (l) 
 
 $.• ^a<p-op//i\r or (2) eypa<p' 
 
 lypacp-ousav or 
 
 sypacp-e-ro- Ot 
 
 P. lypao-o^Qa. or 
 
 !ypa<p-£<j6e or 
 
 iypa^-ovxa- or 
 
 jV (e) I was written 
 &ypa<p-ou<jouv (s) thou wast written 
 eypa<p-ouvTav (e) lie was written 
 
 lypacp-oujjLacTs or e^s we were written 4 
 sypacp-oucasTs or ege ye were written 
 sypacp-ouvTav (e) they were written 
 
 AORIST OR INDEFINITE. (3) 
 
 ft &y? a V^ v - 0v)fca (4) 
 sypa^-Gvi; - Orr/.£? 
 £ypa<p-6yj . - GvjJte 
 
 F, eypa^-GyjjjLev - 0^xa[j.ev 
 
 £-ypa(p-G-7}T£ - Gv)V.STS 
 
 sypa<p-97jcav -' GviJcav 
 
 I was, or have been Written 
 thou wast, or hast been writtea 
 He was, -or has been written 
 we were, or have been written 
 ye were, or have been written 
 they were, or have been written 
 
 (i) The Imperfect is formed from the present of the indicative, by 
 prefixing the augment - , and changing, in barytona, the termination c^ae 
 
 HltO r'tj.r^j , 0UU.0UV, OUfAGUVS. 
 
 Perisporoena from « w , change wurat into wjayiv. The vulgar terminations 
 ew t u.GUVj groove are 1, common to both classes. 
 
 {•i) The vulgar use ^ as the augment vj-ypaip-ouiAOtiv etc. 5 and in the first 
 and second persons plural use ou^e^s and eutrs^a : they sometimes omit 
 the augment: They also add an g to the i.st i.d and 3.d persons sin- 
 gular, and to the 3.d person plural ; and then necessarily advance the 
 accent a syllable ; as r/ypacpou^ouve etc. - y e-ypacpcuaag-s is by a common syn- 
 cope contracted into e-ypa^ouq-e. 
 
 (3) The Aorist passive is formed from die aorist active, by changing 
 the characteristic , an I the termination a into yjv or y^a j as e^pa^a 7 
 t7pacp6-yiv-y)>ca;-£TiraTnaa , sirarnQyiv; ertayicra , ■sTtu.r.Oviv. 
 
 (.4) The vulgar use T^paco-Twa ifypflty-Tvuces etc., that is substitute r 
 jfer 6 , in the second form , and sometimes omit the augment; as "ypaf*- 
 nwc-a-eg-e ^GWpTrU-ajAe-STe-avsjj 
 
6. 
 
 P. 
 
 S. 
 
 P. 
 
 or 
 
 £L X £ 
 £L X av 
 
 p 
 
 PRETERPLUPERFECT TENSE-. 
 VULGARLY 
 
 ypx<p-67) ^r tv) I had been written 
 
 thou hadst been written 
 lie had been written 
 we had been written. 
 ye had been written 
 ihey had been wnttea 
 
 ypacp-tr?) or 773 
 
 ypa<p-Gv] or tvj 
 
 ypacp-Grj or T/j 
 
 Ypacp-Ovi or ty) 
 
 ypoc<p-0v3 or tyi 
 
 FUTURE TENSE I st FORM. OR COMPOSITION. 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 . st ENG. FORM. 
 
 1. A EJC.G. FORM. 
 
 6iX<o 
 
 
 Ypa<f$yj 
 
 I shall be 
 
 I will be j 
 
 eirxeis 
 
 
 ypacpGvj 
 
 thou wilt be 
 
 thou shalt be f 
 
 bekzi 
 
 
 ypaipGvi' 
 
 he will be 
 
 he shall be 
 
 6eXoj/.2v 
 
 
 ypacpO^ 
 
 we shall be 
 
 we will be i 
 
 SelsTe 
 
 
 ypacpGy] 
 
 ye will be 
 
 ye shall be 
 
 Gslouci 
 GeXouv 
 
 I 
 
 ypa^Cv) 
 
 they will be 
 
 they shall be 
 
 s. 
 
 FUTURE TENSE 2. FORM OR COMPOSITION. 
 
 Met 
 
 ypa^-Qs 
 
 or 
 
 ypa<p-co[jiai 
 
 O&u 
 
 ypacp-Gvj? 
 
 or 
 
 ypacp-scrai 
 
 hikei 
 
 ypa<p-Gv) 
 
 or 
 
 ypa<p-5rai 
 
 Gslsi 
 
 ypacp-Gwjxev 
 
 or 
 
 tofxaGa 
 
 Gslei 
 
 ypa<p-Qy)TS 
 
 or 
 
 ecGs 
 
 UIh 
 
 ypacp-Qouv 
 
 or 
 
 ojvrat 
 
 PJ OS 
 
 FUTURE TENSE 3/ FORM, OR COMPOSITION. \}f 
 
 Gs va or Ga ypa<p-G& O/" ypa<p_a)[/,at, 
 Gs va or Ga ypacp.-GyJs or ypa<pscat 
 
 Be va or Ga 
 
 ypa<p-ovi 
 
 ypaffls^ 
 
 P. Os va or Ga e£c. as in the 2/ form 
 
 1/3 o 
 
 W S3 
 
 (1) The Vulgar employ their usual forms , and say 0a ^paa-Ta , Q&' 
 Tpa^^Touys, 6a ^pa^cup.^. ! ^p^ouvrai : see the subjunctive. 
 

 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 PRESENT OR 
 
 CONTINUATIVE TENSE, i 
 
 s. 
 
 yp<jMp-au 
 
 be thou written 
 
 
 a; ypa9-£Tai 
 
 let him be written 
 
 r» 
 
 as ypao-a>p.£Qa 
 
 let us be written 
 
 
 ypa<p-£<j8e 
 
 be ye written 
 
 
 a; ypa^p-wvTat 
 
 let them be written* 
 
 AORIST OR INDEFINITE. (2) 
 VULG. 
 
 be thou written 
 let him be written 
 P. as ycaoOwttev ©twu,s\» let us be written 
 
 ypayou 
 
 
 a; ypaoGvj 
 
 QT7] 
 
 a? ypacpSw'JLcV 
 
 <pTCOJX£V 
 
 ypa<p0yJT£ 
 
 <pr^T£ 
 
 as ypa<p6ot)v 
 
 (pTOUVc 
 
 be ye written 
 
 let them be written 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT OR CONTINUATIVE TENSE. (3) 
 
 S. va ypa-tpw^ai that I be , may, or should be written 
 
 vx ypa-<pE<jat thou be, mayst, or shouldst be written 
 
 vx ypa-^£Tat he be , may, or should be written 
 
 P. V2 ypa-cpw^cGoc we be , may, or should be written 
 
 yx ypa-ipetrOe ye be , may, or should be written 
 
 va ypa-cpwvTat they be , may, or should be written 
 
 The Vulgar say ypa-<poi)'{/.-:pc(TTe or £<7te and ypa<pouvrat. 
 
 (i)'Th.3 Tense is formed from the present indicative by changing 
 eetai into cu- The 2.d person plural is, in the active as well as passive 
 v oice, in Barytona v nd Perispomena, the same as in the present In- 
 dicative. It takes the terminations of the subjunctive mood in the i.st 
 and 3.d persons plural. 
 
 (2) The same as the aorist Subjunctive Passive , except in the second 
 person singular , which has the characteristic of the aorist Imperative 
 active , with the termination u. 
 
 i 3) In Barytona from the present of the Indicative , by changing 6 
 into o , as in the active: thus •j-psb-oj/.at I va •ftaf^pai* Perispomena change 
 
AORTST Or INDEFINITE, 
 
 
 VULG. 
 
 
 
 va 
 
 ypa<p-6(5 or *fc that I 
 
 he, may 
 
 va 
 
 ypacp~()T^ or T7i? 
 
 thou 
 
 be etc. 
 
 V2C 
 
 Yf^-G-?i or T-?i 
 
 he 
 
 be etc. 
 
 VCi* 
 
 6co»/,SV 
 
 'pao , ft * or touu.8 
 
 1 k I 00li(Jt.£V 
 
 we 
 
 be etc. 
 
 va 
 
 YpaCp~6*?jT2 Or T71TS 
 
 y e 
 
 be etc. 
 
 va 
 
 Ypafp-Oouv yr to'jvs 
 
 they 
 
 be etc. 
 
 %% 
 
 or should bs etc. 
 
 From the aorist of the Indicative , by suppressing the 
 augment , and changing the termination w into « circiun- 
 flexed. The termination is varied , as in the aorist active , 
 and is throughout circumflexed on the vowel or diphthong 
 immediately succeeding the characteristic. 
 
 CONDITIONAL I. 
 
 I. st ENG. FORM. 2/ EN&. FORM. 
 
 s. mu Ye a ?- 8 * or ^ l should be l should be ^ .1 
 
 ■JfOstes YP a ?" G "^ or ^ tll0U w0ulclst be tll0U sh° uldstbe | 
 
 TJ&s'Xe YP a ?~^ 0/ * ^ lie would be ne snolud be a 
 
 P. ^GeXopv Ypa<p-67i or ttj we should be we should be J 
 
 tjO&sts ypa<p-Q^' or ttj ye would be ye should be « 
 
 •/JGeXav YP a ?"^"^ or ^ tne y would be they should be £ 
 
 also eT into 7) ; as flftrsiaai , va wa-rnaai , and cu into w ; as Trarou^ai , xa- 
 TbGjuOa; subj: v « waT&.aat , va iraTtSas0a ; but -the change of oi> into £> is 
 little attended to, and is deemed affected. 
 
 (1) There is a third English form for this Tense, when determina- 
 tion, or the exercise of Volition, on the part of the speaker , ( i.st 
 Person ) or of compulsion towards those spoken to, or of ( 2. d, and 
 3. d Persons) is to be signifed. I would, thou shouldst, he should, we 
 would , ye should, they should. See Appendix §. 2. 
 
56 
 
 ecr-smoTAL o./ form oii composition 
 
 {OeXe 
 
 TP «9-6« 
 
 or 
 
 T pa r «|«R 
 
 eft 
 
 rfitle 
 
 y pa©- Grig 
 
 or 
 
 y.pa©-£7ai. 
 
 ■s 
 
 •fleas 
 
 T? a ?-°? 
 
 or 
 
 Ypacp-£Tav 
 
 
 vjOeXe 
 
 Ypa©-6.w[i.ev. 
 
 or 
 
 ypa^p-c6|/.e6.a 
 
 
 «%&8 
 
 Ypao-6*?,T£ 
 
 cr 
 
 Ypa©-£G0£ 
 
 2 
 
 {Q&« 
 
 ypao^oov- 
 
 or 
 
 Ypsap-toVTat- 
 
 P- 
 
 PARTICIPLE PRESENT, (i) 
 
 Ypoc^oa. - evog - svt] - svov being written. 
 
 PARTICIPLE PAST, h,) 
 
 Ypap. - fi£VQ$ - pivv) - ^.£V0V Written. 
 
 I have preferred ranging the Conditional , or Hypothetic- 
 Tenses under the Subjunctive, instead of under the Indicative 
 Mood , where the Author lias ranged them* 
 
 Since future and conditional, as well as past and present 
 Action, may be repeated, or continued Action, whenever the 
 idea of Habit, continuation , or repetition is to be expressed,, 
 the Modern Greek, with great advantage, employs the Tenses 
 Of the different Moods m both Voices, which I have, on that 
 account, called Continuative : as Uku yfx<pv kM nptycu , 1 shall 
 write daily, and not Skhti vpa^w ; !t0sx& yfifd wxy& 9 *i six* 
 jea/^oj • I should write often 9 if 1 had time, and not >Am yfttyt). 
 The Modern Greeks have no difference of form for I shall 
 write, and I shall have written ; or for I should write , and 
 I should have written. 
 
 (i) From the present of the indicative passive , by changing pas i» 
 barytona, and, in perispomena from £&, into pevos, -y^acc-aac'. ,j:a<pc'-p.svc?* 
 *«roiV{MU , wa.Tou-ji.evoc. Perispomena from aw change the « into cu ; as 
 from nct^fuu , xoifi-oupfevog ; hut those who pique themselves on their 
 correctness ( or rather Hellenism ) say jtoiiA-toasvos. 
 
 (2) From the aorist of the Indicative , by 'suppressing the augment , 
 changing the characteristic, and substituting the termination 5 'vc;, parox- 
 ytonon, for m', as from i^oi^ry , "Ycaim-evcs ; from liraTrr^uv , ■rcaTYsp.-svoc 5 
 from ixowxtw , xetfuifrooe. These participles are both declined l&e 
 a<ljectivesinc5,Y) 3 6v of the second Declension. 
 
SECOND PART. 
 
 «7 
 
 View of the Conjugation of Verbs called Perispomen^ , 
 Contracted from Hellenic Verbs in sa, 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 
 
 I. st E. F. 
 
 2. d E. F. 
 
 S, warHSi 
 
 (*> 
 
 I trample (2) 
 
 I am trampling 
 
 sX<; 
 
 
 thou tramplest 
 
 thou art trampling 
 
 sT 
 
 
 he tramples 
 
 he is trampling 
 
 oujxe 
 
 v(3) 
 
 we trample 
 
 we are trampling 
 
 etre 
 
 
 ye trample 
 
 ye are trampling 
 
 CUV 
 
 (3) 
 
 they trample 
 
 they are trampling, 
 
 IMPERFECT OR CONTINUATIVE TENSE. 
 
 £77aT-0U<7(X (4) 
 £TTraT-QV<i£S 
 CTTaT-OUGS Gr £77aT£iS 
 
 £iuaT-!*ouffatfcev (5) 
 
 £7TaT-0UC£T£ 
 
 e7raT-oO(jav (5) 
 
 I trampled or was 
 thou trampledst or wast 
 he trampled or was 
 we trampled or were 
 ye trampled or were 
 they trampled or were 
 
 fi) Contracted from mr-fa-hiriii-ioptrisTt-iM 
 
 (2) I use this word to avoid introducing a circumlocution , such as 
 tread under foot, since it is sometimes used in an active sense, without 
 a preposition. 
 
 (3) The Vulgar use outAt-cuve. 
 
 (4) Contracted from e-aT-c'ouda-scucsc-e'oucrs-souaafAev-sou'JSTS-souGav. 1 
 (5; The Vulgar omit the augment , and use ouaaas, ouaave in the j<st 
 
 and 3,d persons plural. 
 
AORIST OR INDEFINITE. 
 
 S. ItJ-tz-'j. I trampled or have 
 
 eg thou trampledst or has!: 
 
 e he trampled or has 
 
 P. Krar-flVajJiev (i) we trampled or have 
 
 ers ye trampled or have 
 
 siraTV)e-«v (i) they trampled or have 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 t!y a ely s^ sly c iraTvfatt I had, thou hadst, he had trampled, etc. 
 
 FUTURE TENSE I. St FORM. 
 
 j I . st I shall, thou wilt trample, etc* 
 % (2. d I will, thou shait trample, etc% 
 
 2. d FORM. 
 
 ..,, ' , , „ (i. 8t Ishall<?ft:. 
 
 • ' ■ « • J 2. I will etc. 
 
 3. d FORM. 
 
 v , ( i. st I shall etc. 
 
 ' • • ' ' ' J2. d I Will, £&\ 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 PRESENT OR CONTINTJATIVE TENSE. (2) 
 
 S> 7caT£t and Trsmie trample thou 
 
 as 7:aT^ let him trample 
 
 P. k$ iraTou^ev let us trample 
 
 iraTSirs trample ye 
 
 «? iraTouv let them trample 
 
 (1) TIic Vulgar omit the augment here also , and use rloaae r'oavs. 
 
 (2) From the present imperative regular of ware'ci, ttcctes iroffliets, by 
 contraction of the two s into the diphthong e't , ^arsi , irarE&ts; as s^a 
 from £' £/ a : see chapter 21 - 5, Trarsts is for wares by the insertion, of 
 *he iota, lonice , between the two g."* 
 
#9 
 
 AGIIIST OH INDEFINITE. 
 
 S. :«^TV)Gre trample thou §*c. as aboy® 
 
 P. &5 ?taT/(<7l0f/.£V 
 
 7?aT7)(7£TS 
 
 J{ tcocttjgouv 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 
 
 PRESENT TENSE ( CONTINUATIVS. ) 
 
 S. va xaT-S that I trample, may, o/' should 
 7); thou trample, mayst, or shouldst 
 
 vj he trample, may, or should 
 
 f\ ou|/.sv we trample, may, or should 
 
 yjT£ ye trample, may, or should 
 
 ouv they trample, may, or should 
 
 AORIST OR INDEFINITE. 
 
 S. v« xosrvfc-ft) 
 
 VI 
 COU.£V 
 
 £T£ 
 GUV 
 
 P. 
 
 English as above , but not 
 ■in a continuative sense. 
 
 CONDITIONAL. TENSE I st COMPOSITION". 
 
 
 i." 
 
 ENG. FORM. 
 
 2. ENG. FORM. 
 
 flOeX-a ' 
 
 2-^ 
 
 |I should 
 
 I should 
 
 £5 
 
 
 Uhou wouldst 
 
 thou shouldst 
 
 £ 
 
 
 'he would 
 jwe should 
 
 lie should 
 
 TQ0£A-a[/.£V 
 
 s 
 
 we should 
 
 £T£ 
 
 St 
 
 lye would 
 \they would 
 
 ye should 
 they should 
 
 o a. 
 
3. d English Form when volition, in the i. st Person, o* 
 compulsion, in the 2, and 3. d Persons, is to he signified; J 
 would, thou shouldst, he should , we would , ye should, 
 they should, For tjie correct use of the 3 forms , see ap- 
 pendix § 2. 
 
 
 CONDITIONAL 
 
 TENS 
 
 E 2. a 
 
 COMPOSITION, 
 
 s. 
 
 Tibelz TraT-'/fcu 
 
 or 
 
 to 
 
 English as ab 
 
 
 7? £7-7,(77); 
 
 or 
 
 ?i$ 
 
 
 
 7caT-7jcnji 
 
 or 
 
 *? 
 
 
 p. 
 
 77 (%T-yf(7W[JL£V 
 
 or 
 
 oO[/.ev 
 
 
 
 77aT-/](7'ST£ 
 
 or 
 
 7}T£ 
 
 
 
 7:aT--/faouv 
 
 or 
 
 ouv 
 
 
 Participle undeclined vtztovvtcis trampling, 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 INDICATIVE MOODi- 
 
 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 
 s. 
 
 tzclt oC(/.at 
 
 stoujjtat (1) 
 
 I am 
 
 
 
 eiaca 
 
 siEcat 
 
 thou art 
 
 
 
 EtTat 
 
 eteTat 
 
 he is 
 
 
 r* 
 
 oujAsQa 
 
 ciouf^-a^e or £<rs 
 
 We are 
 
 g 
 
 
 etcQs 
 
 SIECTS 
 
 ye are 
 
 ■H 
 
 
 guv rat 
 
 EtOUVTat 
 
 they are 
 
 
 (1) Is formed from the present of the indicative active by changing 
 tlie final & into ouaat etou^at : see page 5i , note 1. The vulgar form 
 is frequently written with ^ instead of et, &s yiouftai, and not ewujiai. 
 
IMPERFECT ( COjyTmUATXVE. ) 
 
 6h 
 
 
 OOGOV OUGOUV 
 
 £ito oCiv-av 
 
 O'JVTO ouvTav 
 
 ve (a) 
 
 £<75 
 £<TS 
 VS (2) 
 
 I was j 
 
 thou wast I t* 
 
 he was I 11, 
 
 we were r es 
 
 ye were | 
 
 they were | 
 
 AORIST OR INDEFINITE. 
 
 £7rar/f0-viv 
 ft 
 
 vp-a 1 was, or have heeii 
 
 viae; trampled §*c. 
 
 Sometimes written without an augment , ztoltkQmol c^c- 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 t&y-v. , £> , i , ajxgv <?te. , raTYiOvj I had been trampled etc* 
 
 FUTURE I st FORM. 
 
 SsX-to, ei£ et ere. , tiaprftn I shall, thou wilt be trampled etc. 
 
 2. d FORM. 
 
 tdtt iuaTvi6-w or 7rat*-w|Aat English as above. 
 
 (1) The Vulgar often prefix *j as the augment , and often omit 
 the augment altogether, in all the persons, but the first person plural , 
 Which, unaugmented, could not be distinguished from the r.st P. pi. 
 present. They often insert £t or » throughout as s«up.wv, oriio6pe»»> 
 eitftiaouv, or Vicuc-cuv etc. 
 
 (2) When the s is added to the 3.d persons singular and plnral , 
 the accent uuu»t necessarily he acute p 6vt«vs. 
 
6l 
 
 3. d FORM. 
 
 U V££ or Oa rti£h)$-u o/- ^at-Mu^ English as above. 
 
 ?5 risou etc, 
 
 IMPERATIVE, 
 
 Present or continuative. 
 
 Si foxtoy (1) -be thou trampled 
 
 a; Tra-r^Tafi let him be trampled 
 
 P. a? 7raT<o(AeG« let us be trampled 
 
 77 KTe tC0 £ 7T aT£ l'^s 
 
 be ye trampled 
 
 a? Tra-rtovTai iraTOuvTafi let them be trampled, 
 
 AORlsT OR INDEFINITE, 
 
 S» Tfaf7)'(70U J 
 
 «S *am9ri I The English as above, but not 
 
 P< ag xaT7)9a>p,sv > m a continuative sense. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 
 PRESENT OR CONTINUATIVE. (2) 
 
 S. va ff*r<$ftfc - ty. a t £ ^oD ( xat that I be trampled f 3) 
 
 ftaT-yfaas g^at thou be trampled 
 
 ftflpHifai sisTai he be trampled 
 
 "• TraT-w^sOa-omeOa a°^~ a 7£-£<r£ we be trampled 
 ftai-^sGs £ ^ £ Vs ye be trampled 
 
 xaT-wvTa', ouvtat siouvrta they be trampled 
 
 (ij Contracted from naHw , imperative, formed regularly from 
 **reWi, as wareTaeai, contracted from wtt Te6<j8s. 
 
 (9.) See Page 54 , Note 3. 
 
 (-3) Or., that I may or should, thou mayst or shouldst ,lie may or 
 should , we may or should , ye may or should , they may or should he 
 
63 
 
 AORlST OR INDEFINITE. 
 
 S. v# ttar/)S w-'? ( ;-rj ] English as above, but not hi 
 
 P coa'cv or ouixs f tne sense of continuation, 
 
 ~ s ) or repetition. 
 
 otfv g^ oijvs ) 
 
 CONDITIONAL I . st FORM OR COMPOSITION* 
 
 I^ENG.FORM. 2. d ENG.F0RM. 3. d ENG. FORM*' 
 
 S, vftsVa \ I should I should I would 
 
 eg | thou wouldst thou shouldst thou shouldst 
 £ \l§ he would he should he should 
 
 P.- ^OlVajxsv / g W e should we should w e would 
 et£ 1 y e would ye should ye should 
 ■vjGeVav ) they would they should they should 
 
 CONDITIONAL 2. d FORM , OR COMPOSITION. 
 
 S- $sXe 77*T7i-0-S or ip'aT-w/xat The 3 English fornix 
 
 as above , to be used 
 as the import of the 
 context may require, 
 according to the prin- 
 ciples laid down in the 
 appendix § 2 :see p. 5o«' 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 DaT-Gu(A£vos , Qu|jiv/] , oujxevov , Being trampled, 
 
 PAST. 
 
 HaTYip.£vo;"£v/)-£vov , trampled. 
 
 -co 
 
 or 
 
 ■tow 
 
 -w(xat 
 
 y$ 
 
 6T 
 
 
 •flaat 
 
 % 
 
 or 
 
 
 7frat 
 
 &{X€V 
 
 or 
 
 
 6f«.e9flt 
 
 7}T£ 
 
 or 
 
 
 ricrSe 
 
 »3v 
 
 op 
 
 
 COVTfitt 
 
 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
64 
 
 THIRD PART. 
 
 Second Class of Verbs, called Perispomena, contracted 
 from Verbs in «®; 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD, 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 t. St E. FORM. 2. d E. FORTvi. 
 
 Si twa-S or aco (i) I honor I am honoring 
 
 a; ait? tllbu hohorest thou art honoring 
 
 a «st he honors he is honoring 
 
 P. Ttu.-ouw.sv fa) we honor we are honoring 
 
 ye honor ye are honoring 
 
 they honor they are honoring 
 
 TL[/.-0UJJt£V (a) 
 
 £t£ 
 
 ouv (2) 
 
 IMPERFECT ( CONTINUATIVE. ) (3) 
 
 61 (4J 
 
 p. 
 
 £Ttjxoua-a I honored , o/* was honoring 
 
 ii thou honoredst, or wast honoring 
 
 s, £Tiu.y.£ (5) he honored , or was honoring" 
 
 iriu.ouG-au.sv we honored , or were honoring 
 
 £T£ ye honored , or were honoring 
 
 £Ttw-ou<;-av they honored, or were honoring 
 
 fi) This form, not contracted, is in use in the Morea t some, particu- 
 larly the Inhabitants of the Ionian Islands, even convert these Verbs 
 into Bp.rytona, by inserting a X, between the a and the Termination ; 
 
 from - 
 
 for 
 
 contracted from tyiosw , I observe, or look at, 
 
 { See page 67 , note 1 ) they form TYipa^w, and, taking \ for the 
 characteristic of the Aorist , they say faf)e*&st> 
 
 (2) The Vulgar say olIjas , ouve , to avoid the v final, which they also 
 drop in the accusative singular of Nouns. 
 
 (3) This Tense is conjugated as the same Tense of wafr*o; 
 
 (4) The Vulgar omit the augment, aad say Tt;j.oua-a, &$ , s , Ttf.-ousaas 
 cjctsts , cuaav or ouaave. / 
 
 (5) Some insert a ^ in certain Verbs , between «. and the Termination i 
 as i-pa-yo-j^sc^'s , he sung , instead of Efpa^oul'ae, 
 
65 
 
 S. 
 
 
 AORIST, 
 
 
 
 'tTlflW'CL 
 
 I honored , 
 
 or 
 
 have honored 
 
 IC 
 
 • thou honoredst > 
 
 or 
 
 hast honored 
 
 £ 
 
 he honored , 
 
 or 
 
 has honored 
 
 tTlfAW-OLjAW 
 
 we honored , 
 
 or 
 
 have honored 
 
 fcTi 
 
 ye honored , 
 
 or 
 
 have honored 
 
 ST IpLWOLY 
 
 they honored, 
 
 or 
 
 have honored 
 
 PLUPERFECT TENSE, 
 
 ■S. tO£-<* \ ^ ^ a ^ honored 
 
 ■ iz J A thou hadst honored 
 
 % f | he had honored 
 
 |>, ui*~§iu& ( ^* we nac * honored 
 
 £7£ i ye had honored 
 
 f £ y aK / they had honored 
 
 FUTURE Tense: i st COMPOSITION. 
 
 I st ENG. FORM* 2.d ENG. FORM. 
 
 &V&> ^ I shall 1 I will 
 
 thou wilt I . thou shalt 
 
 he will I o he shall 
 
 we shall / o we will 
 
 m \.i y e w ^ 1 y e sna ^ 
 
 they will J they shall 
 
 o/^tV 
 
 FUTURE TENSE: 1. COMPOSITION. 
 
 I. st ENG. FORM, 2/ ENG. FORM. 
 
 8i\« TijU-yjo-G) or u I shall I will 
 
 w\k or ds 3cc. 8$c. 
 
 my or a. 
 
 mti.y.iv or tipLif or cjfrir or w(M 
 
 lldiTi Or OLTi 
 
 mow or QVY 
 
$$TUR£ TENSE : 3.* 1 COMPOSITION, 
 
 -; « n « } r/ic - jj«ra • wr«f- »f«r>j &c. English as above 
 fe ?a or 8a J or ' - - • - ' P " 
 
 j Tip. - a> - a; - a §C. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE (CONTINUATIVE. ) 
 
 S- **>a (i) honor thou 
 
 ,c?c r///.a let him honor 
 
 P. as Tip'2,ut* let us honor 
 
 riuan honor ye 
 
 a; r:^ov? let them honor 
 
 aorist. 
 
 The English as in th$ present f 
 but not in a continuative 
 
 s. 
 
 
 Tl'jUWi 
 
 
 af 
 
 rip. nay 
 
 p. 
 
 af 
 
 Tl(J.m<cTl 
 
 
 «f 
 
 Tiur.ic-jy 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 
 PRESENT TENSE ( CONTINUATIVE. ) 
 
 That I honor, may, or should honor 
 
 thou honor, mayst, or shouldst honor 
 
 he honor, may,' or should honor 
 
 we honor, may, or should honor 
 
 ye honor,- may,- or should honor 
 
 they honor, may, or should honor 
 
 (i) Contracted from fiwae, as Tip-art from rip-asr 
 (a) Contracted from tijacm* , Ti k uavi; , Tiu.dc , etc. 
 (3) O'jllev, or cu;xs, 
 
 s. 
 
 vol rifi-a (a) 
 
 va. at; 
 
 F 
 
 rx cl 
 
 YX U ( UiY (3) 
 
 tx an 
 
6; 
 
 CONDITIONAL I. St FORM ? or COMPOSITION. 
 
 I. 8t E. F. 2. d £. F. 3. d E. F. 
 
 nkh-x. \ lt - ll should should would 
 
 ec / §~ J t * 10U wou ^ st shouldst shouldst 
 
 i \ k ) ^ ie would should should 
 
 $U~QLjutv f *t \ we should should would 
 
 tTi % -I lye would should should 
 
 $8e&p ; ^ ( they would should should 
 
 CONDITIONAL 2-d FORM, OR COMPOSITION. 
 
 \ riy.-o , occ , & , uy,iy , art , ovv 
 
 Participle undeeiined tiftuvrxc and timmytqcs , honoring. 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 VULG. I. st FORM« 2, d FORM. 
 
 S. mf*.-tipiai , ovux4 (i) I sleep , or am sleeping 
 
 £e-a« thou sieepest, o/' art sleeping 
 
 a rat he sleeps , or is sleeping 
 
 P. <»',«*()*, evfjtctfn, eu,at«-ri we sleep , <?/' are sleeping 
 
 «c;9e, am ye sleep, o/' are sleeping 
 
 oDyrai they sleep , or are sleeping 
 
 (t) The Author gives the form of the deponent Verb xoip.uu.at instead 
 of the passive of Ttjtw ; not because rum has no passive; but because , in 
 the vernacular language, the active form of the second class of Perispo- 
 tnena is preferred to that of the first ; insomuch that almost all Perispo- 
 mena active are formed like tiu,o>. Thus it is usual to say kx.oXou6-5), %<; , 
 «, etc. I follow etc. j tyiqS), <??? $etc. I observe etc. instead of d&oXouft-w, 
 its, sfj TTii-co j e?« , eT, which vrould be more correct. This preference holds 
 very generally ; but , as a sort of compensation , the form of the 
 first class , that of i%crh , is preferred for the conjugation of the 
 passive ; and it is much more usual to say <riy.oju.at , or -ntutcDaxt 
 than Tip.5p.at , which would be more correct, or, rather, more analo- 
 gical. Thus the idiom of the Vernacular language strongly inclines 
 to the blending of the two. There are however some Verbs which 
 resist this tendency , and preaerve, in part , the form of the second 
 
IMPERFECT TEXSE ( COJflla'UATIVE. ) 
 
 
 
 
 VULG 
 
 • 
 
 
 5. 
 
 IxoijuLOfwr 
 
 
 K01JU.6V U-CUY 
 
 or 
 
 ovn (i) 
 
 
 [xciy.utjQV 
 
 
 KOl.UCW-CVV 
 
 or 
 
 cvn 
 
 
 tKGljLiCX.ro f 
 
 I'/toiyx'JVTav 
 
 XGiyovvT-av 
 
 or 
 
 an 
 
 P 
 
 ixciyu.utw* 
 
 hiciy.ovy.-xGTl OV 6ffTfi 
 
 KDiy.ovy-aaTi 
 
 or 
 
 i.77i 
 
 
 iKCiyCMJ^i 
 
 hioiyova - a<JTi OV i<ni 
 
 Koiycva-ao-Ti 
 
 or 
 
 ivri 
 
 
 fxoi/tom 
 
 iXGiy.OvtTUV 
 
 Kciy.ovvT-av 
 
 or 
 
 an 
 
 The English ( always in a sense of continuation , or 
 repetition ) is, I slept , or was sleeping, thou didst sleep, 
 or wast sleeping, he slept, or was sleeping , we slept ? 
 or were sleeping , ye slept, or were sleeping, they slept, 
 ©r were sleeping. 
 
 AORIST. 
 
 £. (2) iKotp-ifa* or ))h'<ot I slept or have slept 
 
 nhs or ?;'9;j;cec thou didst sleep or hast slept 
 
 w'00 or viiwi he slept or has slept 
 
 jftwe* or vft-xrxyiv we slept or have slept 
 
 $yit$ or iMixirt, ye slept or have slept 
 
 rftwcLv or Wkkoim tne J s ^ e pt or naye slept 
 
 class, in the passive: xo-uioua; is of the number , and has been therefor® 
 preferred as a type of this part of the conjugation, in its least corrupted 
 slate. -• 
 
 It has been observed that these Verbs preserve, in part only, the 
 form of the second class of Perispomena. The vulgar sacrifice the & , 
 and change it into 00 , as in those of the first , and have preserved 
 the a in the present Tense only of each Mood. 
 
 (i~) The Vulgar contract Hot^oucra^e into xcip.cu<^ ; and sometimes 
 use the augment throughout. In the 3. d Person Singular and Plural, 
 if the e be added , the accent must be acute. 
 
 (2) The vulgar omit' the augment, and say xctpiOv^a, e; 7 s» 
 

 -PLUPERFECT. 
 
 $X ^> \ I na ^ slept 
 
 thou ha cist slepl 
 c he had slept 
 
 n^aiMv t ^ we had slept 
 
 ye had #iepfc 
 they had slept 
 
 erf 
 
 tiy-xv 
 
 FUTURE TENSE I. St COMPOSITION*. 
 
 Be\*qf uc , it , op.iv, tn , ouv KcipSi (i) I shall slerp. 
 
 Q.A COMPOSITION 
 
 Q'Ki ' kw^W-w , :~c , v\ , w/xev , iJTi, cvv 
 
 \ Koif/.-Gt{A.c(.i , acroy , ara/ , oojuiQz , aVOt , w?r«.' 
 
 3. d COMPOSITION. 
 
 #5 re Or 0a ] K01 ^'^ > ytj • ? > tyb > f v-rt > fv 
 
 koi^-w^oli , carat, area, uutQct, acrOe, mr@Lf» 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. ( CONTINUAT1VE. ) 
 
 sleep thou. 
 Jet him sleep. 
 Jet us sleep, 
 sleep ye 
 let them sleep. 
 
 (i) The two English Forms, as in the Future of thaw , substituting 
 the word sleep for honor. 
 
 (?) Contracted from xoi^aou , as jwuxasQa from koWsafts. 
 
 s. 
 
 KOI ft. 
 
 rov (a) 
 
 
 etc 
 
 
 ara/ 
 
 
 p. «- f 
 
 
 electa 
 
 VULG. 
 
 
 
 ao-Oe (a) 
 
 (ZO-Tfc 
 
 ac 
 
 
 WTW 
 
 CVV70.1 
 
AOIUST. 
 
 S- netpntw English as above , but not 
 
 «c x-aprfifi in the sense of repetition , 
 
 P. a? MijutiQ-tipiv or oZniv or continuation. 
 
 XClU^Tt 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. ( QONTIBTUATIVE. ) 
 VULG. 
 
 S. tx xoip-aucu or 9vp#t that I sleep (i) 
 
 k™ 1 thou sleep 
 
 »rat he sleep 
 
 *• ujmQa or 9V/u-ci<?7i, i<jji we sleep 
 
 or a*™ ye sleep 
 
 or ovtTxi they sleep 
 
 UV70U 
 
 AORIST. 
 
 8 m xo'uyifi-u English as above , but not 
 
 re in the sense of repetition , 
 
 j? or continuation, 
 
 ®[Mf 6V(JLl 
 
 evv 9vvt 
 
 CO^DJfriOITAL TENS* I. si COMPOSITION* 
 
 I.St E. FORM. 2. d JEv F. 3. d E. F. 
 
 S. «f«t-« \ I should I should I would 
 
 thou wouldst thoushouldst thou sh. d,t 
 
 he would he should he should 
 
 n&K-oLfjav f |- we should we should we would 
 
 €r» I * ye would ye should' ye should 
 
 yhh-cLf J they would they should they should < 
 
 (r) I may, or should sleep, tlioumayst, or shouldst sleep, etc. : 
 
 see the same tense of T ip, 
 
a. COMPOSITION 
 
 S* JfiM K9; ( u-f?8w 
 
 or 
 
 U/AOil (\ 
 
 tffe 
 
 or 
 
 deat 
 
 «% 
 
 or 
 
 CUT Oil 
 
 P, nOwUfeK 
 
 or 
 
 Q /tZ-tSsfr 
 
 »f§#Ti 
 
 or 
 
 « cr Gtfe 
 
 «8#v/ 
 
 or 
 
 UYTUl 
 
 $} 
 
 English as'abov 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present wp. $vptvQc , ov,uUn , tvpiw sleeping, 
 past K*i t uyip4m, ' iw , «w having slept. 
 
 V VERB SUBSTANTIVE. 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT XUSJb 
 
 5. t/^aai 
 t/crai 
 
 P. t/'^tfli* 
 
 tlvxt ■ 
 
 wo 
 P. V t9 « 
 
 1*0(71 
 
 I am 
 thou art* 
 he is 
 we are 
 ye are 
 tkey are 
 
 IMPERFECT. ( CONTINDATIYE. ) 
 VCLG. 
 
 (r«a9i 
 
 mow or fivor 
 
 iroy vtolv, 
 
 W/U-CLVTt f HTTi 
 
 m<xv hrciy , 
 
 Y\TCLVl 
 
 I was. 
 thou wast, 
 he was. 
 we were^ 
 ye were, 
 they were. 
 
 (i) For the vulgar changes of »^« { into riua! etc. see the present 
 Tense subjunctive. 
 
AORIST; 
 
 P. i1jU.IV , 
 
 ATS , 
 
 flora? , 
 
 VKa/uiv 
 
 titan. 
 
 CO 
 
 I was , or have been- 
 thou wast , or hast been* 
 he was , or has been 
 we were , or have beea 
 ye were , or have been 
 they were , or have been. 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 **X- a > v > *> *y-w 3 . irt, av <ttoM , I had been, 8$c». 
 
 F 
 
 UTURE 
 
 TENSE I.St COMPO 
 
 BITION. 
 
 
 
 I.St E. FORM. 
 
 2.d E. FORM. 
 
 $£X-4> 
 
 \ 'sr 
 
 I shall be. 
 
 I will be. 
 
 us 
 
 
 thou wilt be. 
 
 thou shalt be. 
 
 it 
 
 \ ^ 
 
 he will be. 
 
 he shall be. 
 
 9[AIV 
 
 / © 
 
 we shall be. 
 
 we will be. 
 
 ITI 
 
 V J3 
 
 ye will be. 
 
 ye shall be. 
 
 evy 
 
 y% 
 
 they will be. 
 
 they shall be. 
 
 2. a COMPOSITION. 
 0sA6i vpeu , mat , men , fyc. , or oraG-of , \fc > » » % c * 
 
 3. d COMPOSITION. 
 Gs yd ? or Ga np*t t metf, y\vai , 8$C. ,. <rraG-a> , vc y yj , &$*> 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 PRESENT TENSE. ( CONTINUATIVE. ) 
 
 be thou, 
 let him he 
 P. jjyce^ let us be 
 
 «V J<t0£ or 5ars be ye 
 
 «V ?f<3ti let them be. 
 
 (i) The vulgar say ^Ovj^a, e$, e, e^. without Augment. 
 
7V 
 
 A01UST, OR INDEFINITE. 
 
 S. yiivw English as above, but not in 
 
 He yuvn , the sense of repetition, 01 
 
 P. aV yiivwfjLiv , continuation. 
 
 ytiviri 9 
 «.<; yuyovv t 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 PRESENT TENSE. ( CONTINUATIVE. ) 
 
 S. vol Yipai that I be, may, or should b$ 
 
 woli thou be, mayst, or shouldst be 
 
 Svixj he be, may , or should be 
 
 P. yjuiQx we be, may, or should be 
 
 wo-Oe , wavfo ye be, may , or should be 
 
 hat they be, may , or should bs 
 
 AORIST. ( INDEFINITE. ) 
 
 English as above , but not m 
 a continuative sense. 
 
 ,cx yiiy-a 
 
 
 CONDITIONAL I.St FORM OR COMPOSITION. 
 
 S. 
 
 P. 
 
 vQlk-OL 
 £ 
 
 nQU-a{Utv 
 viQiK-aiv 
 
 I.St E. F. 
 
 ' I should 
 thou wouldst 
 he would 
 we should 
 ye would 
 
 • they would 
 
 1. E. F 
 
 should 
 
 shouldst 
 
 should 
 
 should 
 
 should 
 
 should 
 
 3.d E. F. 
 
 u 
 
 > 
 
 would 
 
 shouldst 
 
 should 
 
 would 
 
 should 
 
 should 
 
 CONDITIONAL 2.d FORM OR COMPOSITION. 
 
 ■tlQiKt • 
 
 or 
 
 tipai , 
 
 :<0-< 
 
 wcli , 
 
 >^tf/ , ny.ilX 9 V](TVi , 
 ; 0)^£K j mi y OVV 
 
 Participle indeclinable , ormg , being. 
 
CHAPTER XXVII. 
 
 REMARKS ON THE VERBS* 
 
 FIRST PART. 
 
 OF THEIR ACCENT. 
 
 i . The accentuation of Verbs is easy. The Accent is always 
 retracted as much as the genius of the language will per- 
 mit. For determining what and where it should be , at- 
 tention must be paid to the terminations; since there are 
 some , which will not admit of the retraction of the Ac- 
 cent to the Antepenult. They are those formed with the 
 vowels w and n , and the Diphthongs u and ov , ( except 
 when this last,.cu, appears in the vulgar form of the i.st 
 and 2.d persons of the Imperfect Indicative Passive , 
 tyfcltpovjuow , iyfoLfovaow. ) These same terminations require 
 a substitution of the acute for the circumflex. Thus the 
 Penult of Tfuyt is circumflexed ; of rfayu acuted, 
 
 2. The Aorist of the Subjunctive Passive is always cir- 
 cumflexed on the same syllable : rd y^atpOcJ , r* yfaftupw, 
 
 vx yf>a<p- Svrt ; yd GrsLTYjft-Q upiv , OV ovy.lv, vjrt ; vet jft/^G-a , 
 vjtizv y or ovp.iv , yjrt. 
 
 3. In Perispomena , or circumflexed Verbs , ( that is , 
 in their present and imperfect Tenses , which are the only 
 Tenses that undergo contraction , or have any thing dis- 
 tinctive from the Verbs called Barytona ) the accent is 
 always on the syllable resulting from the contraction , 
 
 iGrZT9V t UM f f.'STOLTOVGCY , t&CCTOV /UiftcL ; tKClJAGO/AW , iKOljAXrO , 
 
 ixeifxafAi^oL , circumflex, or acute , according to the gene- 
 ral principles of accentuation. The second person singular 
 ef the Present Tense Imperative Active, is an exception ; 
 because the accent does not fail upon the contracted syllable: 
 
 GtrtTtl , WQLTtjl ; rifiLCLl f TlfACL. 
 
 The Aorists knrcLTwoi , fT/^wa ; icrcnffc? , iriun^v , not 
 being circumflexed, though parts of circumflexed Verbs , are 
 acuted, and follow the Rules for Barytona , which throw 
 the accent as far back as possible. 
 
SECOND PART. 
 
 OF THE CHARACTERISTIC A2TD ITS CHANGES. ' 
 
 I. The Characteristic of the Imperfect is always the 
 same as that of the Present, as well in the Active as Pas- 
 sive Voice-: ypolpa , y?xq>ouou , Imperfect eypapa , ty?oL<pbpw. 
 But that of the Aorist is different. The Characteristic of 
 the Aorist Active regulates that of the Aorist, and Parti- 
 ciple Past Passive; and therefore alone demands the Reader's 
 particular attention.. 
 
 2. The Aorist Active has , for the most part, but three 
 Characteristics s , £ , ^ : t$oLwih.tvr* , I reigned , IpuAaija , 
 I guarded , Xy^a. , I wrote. Thus , except verbs having 
 one of the four liquids , \ 3 p , v , j> , as the Characteristic 
 of the present in ku , pa , m , ?w , all verbs , forming 
 their Aorist regularly, have one of the above as its Charac- 
 teristic. These three Characteristics of the Aorist Active 
 change in the Aorist Passive : thus , a is changed into 6 9 
 or a-9 (i), iGoun'KMz, I reigned; iCameuflw , I was governed; 
 iZfocffci , I forced ; ifrctcrSviy , I was forced : £ into )ft > 
 i<pvKg£x, itpuKdxQw 9 J was guarded ; and ^ into<p8, 'iypx^x , 
 iy?sl<phy. Verbs, having as the Characteristic of the Aorist 
 Passive , form the participle past in pivot : ifiottiKivQw , 
 fix? ikw pivot , governed; those having o-0 combined insert?, 
 i€ia.cfav , fiiao-pivot , forced ; those having x^ combined in 
 y pivot f if vkxx$nv , (pvKaypiyQt (2) and 3 lastly, those having 
 
 (1) Always into a8 , in Verbs in ^w , t&> , Sta , that is , havin % 
 dentals as the characteristics of their present Tense : x.XwQw , I spin ; 
 exXaaa, I spun; ScXwoftviv, I was spun; xXwsasvo; , spun: And in soma 
 few in w pure , which pratice must teach; as axouw , I hear; yl*ou<ja,i 
 I heard; r.wjobm , I was heard ; axjouayivec heard: xXsico , I shut ; laXem*, 
 I shut, or have shut; exXeicfiyjv , I was shut; KXeiff^svog ; shut: Also in 
 some Verbs in £ w ; as, (Jaaavi'Su, I torment; ifJcwotviff* , I tormented; 
 ^*<raviff6rjv, I was tormented; <7<r/afr k ucu, I think; fcoxaaBw ? * thought; 
 fc/aorasves , thought. 
 
 (2) The Vulgar usually change thjs Termination of tht Participle 
 
7 6 
 $$ combined in py.ms , with two pp. • hyfitp Qw , y^st^^'m? M 
 written. 
 
 3. It thus appears, that when the Characteristic of the 
 Aorist Active is known, it is easy to form the Aorist Pas- 
 sive , and thence the Participle Past. Attention, therefore, 
 to the above Rules for the change of the Characteristic 
 and Termination , with a knowledge of the i.st Person 
 Present Indicative of a Verb, will enable the Reader readily 
 to form all the other Tenses. The essential point being a 
 knowledge of the Characteristic of the Aorist Active , and 
 that depending on the Characteristic and Termination of 
 the Present , all the Variations of the latter , and the con- 
 sequent Variations of the former shall be here brought 
 together, under one View. 
 
 4- Perispomena , conjugated regularly (1) have always <r 
 as the Characteristic of the Aorist ; and change the short 
 vowel of the Penult (2) into the correlative long Vowel. 
 
 5. With respect to Barytona, they either end in a pure , 
 or <y preceded by a consonant. Those in a pure , like 
 Perispomena , have 0- as the Characteristic of the Aorist ; 
 thus: |Sa<r/\suV Aor : t£ao7\ev<ra' aaova vwowol. It is the same 
 with those ending in 6o> , 8« , to , and the greater part of 
 those in lp. 
 
 Post, •yy.e'yoc, into pps'vo; , with two p., and say ©uXaauivo; , instead 
 cf q>-j).a*yu.5vo?, Bpau.ut.svo; > instead of ^pwy {lives , from tpp<xcr<7M , I stop, 
 or fence. This occurs also in Derivatives from Verbs ; and the lower 
 •classes say to TCpau.ua, the thing, from ^pan-to , I make, or do. 
 
 (1) The Word regularly is used in contradistinction to a very 
 jfavorite change with the Vulgar , that of the a , the regular character- 
 istic of the Aorist of Perispomena, into g. Thus, they say fpMTYiga > I 
 
 asked, instead of cpw-nora , from epwr-aca, o, I ask. 
 
 (2) Perispomena , being contracted from Hellenic Verbs in e'&> and 
 «o) , the Vowels s and % are considered , with reference to the forma- 
 tion of their Derivative Tenses , as the Penult. This change of the 
 short vowel of the Penult into the correlative long , e or a into yj , 
 is liable to many exceptions , which must be acquired by practice ; 
 thus: wjwcoptb , I am able; irapajtaXw , I intreat, I invite , irapocrcovcuufcig 
 
 I complain , make in the Aorist -na-rcopso-a , erapauc&evx , iiraoairovs'fiflv » 
 
 without any change in the Penult, 
 
V 
 
 6. But, the above excepted, all Barytona ending iii'w 
 impure , or preceded by a consonant , may be divided 
 into two classes. 
 
 I. Those which have one of the 3 Labials, £, rr, or <p, for 
 their Characteristic , either alone , or combined with 
 another consonant, and end in £&> , ■srw , <pw , 7ttu). Theyj 
 take \J, as the Characteristic of the Aorist : k^u Co or u^wto)^ 
 I hide ; Aor : 'Uov^ol , I hid; r^a , I rejoice ; ti^^k , I 1 
 rejoiced * y$dfo , I write ; tyfot^a , I wrote. 
 
 II. Those which have one of the 3 Gutturals y, x, o'r x. 
 alone, or combined with another consonant, and those ir*' 
 ecu) and ttco , and some in {w. These take £ for the Gh'a-J 
 racteristic of their Aorist : yvhdya , puAocacrw or (pvxdrra) „ 
 I guard ; Aor : £<pJxa%a* &'mk6 , I weave , Aor : wxe^x ~ 
 I wove : rftyu , I run ; ir^a , I ran : fiyy® > or yiyj^ 
 I throw ; Aor : e/>//2* , I threw : <r&px vid r 1 thrust ; Aorri 
 sWf <$a , I thrust or have thrust : -zr& , I congeal ; Aorri 
 «Vw£« 7 I congealed: p^w or <pfoL<r<ra , I stop ,- or fence ; 
 Aor: eVfa^od , I have stopped , or fenced. 
 
 r j. The only terminations that now remain to beiioticed ard 
 those of Verbs in aw , pin , va §* pa; jThese verbs,' as has been 
 already observed , preserve , in the Aorist, the Character- 
 istic of the Present. They change the t of the Penult into 
 it; and those in a#v, the Diphthong ai into a: <ttikkg>, I send, 
 Aor: ivTUka, I sent : rl^i« , I distribute ; Aor: 'imp* + 
 I distributed : fihti, I dwell ; Aor: \pxim , I dwelt : %yfa , 
 I judge ; Aor: 'U^m 9 I judged: ^a-ra/ra> , I warm: Aor: 
 l^o-rava, I warmed : (rmtfa, I sow; Aor: eWe/{>* , I solved .< 
 In the Aorist Passive is inserted between the 1 Character- 
 istic and the Termination , and the Diphthong u is changed 
 into a , whether that Diphthong be in the theme , the 
 present Tense , as in o-artifa , or be formed by insertion 
 of the / ill the' Aorist Active ; as in giJKKa , vttkkol* thus : 
 ffutifa 9 ev&iifd , A. P. , ktrzvccftnv , I was sown ; participle 
 past tr'srcif/A.Ms, sown : vTikkto, 'Utukol , A. P. , wtoikQw , I was 
 sent ; part: past, ctock^oc sent. 
 
 Some Verbs in rco , and particularly those in itfay simply 
 
< j&age theK into 6 : k^ram, I warmed; s^ra^r, Inarmed 
 1 nyself, or was warmed ; part: past. £&t*p£ioc , warmed / 
 « Kfiv*. , I judged; hfi'hv , I was judged ; part: past. Hpptw, 
 j udged. 
 
 8. Other Verbs in m , which practice will teach , and all 
 tl lose in ow 7 which are formed from Barytona in w pure , 
 Jb y the insertion of the v y change, in the Aorist, the y 
 i\ ito <r, as ; tvivr^ I dress; Aor: A. hlvo-a , I dressed : A. P» 
 h W0w , (i) I dressed myself; part: past, hh/xhoc, dressed : 
 o(V(k) 5 I bind ; A. A. *W* , I bound; Aor. J P. &3>ir , I was 
 Lound; part: past. Itu.ivos bound. 
 
 9. Verbs in ovu change the short penultimate vowel into 
 i ts correlative long vowel: wsrem I print; A. A. trv'srua-a. , 
 ] printed; A. P. ervwadr.^ I was printed; part: past rvva/Atrtit, 
 printed. 
 
 10. Some Verbs in cuva change , in the Aorist Active , 
 *this Termination into a, and take the preceding consonant 
 as the Characteristic. Such are : crafrx/W, I suffer; Aor: 
 £o\xfla , I suffered: ^aBa/rw , I learn; Aor: s^a&x, I learnt! 
 KUTaLkoLfidtvo , I understand; Aor: fxaraAaCa, I understood: 
 Aa^a/Vw , I receive by lot ; Aor : ?&«£« , I received by lot : 
 Tvy&.l\Q , I am , T happen to be , it is my lot ; Aor : liv^a j 
 I was, I happened to be , it was my lot. These Verbs, which 
 
 .are not numerous, but, from the nature of their meanings, 
 werv much in use, are ? most of them , in the table of ir-^ 
 regular verbs. 
 
 21. Some Barytona in py , but more particularly Per- 
 ispotviena in fr« , contracted from jWw , lose the v in their 
 Aorist Active: Slf*<y , I beat A. A. 'ilufa. , I beat, or have 
 beaten ; A. P. £^(W, I was beaten ; P. P. loif pivot, beaten: 
 Perispomena form their Aorist in a<ra , as if there were no 
 it in the Termination of the Present, and without changing 
 ,'the Penult: £efr&, I vomit ; Aor : E^oag-a , I vomited: puj>rw ? 
 I embroil ; A. A. eW^as-a, I embroiled; xefra, (2) I pour out ? 
 
 (1) The Modern Greek lias no Middle Voice. The passive is used 
 in a reflective sense. 
 
 (2) Sec Note under this Verb jn t^e list of Irregular Verbs. 
 
79 
 or give to drink, as Wine ; A. A. Utfxt*. , I poured out : 
 
 vnpvu , I pass ; A. A- Screpcw* , I passed. The reason of this 
 irregularity is , that the v , which also passes to the 
 Imperfect, is 'an insertion, the primitive form being in fu: 
 fit* , f w , Ufa , i%tfG> , yvfa , Kifja , arifa. The Aorist Passive 
 of the Perispomena is sometimes formed with 0,and some- 
 times with aL 
 
 Some Barytona in kco are found written with a v between 
 h and w: Thus, many say vukw , ivtikyx , instead of vt'ikku, 
 
 tVTllhCL. 
 
 li. The second person singular of the Aorist of the 
 Imperative Mood Passive always assumes the Characteristic 
 of the Aorist Active , if it exist , or , if there be no such 
 tense , such as analogy , if there were , would require ; at 
 least whenever «r, \L or £ is the Characteristic: thus; irifmhv 
 makes Tt^mov , taking <r from hripma ; tyfdffai, makes yfsUsv, 
 taking 4> from 'iyfOL^u; and iTfufii'xQw,. I retired makes TfoL&f* 
 %qv, retire thou, from tr^xC^x : eorro^aVOwr , / thought makes 
 *to)(jx.<tov y think thou j because, if this verb had an active i 
 the Aorist would be so-ro^aaoc. But, if the Characteristic be 
 any other than one of these three, <r , ^ or % , which only 
 occurs in Verbs ending in k& , po , r« , f U , it does not 
 pass to the Aorist Passive. This Person of the Tense is 
 then formed „ by changing the 6 of the Aorist of the 
 Indicative Passive into <r. Thus avroxf-yo^i , I answer makes 
 it«r£Rf/%y, I answered ; imperative, dtsroKfhov, answer thou, 
 by the change , of 3- into <r : £wT«/ra#« , / warm myself; 
 Aor: i{i<Tr^m , imperative ferww , (i) «>ar/ra thyself. 
 
 i3. In the language of the Yulgar , Verbs in «/»,*©« , 
 take vf, instead of a for the Characteristic of their Aorist 
 Active; w^ivo I shear-, A. A. Uol?ivva, Vulg. aoJ^a , 
 I sheared : »«•?•«>'«, / approach; A. A. U^rtycrx; Vulg. 
 
 ^ (i) Some Verbs, which have not o in the Aorist preserve, in the 
 imperative, the characteristic of the indicative : J xa >*v I was rejoiced , 
 or I rejoiced, makes x,a'poo, x*?om? rejoice thou : e^avvj, I have appeared 
 Siake* cp X % ;y? spwvci ; aj^p^arthou etc.+ see the -list of Irregular Verbs. 
 
Bo 
 
 hcvrt^a , I approached. Deceived by the sound of the a 
 in these Terminations, where it is pronounced as , ( see 
 page 2 ) the common People form the Aorist according to 
 the analogy of Verbs in /3<y. They follow the same analogy 
 in the Aorist Passive and Participle Past: thus , from 
 £Kov$i^a, they form, A. P. ikov^t^o. , I was shorn, and P.P. 
 
 Hov^ifAfiivoi; , shorn , instead of txovftvQyiv , Kovftvuzycs. 
 
 But IxsvftvQviv , and txovfz<pQyix.a differ only in their termina- 
 tions ; for , if the Vulgar , instead of the more approved, 
 Termination be taken , and it be written iKov^qSw, it will 
 differ from the regular form in orthography only , the 
 sound being precisely the same; since, in the Diphthong 
 vj y the u before aspirates is sounded like <p. See page 2» 
 
 THIRD PART. 
 
 I. Some Present Tenses Indicative, such as 9^a , I will; 
 teyo) , I say ; xKaiyco , / weep 85c. when conjugated , lose, by 
 syncope , a syllable. Thus, it is usual to say Gee, thou wilt y 
 or art willing; G.W, we will , or are willing ; Sire , ye 
 will , or are willing; Qlv , they will 8$c. instead of &kuq , 
 Bzh.0p.1v, GsAire, QIacuk : hie , xiyv/ , Kin , xh , thou sayest et<*> 
 
 instead O'f xeye/c , Ktyoy.iv , hzyiri y Kiyovv : kxoui; , Khouuw t 
 
 Khx7rt , iLKoCiif^ thou weepest etc. , instead of Kxxtyus, kax/- 
 
 yo'y.lV , KKOLt^lTZ . xhtxiyovv. 
 
 We see the Verb thus, losing its characteristic , its ter- 
 mination and the vowel or diphthong following its charac- 
 teristic , retain only its final consonant , or , at most, its 
 final syllable. This syncope is not admissible , when the 
 termination consists of a single vowel, or diphthong not 
 followed, as is the case in the i. st and 3. d Persons singular: 
 &V&J , &k-£/ ; because , if so , nothing constituting Con- 
 jugation would remain. 8s is the sole exception; and is m 
 use only as an Auxiliary. 
 
 2. It is by a similar syncope that the imperative particle 
 «V is formed from the Hellenic Imperative cL$iq , leave f 
 from iffio 7 I 1 we^ 
 
8.i 
 3. The lower 'clashes employ these elisions in Nouns , as 
 in the following proverb , bdyovfotpac kxjtfioifctv toy upiuopa , 
 instead ot o dyevfopayot; ixifStpt rh ufiuotpuyov. (i) The unripe 
 Fruit eater has got the start of the ripe fruit eater. 
 
 4- As of general application, it may be well to observe, 
 that the lower classes have a dislike to v as the termination 
 of a Word. They , therefore , when the^regular termination 
 requires this letter, elide it, and say to ^foacouro the face, 
 and not Grpwuzrcv 5 rw fjLouda. \ rh -^aga , instead of youzzr x 
 yafav , the regular accusatives. In the same manner 5 in 
 Verbs , they drop the v in ypdtpoyt, ypd^a^i , instead of saying 
 y$d$oytv ; kyfci-lay.lv , or subjoin an e to the regular final v , 
 as in yfd<powt : , ypc'-iavt, instead of-y^a'p 01 "* lypa-^av. They often 
 annex it to the article, which from the sound might lead a 
 person to imagine the following Verb to be augmented , 
 when it is not: thus they say rovl fih&zra , t see him, instead of 
 ¥w Qhi'&o; Ity revl Uha % I will not have him, instead of&ep toy &ao>. 
 
 CHAPTER XXVII t 
 
 LIST OF IRREGULAR VERBS. (2) 
 
 A .ucifruivcd , I err ; Imp.* dydpTa'tva ; Aor: dydfTWcc , ana 
 
 Viua^Tov P. P. dy.aQTvitji.iv os, 
 
 A\aiP>afvu, I ascend Imp.* dvaitaiva 3 Aon iYe/Jw , and 
 eivetifimot; Aor: Imp.e dvaffia , dvaifiari-i Aor: Subj: vet dwi&-a , 
 
 (1) If in a good sense, as sjos'p^a.i^ev would seem to indicate j equivalent, 
 perhaps , to our « taking time by the forelock : » if in a bad sense, 
 to our « eating corn in the blade. » 
 
 (1) The Imperfect Tenses are all formed regularly, but are never- 
 theless given, as likely to aid beginners. The form of the Aorist Pas- 
 sive in r,v, used by Writers, is alone given. It is easy to substitute 
 Via* » wich is the Termination preferred by the lower classes , and , 
 indeed , in Conversation , by all Classes, the Reader, who may be 
 surprised at the different acceptations of some of the following Words, 
 should recollect what limitations , extensions , and Changes many 
 English Words have undergone since the age of Shakespeare ; such 
 $s prevent ^ obnoxious, nervous etc, 
 
 <0 
 
m 
 
 7,:, r, , va avatp-w[fcsVj va *va$r t 7£ , or avat t 8#r£ , va avaipotfoy 
 Katagaww, I descend is conjugated in the same manner. 
 
 A'vatpw , 1 abolish , or destroy; Imp.* avatpouca; Aon 
 avaLssca; . Aor, Pass, fltvatpgfr/iv; P.P. avaipvjjtsvo?. 
 
 A'vacT^vct) 7 I raise , I re -establish ; Imp. 1 avacrratva^ 
 Aor. avsffTYicra; Aor. Pass.' ovfitriSS^v ; P.P. ava«TVi|JE.sv«?. 
 
 A'TpatOaivto , Viilg. irat03t6vw, I die Imp. 1 aW&Saiva; Aor. 
 airoOocva; P.P. aTroQajxp-ivo; ; Vul^. ttat9ap:|A£vo$, dead. 
 
 A'petrc*, I please ; Imp. 1 and Aor: ajjgsa Part, Past. 
 apecu-ivo;. This is the only Verb that has <j as the 
 Characteristic of the Present Tense. 
 
 Auqxvu, I increase ; Imp. 1 riu£ava :■ Aor: aub;cx , Aor. 
 Pass. oeu&]0i}v; P. P. au^evos. 
 
 A\piv«, I leave; Imp/ orpiva; Aor. a©7}<ra , and aovpctfj 
 Aor. Imp. 1 oV/jre, a^vfceTfi; Aor. SubJ.va oV/faxo, or a<p*/)afc) ; 
 Aor, Pass. acpeOuiv ; P. P. acp^/i^o;. 
 
 Ba^w, I set , put, or place, Imp/ epa£a; Aor. efSaXix; 
 Aor. Pass. gpaXftnv; P.P. (Saliva;. 
 
 BapsLoup.at , I am Weary, I feel a listless disgust * 
 ( said of any thing irksome, ) je mennuie ; Imp.* 
 papeioufiLouv. Aor. efjaplOyv P.P. j3aps[xy.svos. 
 
 B^girw, I see; Imp. 4 IJJXeiwc; Aor. eUa; Aor.-I'mp. 4 i£s , 
 i&s; , $£?£; Aor. Subj. va tS-w , 5js , 7 , or, by aj^haeFesis, 
 va £co , va &r;<; , va SyJ. 
 
 Bps/w, I wet ; ■-( (3ps)(£i, impersonally, it rains) Imp/ 
 %£yo^ Aor. gPpe;«; Aor. Pass. sPpa^v, lam wet. or have 
 been welted, as with, rain ; ppgyj/ivos, Wet, as with rain. 
 
 Bo^avw, I suck, asau infant at the Breast ;Tmp. 4 epu- 
 £«va , Aor. £(3ti£aca» 
 
 Fepa£<» I grow old; eyepa^a; Aor. lygpacra. The A oris t* 
 alone is much in use. 
 
 Hvomat, I become; Imp.* eyivb|/.ouv ; Aor. eyeiva , and 
 syiva and gyivVpca; lmp. e Pres. 1 ytvou, ytveaQe; Aor. yg'vou and 
 yswsf Aor. Suhj* va ygivto or ysva) jP.P, ysv^uivos. 
 
83 
 Aay^avw, I bite; Imp. 1 ' s^ayxava j Aor. sSiyjcaca, P. P. 
 
 AsVfa) , I bind; Imp. 1 sSsvefi ; Aor. ISsca ; P.P. Ssasvo; ; 
 see Chap. 217, Part 2. N. 8. 
 
 Aicko and Atvca , I give; Imp. 1 I'Si&ss and I'Stya ; Aor. 
 i'dWa and gowca ; Imp. e ^0?, ootSj or &Scs , 6wc>£Te; 
 Aor. Subj. Va £co<7ca and va £«*&>; Aor. Pass. £^o6t}v; P. P. 
 
 E'fjyaivw , I go out ; Imp, 1 gJSyaiva; Aor. s.Gyvfca • Aor. 
 lmp. e l^ya, £ 4 8yaTg, as if from a Perispomenon, sp-yaw-yw. 
 Compare this Verb with etvat|ia&v&»i 
 
 E'py^co j I take away, or send away; Imp.* £,3ya£a ; 
 Aor, ejpyaXa j Imp.e £ t 6ya"X£ ; Aor. Pass. i 4 8yaX0vjv ; P. P. 
 gpyaltiivo;, Compare this with pa£«, 
 
 E'p.8a'-voj, or Vulgarly sprf&ivu , i enter; Imp. 4 £p.(3aiva, 
 IWatva ; Aor. £[/.,87)}ta$ Efunfca; Aor, lmp. e £[/.pa , eU-a , 
 i^a-e , ip.Tr«T£ ; Aor. Snbj. va sjaS-co , %q , 9i, or sp/ic-ca, 7|$, 
 yj etc. ; P* P. ep.paa(Jt£vo§, or su/rcaagiivog. 
 
 E'vSuvw , I dress ; Imp.* ev$vva ; Aor. tvSuaa ; Aor. 
 Pass. svSutoiy ; P. P* sv&pivoc ; see page 78, N. o. la like 
 manner, gfcouvto, 1 undress, 
 
 EVrpETCOjAai , I am ashamed; Imp. £VTp£7rpuaouv ; Aor, 
 IvrpoVflv ; Aor, lmp, e gvTpairou ; Subj. va lyTpaTwS. 
 
 E f/o;xai , I tome,- Imp.* sp^oupsouv ; Aor. */)A0a , Vulg. 
 ;6:/. ; Aor. Imp.e sXa, IXaTC" ; Subj. va sXOca, Vuli$. ep6o>. 
 
 EupiffXfcj , 1 find ; Imp.* cjptax.a; Aor. vjCipa , sup& , gup'flxa 
 and eftpvjxfc; Imp. e supg , e&p£T£ ; Subj. va gupw a* id, va £upw; 
 Aor. Pass. supgOiov ; P. P. gup7)[/.gvo'$ and sup£[/.£va$. 
 
 r Eya) , I have; Imp.* sfya ; Fut. 0g"Xa> 'iyzi. 
 
 Z& , £t>> £?j, £&{jl£v, fere , *(oGv , I Uve, tuou etc. ; Imp.* 
 e£ou.<ia; Aor, e^vjaa ; Imp. e feae, fers , Subj. Pres.* va *(o5, 
 fe$, fe etc. ; Aor. va £yfcco. 
 
 'Hp/itopw, I can, or am able; Imp.* viu/rcopoysa ^ Aor. 
 viairooKja, without changing the Peuuit. 
 
3 H?£upw, : 1 know ;• Imp.t -^upa ; Aor. tjj«$a , from' 
 |£adatvte. 
 
 GeAco, I will*, or am willing; Tmp.t viOsXa; Aor. iMi-nad.- 
 
 0dTw, I place, or set ; Imp.* I'fea ; Aor. efoca ; Aor, 
 Pass. £T£Qr,v ; P. P. Osj/ivo;. 
 
 KaOopt-ai', I sit, abide, dwell; Imp/ Ixofouiplouv ; Aor. 
 sxaGvjca;. Imp. e Pies, 1 xaO.yj; Aor. xaQr.ce ; P. P. xaOou^svo^. 
 KaGfCco, I place , or seat, is regular; Aorist kiOiaa; P. P. 
 xa6t(j[/.evQ£. 
 
 Kaiw , xaTyco, and Yulg. xauyw , I l>iirn ; Imp.* Extua r - 
 axaiya, fxofoya; Aor. Ixauca , Virlg. fxaJ&a, See Pajje 79, 
 N. J 3. imp. e itauGs , V. xafe The Present ami InipefjeH 
 have also a Neuter signification. When the Verb is 
 ihus used ihe Aorist is Passive sxavjv V. sxavrxa ; Imp.* 1 " 
 Pres. 1 P. xcaou ; A. P. xaucou, xa<p6^T£; Snbj. va xaw ; P. P. 
 >;a]/.uivoc , as if from xacpTw , in analogy with the Aorist 
 Active sV.a'^a. 
 
 Kalco, I call ; Tmp.t sxaloucra ; Aor. gydfteca; Aor. P;i<s. 
 without changing the Penult ; ixaXetfBvjv; P.P. xaXe<j[A£VG : fc. 
 
 Kajxvw and xavto, I do, or make; Imp. 1 sxauva , and 
 exava ; .Aor. exa{/.& ; Imp. e xaj^c; P. P. xapLcopivo?'. 
 
 KaTaipaLva) , I descend, like avcft[3aiv&>.- 
 
 KaTaXapaivw , I comprehend; Imp. 1 lx<%Ta>.aj3aiv&; Aon 
 exaTa^apa , or xocTfl&apa , See >.a|£j3ava>. 
 
 Kep&xivu , or xep$C&>, I gain; Imp.t IxepStooe, &xep$£a ; 
 'Aor. &xsp$1f)(J«, and'&xlp&i£a; P. P. xepo^evo;. 
 
 Kepvw", (1) I pour out to drink ; Imp.* sxepvousa ; Aor, 
 Ixspaaa 5..' Aor. Pass. gxspaorO^v, P. P. xspatfpvos. 
 
 (1) Just as we say , mix a Glass of Lemonade ,• Orgeat , Punch , etc. , 
 but pour out, and never mix a Cup of Tea , or Coffee , though , as 
 generally drunk, they are all mixtures. The primitive meaning of 
 the word was to mix. The Ancients usually mingled Water -with Wine, 
 as we often do ; hence the progressive limitation , and the Modern' use 
 9ti 4&«t as a generis Term fgr Win^ 
 
m 
 
 KlzUd, and fcXafyfci; T weep; Imp.* &-/kaia and exlxiyx; 
 A or, eyIxugcx. and ekla^a ; See P. 79 . N. i 3 ; P. P. xXap^ypg. 
 
 Kottto), I cut; imp.t ifxorTa ; A. A. iWjxx, Aor. Pass c 
 ^coV/jv; Aor. Imp, e xo^s , .jtoirijTe ; P. P. xojxpvo;. 
 
 Aap.3avco, and 7><x$cdM> , I receive.; Imp.t eXauipava, and 
 AafSaiya ; Aor. eXafia; Imp. e XajSe. 
 
 AavQavo(xai, I mistake, or am deceived; Imp. 1 IXavGavo- 
 p-viv; Aor, elavGaaGrjV, Subj. va"Xav8aaGw; P. P. >av6acrj/ivos 
 e|g6e rcotoa XavQas^eyos" s^sts [/.syaXo >*aGo; , you are very 
 much deceived , or mistaken. 
 
 Aa^aiyw , et;,£fc\ I receive by lot, or it is my lot, 
 thou receivest by lot , or it is thy lot etc. Imp. 1 i\i- 
 jr.aiva ; Aor. tkaya. See page 78, N. 10. 
 
 Adyta, I say; Imp. 1 eXsya; Aor. eihra; Imp« sW, or by 
 Aphaeresis , and the addition of a c* iplf 3 tzztz , xs; to', 
 tell it; Subj. vl™, and yaVo, P. P. irregular Xsy^e- 
 vo; , the aforesaid, the Person in question. 
 
 Ma£ov&>, I collect, or gather together; Imp. 1 spc£ov«, 
 Aor. £(xa^o>?a; P. p. (Aa^ct)(X£vo^. The. v of jxa^ova) is by in- 
 sertion , See page 78, N, 8, The $ instead of a as the 
 rharacteristic of the Aorist is the only Irregularity, 
 See pno e 76, Note 1. 
 
 MavOavw , and MaGaw* , I learn, I accustom myself^ 
 $0; Imp. 1 £f/.av9ccva , and e|/.a0atva; Aor. fy.aOa , Imp. e j/.a#e. 
 See page 78, N. 10. The Participle Past alone is ir- 
 regular , |jLaO-/5pL£vo;. 
 
 NoidQw , and vowyw , I perceive; Imp.* IvoioOoe and 
 lyoiova; Aor, svoioxra. The v is inserted. 
 
 Sspvu , I vomit ; Imp. 1 e^pyouaa ; Aor. i^epa&a , See. 
 page, 78, N, 11. 
 
 Sw, ^evw, and $uo) , t scrape; Imp.t i^otfaac; Aor. f£u<7<x,- 
 
 IJaipvw , or Hcpvco , I take, take away; Imp.t firatpvx 
 Aor. sicippa ; Imp. e Traps, wape-re; Aor. Pass, eirap^v ; 
 Subj. va irapQw; P. P. xapjxsvQ?. 
 
IIa<r/&>, TfcaMvw , I endure, I suffer ; Imp.* tfraerydg x 
 iTraOgtva , Aor. common to both , I%5$a. 
 
 Ilepvw , KTTspvio. I pass , pass through, or across, 
 Tmj,. 1 «7rspvoucra$ A or. a7rgpaca P. P. irepacp.svo?, a7Kpa<j|/.£vo.s % 
 from 77£-pa(o-pw, by inseriioti of I her v. See page 78 , N. j 1. 
 
 EferS, 1 fly , (N) I make fly ( Act: as we say of a ball ) 
 contracted from 7v£T«w ; Imp.t stc&to'jctoc; Aor. ejreVa^a ? 
 TTSTStouaa!,. I run in haste, fly, Aor. £iraTayjl7iv • P. P, 
 77£Tay|ji£voc. AM the irregularity consists in the substitution 
 of tht* characteristic \ for c* and its consequences, Se«© 
 Page 76, Note i , 
 
 IT/iycavco , Trayaivw , and rayto , I go; Imp.* sVyfyatva * 
 ercaya&va; A sV/jya Pluperfect, sl^a 7rr ( ya(vst;- Pies. 1 lmp. c , 
 mfyarte, 7ray£. There is a first Person plural , wi'hout a'V 
 the particle ; ra;i.sv , let us go; instead of ^yojjxEv* rcaya* 
 admits the syncope noticed Page 80, N. f , and it is 
 usual to say Tuayw , 7ra<; , tccz , tc#(je.£V , 77<xt£ , ttocv ; instead 
 of iray&> ., •ffayeif; ' j iva-yit , Trayoijuv , rcaysTS} irayouv , P. A* 
 TCJiyatvQVTac, 
 
 ITivco , I drink ; Imp.* &riva' ; Aor. (fat,* , vJttkx ; 
 Imp. e 77t£, itieTe ; Subj. vse lutca 3 whence the Pluperfect ? 
 ay a 7uisT; Aor. Pass, eftoOqv, and l7rr.oGv;v ; P. P. TCiMpvo; , 
 drunk ( intoxicated. ) 
 
 Elwrrw, and ttc'otco, I fall; Imp.* gurncTo; , fe^ra , Aor, 
 feca 5 P. P. 'tccg'jlsvos , fallen, 
 
 HXsc* ,1 Sail , Imp,* IrcXsfx ; Aor. &>.£u<j«. 
 
 HvCyca I drown {actively ) Imp. 1 errvtyaj Aor. ftfv££iz: 
 the only irregularity is in the Aorist Passive , which 
 preserves the Characteristic of the Present sxvrpivj P.P. 
 imyprivo? , or nrvt'xyivo?. See Page ^5, Note 2. 
 
 IIpr'ajcpjAai , i swell; Imp. 1 l«pjr)GXo(JW]V ; Aor, eVpvfaQviv 3 
 
 P. P. •7rp7)ff[*.eVo$i 
 
 2j3u« ? cpuvw , and <?ps , T extinguish , and I am 
 ex:mguished. ( transitively and intransitively ) Imp. 
 
-8 7 
 foftayfc, tcrj3uva , S<Tpot?<rot. Aor. zcfivGx. There is nothing 
 irregular in this Verb, but the insertion of (he <r in 
 ihe P. P. c[Sucf[/ivoG , as in rWpivos, 
 
 2"/i/.oya> , [ raise^ Imp. 1 eV/fctoVa ; A. A. g<r/fzaxya ; A- P. in 
 an intransitive, op reflective sense , ecnxwOviv , I rose- , 
 or have risen; P.P. 4swi>[*£vo$. The only irregularity of 
 this Verb, is in the iA Person of the Aorist Imp;'* Pas- 
 sive, or rather reflective, gtjxou, rise thou. 
 
 Svaivw , and r4vto, I erect , fix up ; Imp.* eVaiva and 
 l^viya; ; A. A. ferw ; A. P. e<ry$7iv ; Subj. va jpjOfi ; P. P„ 
 C"''.[*ivo<; , regularly from <pfvw. 
 
 ^ts/.co, a no 1 ^exofAat^ I stay, remain; Imp.* i<-(kmy>QW3 
 Aor. ec^Orjy. Imp* ?s$a 4 ^jcsts , aiid £w>p, <ra6yJTS ; Subj. 
 *va rraGto. 
 
 2t&\m, and ^sXvw, I send; Imp.* eVe»a, £<rslva; A. A,- 
 Its&a; A. P. fcaXOviv; P. P. ga^/ivo; : See Page 77, N. 7. 
 
 Sujxpaiyst, It happens; Aor. ffuvspvi ( to ffu|Ap&^7jxo? , the 
 Renter of the Ancient, Pe$f. Part. , an occurrence t 
 accident , event , ^#£ which has happened , and its 
 plural, t& ox»|fP«pjj3t^flt, though occasionally used, have 
 no analogy,: with the language, as now spoken, and 
 must be considered as Hellenic relics. ) 
 
 Tpc'yju, Iron; Imp.* Erpzyjx,; Aor. IVpsEa, Imp.e Pres. 
 Tps^e, TpsyjiTe, Aor. ?peEs, Tps^STS, andTpfya, Tpey^cTs. 
 
 Tpcoya). I eat. ; imp. 1 erptoya; A. A. e<p«Y« ; Imp.* (pays , 
 f>ay£Tg ; Subj vacpayto; A. P. i^sytoQviv; whence ihe P. P. 
 €payo)fxsyoc. Tpwyco, m the Indicative, and .va <payo), in ihe 
 Subjunctive, are often syncopated 9 like xXafyo : See 
 page 80 , third part, fj. r. 
 
 IV/aivw, I am, I find myself, I happen to be; Imp/ 
 eTUYcava ; Aor. cru^a. 
 
 TTCoff^o^ai, I promise; Imp.* OroffvjjujAouv.; Aor. u-nrocys-* 
 &r,v; Imp.e Pres.* uTCoapu , GrafcyscSs ; Aor. 'jTzoiyJcov ', 
 ■uTToc/eGfi'T? ; P. P. (ncoc^e^yoi. 
 
$atvQ(i.at, I appear- Imp,* soaivo(x-V}v or quv , Aor. fy4&Hft 
 ]mp. e Pres,* (patvou, <psuvs<j9s; Aor, <pavau, or rather, oavou^ 
 ©avyhri. 
 
 ^suyco, I depart, flee, go away''; Imp. 1 e<psyya ; Aor„ 
 %uya, Imp.S Pres^^eOye; Aor. <puy£, <puyeT&, and <peuya , 
 <psuyaT3, 
 
 iQavco, I arrive, has the v by insertion; Imp. eoGavqt,. 
 Aor. ecpQaca; P. P. cpOaapivo?-, arrived. 
 
 Xaioo^at , 1 rejoice , am pleased , Imp. s^atpopiv , 
 &/atpou(^ouv ; Aor. iyaipw ; Imp. e ^apou , or rather, $%ow* 
 yopifre ; Subj. va/ap-w, vj; , ^5 Part, ^apouaevo; , pleased , 
 satisfied. 
 
 Xop-raLva), I am satisfied, as with food , I have enough \ 
 Imp. 1 ejropToctva; Aor. c/opTaca. Part. P. ^opTOtcrjxivofy 
 SYNTAX (1) 
 CHAPTER XXIX, 
 
 OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 1, The Article (2) has nearly the same force as in French * 
 It is sometimes prefixed to the Participle Past, b la(utvos i*r*iy% 
 yd <arfG<7KX0L'Aj , He who had been beaten went to complain* 
 
 (1) The Reader will observe occasionally a difference between the 
 accentuation of what follows, and that exhibited in the preceding 
 etymological part of the Grammar , particularly in adjectives of the 
 3." declension accented on the antepenult ( pro paroxytona. ) To obviate 
 any perplexity that might result , it will be sufficient to observe , 
 that the learned among the Modern Greeks, and indeed aM who 
 pique themselyes on knowing their Language., follow the H«llenie 
 principles of accentuation, as well in speaking as in writing. Their 
 example will, in this particular, be followed. The difference consists 
 chiefly in words declined like , «v8p©wbs , wpoawrcov , a-yptoc , see pa- 
 ges 17 , 19. In general, the Language, here attempted to be taught, 
 being the language as spoken , no notice is taken of a variety of 
 Hellenisms and Corrections , which the learned , with reason, whh to 
 introduce, 
 
 (2) See Appendix §. 1, 
 
.a. It is sometimes a relative, by ellipsis; llv t u dfenu iubfn 7*, 
 K-t.Yiv zyoLZTu rnvrZ o:k* vm ; His Daughter does not please me, 
 but I like your friend's. ( Daughter understood. ) 
 
 3. When the Article is joined to a Substantive , which 
 is itself accompanied by an, adjective , the adjective must 
 invariably be placed between the article and substantive • 
 o kolkoc fi'hoc , the good friend ; If the substantive precede, 
 the article must be repeated , thus ; b tpihoc h xaxo? . Ths 
 latter phrase is more emphatic. In the more elevated style, 
 it is not unusual to interpose short qualifying Phrases , 
 between the Article and Adjective ; as, b lid rd 'sroiYiu^rd t* 
 •srifiipYifjLos clfiQgQti Homer renowned for hjs Poems, or, with 
 a repetition of the Article, thus; b optics, b hdrd TromfA^TcLrv 
 7rift<pnjjioe. That ? or the Homer renowned for his Poems, 
 This turn , however, though elegant , as it is bold , ought 
 to be used sparingly , since it has very little analogy with 
 the Idiom of the Language , as now spoken ; at any rate i s 
 far from being generally received , even if generally intel- 
 ligible. 
 
 4- It sometimes defines a number, as forming a part of 
 another number , expressed, or already known ; as , aV« 
 t« rzaaafOL aw ibex , ow* f/"x a > vxyi^olv to "iv<x f rd Ivo , rd r^ict % 
 of the four pears that J had , they have taken one , two , 
 three ; in like manner r« 'ixo^av to \vct y}qc t« Ifiyakav to "uct 
 pan ; they cut off one of his ( two ) hands, they pulled out 
 <pne of his (two) eyes. 
 
 5. We may , by ellipsis of the Words Sfco-crarw, ewxotfoc , 
 •say , b Spvfrne , h E'tpim , the Bishop of Smyrna , %h& 
 Archbishop of Ephesus.. 
 
 6. The Noun of Number \vslq y fxia , ?> ,one, is used as iui 
 indefinite Article , but less frequently than in other lan- 
 guages of the South of Europe. When opposed to £kkoc i% 
 assumes the article; as, b Ivolq dlwJ tqv oikkoy, the one injures 
 the other. 
 
 Ka3-wc likewise assumes the article, as tar? ax wci^d. j% 
 uAbc , give a Para to each, 
 
CHAPTER XXX. 
 
 1. The second Person Plural , in polite Phraseology ? 
 is used, as in our Language , when addressing a single Per- 
 son : M-rauTTcc ^v , ImtTB ;jm ^a>y.i , Papa, give me some bread, 
 
 2. The second Persons singular and Plural are , by a 
 singular anomaly, often found in almost immediate contact 
 with a nominative in ' the third Person ; as ? i tuyere/* axe 
 vthv^uQ on sl ayasra , you know Sir , that she loves you ' 7 
 m 'iz,o^brviQ vac $h vfc&i^vtt Ky.hd to wpayy.se , your Excellency is 
 not well informed of the matter. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXI 
 
 JfOUWS OF NUMBER. 
 
 t.To express a quantity, the cardinal numerals are ranged 
 in succession , from the highest to the lowest, without any 
 conjunction ; as , %ihiot * ox.TctKc<rioi , ukcvi rfwctfH krtyuarci , 
 one thousand, eight hundred, and twenty four Men. Dates 
 are expressed in the Neuter Gender, §• take the Article ; as ? 
 
 ci Ayaoyvoi tTrwoav ryv wohtv tic ra yiKia TtroayJovia wivvivTtx. cltto 
 3Cf/j-7K ; 't^acrav rh KopCW (j.) xa/ woKXtx. olkkol (p^oia ( x-acn^a ) 
 
 T?Q TllXOWtVlYKJ-V , t/f 7a XJKlOL OKTOLKOCriX UYXVl TflOt. Tile TUFKS 
 
 took Constantinople, in the year of our Lord One thousand, 
 four hundred and fifty three. They lost Corinth, and several 
 other Fortresses of the Morea, in 1823 ; x?' ona * s understood: 
 it is even sometimes expressed. 
 
 2. The Ordinal Numbers follow the same construction; 
 
 tlC TYV \XX70<JT>1V TCtOf/.C(TT:V T0LTV\V OhVUWldtx , 111 tllC 0116 111111- 
 
 dred and thirty third Olympiad. 
 
 3. To express many thousands , the substantive yi\Ac, 
 preceded by a cardinal number, is declined, and the Noun , 
 
 (i) Mons, r David lias here, rather unadvisedly, assumed the Charac- 
 ter of a Prophet , or retailer of Prophecies , predicting the fail af 
 Constantinople in 1821. I have altered the Phrase, 
 
T 
 
 whose quantity it determines , is put in the same case 3 
 €TjtoT«« So'o ^_/\/aoec wQfaarvs , he killed two thousand Men. 
 
 4. The idea of half is expressed in two Ways ; I.° f 
 by the adjective /ur-k , n, ov , half, following the 
 substantive , witji the intervening copulative kzi ; exa'0«ra 
 \to Ua^itn Sex* ^fc»w x«. J ///to, I resided , in Paris ten years 
 and a half; t$&yt Ivo arsfhitic nxi 'pipi , ( fjuvw ). He ate two 
 Partridges and a half; II.° , by the substantive X^ww, a half 
 immediately following the noun of number which it modi- 
 fies; t; I'putrv six and a half: When preceded by a cardinal 
 number terminating with a vowel, jiptav loses its first syllable, 
 and becomes enclitic ; See page 11. \zttol 'pi™ seven and a 
 half : it even forces the accent of paroxytona forward ; 
 thus, Ikoc united becomes Sexa 'juisv ; ten and a half; in 
 the same manner, hi 'yiro , one and a half; laltyti 'pm* , 
 twelve and a half; Tew-xfd \ut7v, four and a half; TiaffoL^ai'fjti(f¥ 
 fMfidi* four ducats and a half. 
 
 The feminine of the adjective yjahc is also enclitic after 
 pig.: yjci'uKTyi Zfa , an hour and a half, half past one o'clock, 
 
 5. The Words «ga and ijuif«, are generally omitted after 
 Cardinal Numbers; yjh(k ik'rw f/.rl 'uiav , he came at half past 
 one; fllku ivot^oomti «V t*Iq Ivo dzro to juim/jiift , he will set ou^ 
 at half past two ; tic roue Uk* tJ -srajwirw pwfc the tenth 
 of the present Month, ( yi^olic understood. ) 
 
 CHAPTER XXXII, 
 
 OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 i. The Pronoun Personal, when the Subject of the 
 Verb , is generally understood, as in the Ancient Language, 
 Latin , and Italian ; because the terminations of the Verb 
 are sufficiently varied to distinguish the persons, without 
 the pronoun ; thus QkItz-w , uc , u , I see , thou seest, he sees, 
 
 2. The pronoun , as the Subject of a Verb , is never 
 expressed, but for the sake of distinction or emphasis; as, 
 zyu X&r 10 Gc'aw kc&qm , I will by no means allow it, or have 
 
9' 2 
 i[ so. When however it is the Object of the verb, it is; and if 
 
 emphasis he aimed at, it is repeated; thus, jul <pj.fviTat, it 
 
 appears to me ; tuivz (j.\ o-xIvit-m oti 'Ufaxtc ; it appears tQ 
 
 me that you have erred. 
 
 3. The monosyllabic personal pronoun 9 when governed 
 directly or indirectly, unless the governing Verb be m 
 the imperative Mood, precedes it ; y.l dyoi^x , he loves me ; 
 px lilu % he gives me; Imp.e ayaVa^e, love me; ISqe p* , 
 
 give me. 
 
 If , of two personal pronouns , in the same Phrase ? 
 the one be directly, and the other indirectly governed, 
 the latter precedes ; thus, yx to 'law , he gave me ; r» to V«, 
 (' iTTra ) I told it him • Imp.e laei t» to % give it him; «Ve 7* io 9 
 tell it Jiim. 
 
 The Vulgar, however, very often neglect this rule ; and 
 \t is not unusual to hear the following, and similar Phrases; 
 ilia -rev , I have seen him , instead of toy tllx. 
 
 4. With Compound Tenses, these Pronouns are placed , 
 always in the above order , between the auxiliary and the 
 Verb ; thus , Osaw toy ilu , I shall see him , I will see him ; 
 Ga rov avTctpMit , He will meet him ; n§iht rh tv^u , He 
 would find him ; 6a r$ 70 lu'^u , I w r ill shew it him ; 
 ( to him ) 9* t« to 'ttco ( t/Vw ) I will tell it him , I shall 
 tell it him. 
 
 The Reader has already seen that, when these pronouns 
 follow the Verb, they become enclitics; and that on th§ 
 contrary , when they precede it, they preserve their accent. 
 The idiom of the language inclines strongly to the use of 
 these monosyllabic pronouns after other Words , as after 
 certain adverbs ; See Chap. r XLV , 1 , 2 , 4* 5 , and after 
 some pronouns and adjectives; as, oujtcc //« (1), myself; aprigay^ 
 thyself ; oLvrbg r* himself , pivot pv , I alone 8$c* 
 
 5. It has been observed, Ghap. r XVI , N, I. , that the 
 Modern Greek has, properly speaking , no possessive pro* 
 
 (j) The Vulvar drop the y and say &tos[i>ou, feo'fg'w, «to'$ «y* 
 
9 J 
 
 ftoun, tut substitutes the genitive case of personal pronouns, 
 following the noun, as an enclitic; thus, b <pihoc (< x« •; my 
 friend ; hxs <f>fxoc pu , or hctt { aw <pthog , one of my friends i 
 or a friend of mine. 
 
 tllcL TOY OlKOY (AM $ 0% , lN , F. T>7C Sing. 
 
 #«£ a-sff, ru)f, or Tyc M. F. N. Plun 
 
 I have seen my i thy , his , her , its , Friend Sing, 
 
 our your their Plur. 
 
 6. If accompanied by an adjective , the pronoun may 
 preserve its place after the substantive , but its more ele- 
 gant arrangement is between the adjective and substantive ; 
 thus , e/^a rov X.XK0Y (pfkoY fjM^ more elegantly , mot tor tl^koy (fo 
 fchov, I have seen my good Friend. 
 
 7. The Personal Pronoun , thus constructed is , by 
 pleonasm , put after certain substantives- including the idea 
 of exclusive property in the subject , as of the hands, the feet; 
 the eyes of a Man ; thus, ry I'yto^dv ra xh fy - Ty i r * ffolvfi* ™ * 
 they cut off his hands , his feet. The continually recurring 
 habit of 'employing this' genitive has doubtless originated the 
 pleonasm. The use of this pronoun as an enclitic is, 
 Consequently , very frequent, which, to obviate the neces- 
 sity of recapitulation , the Reader is requested to bear in 
 Mind. A new example of it will occur in the ensuing 
 Chapter. 
 
 8. By means of a demonstrative Pronoun preceding the 
 substantive , the Greek reaches the following energetic 
 Phrase in old French ; J'ai trouve hiet ce mien bon ami, 
 nearly as energetically expressed in good Modern English, 
 I yesterday met with this my good Friend wgat. e^Gec t^tov 
 toy kqlk'oy (am (pi'hov. We often add <rc old », expressive not of 
 age , but of length and cordiality" of intimacy ; and the 
 Phrase is , then , I think , more energetic than either 
 Modern Greek , or old French. 
 
 9. Some Authors use the Genitive of the personal Pronoun 
 of the third Person , without elision of the incipient syl- 
 lable , and say, and, more particularly, write, mat for <pfhw 
 kvtQ' to? f/Aor Kbrur r I have seen his , their , Friend* 
 
t)4 . 
 
 10. The Compound Personal Pronoun ry x'oyv fix , «, tj, 
 follows the construction of the Simple iyeo , au , awroc hit'; 
 it is more polite : Thus, instead of saying, Uii Ih tq» 
 yvoft'lw ***« i thou dost riot thyself know him well , it is 
 usual in courtesy to say; r« Koy* o-« ^c tw yropi{ttc hxkoc. , or , 
 in the plural ; 7* hoy* car l\ v 7 cv yvofifyri xolkm , you donfc 
 yourself <Bfc. Thus also , speaking of a person present, in 
 the third person , tQ toyy ts roc e/W E^0e< , M. r ....... 
 
 ( this Gentleman ) saw him yesterday, considered much 
 inore polite than avror rh ult. 
 
 ii. When this Compound Pronoun follows a preposi- 
 tion , it drops the Article; rnyau'tp.' M Kcyv <rx , I am going 
 to your House; 6fX*P M ^ K h* ay » I come from your House, 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIII. 
 
 OF THE RELATIVE POSSESSIVE PRONOUN. 
 
 i. In the Relative Possessive Pronoun b iWc px , mine, 
 the Adjective gc/xoc expresses the idea of possession , as 
 observed in Chapter XVI, while its relative force is con- 
 fined to the Article, which , as the substitute , refers to 
 the preceding Substantive ; thus , in the following Phrase, 
 va. to fii£hjov (ax , Kott vd. to tlizov cr« here is my Book , and 
 there is thine , or yours , the second to is elliptic , and. 
 refers to the Substantive #/£a/m , in the preceding member 
 of tlie sentence ; so that , to render the Phrase complete , 
 it would be necessary to say , vd to Q&hiov px , v.a.\ v r l to 
 
 loiy/ov ax fii£hfsv\ 
 
 i. When this adjective tlixlr is not preceded by the 
 Article, it indicates possession irrelatively : thus avro to 
 CifijJov thai eliKov (ax , this book is mine , ( belongs to me ) 
 thai tlmbv vv 'olvto to apoh'oyiov ; Is this your Watch ? 
 
 3. The Adjective llmls, preceded by the Article and fol- 
 lowed by its substantive , serves only to increase the force 
 of the Phrase , without having any character of a relative ; 
 thus, r$ 70 iimov px Gifihj9r t « there is my Book», is more em- 
 
J... J .. 9 5 
 
 jmatic thari>u to $fi\i\v {x\t % there is my book. If still greater 1 
 emphasis be desired the adjective may be placed after the 
 Substantive , vd to Q&k'iov to ilu'st pM. 
 
 This adjective is often used emphatically in the sense 
 of our word own ; thus , tTrfdoh d-rh rx ttj.iIiJ. tm , more- 
 emphatically dvrb rd Qnttt'tv nail id , and still more emphaticaU 
 ly , *Vo rd iltKZTv tgl Trail* , he was betrayed hj his own 
 Children. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIV.- 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOTJNS. 
 
 i. The three Demonstrative Pronouns-, avrk, >v ?, rvror and 
 huvcc always require that the article should be prefixed to 
 the indicated Noun: thus xitoi- b iytfotc , tvtoc b %v%m$ , this 
 Man; o.vt;> n yvrkiKa , this Woman ; hilvo^ b avl?ar , that Man, 
 Minn v\ yvvxTfL* that Woman, the article is indispensable , as 
 the pronoun alone would not adequately express the indication. 
 
 For greater elegance the pronoun is often placed after tl*e 
 noun ; o xvt^otQ hlvt'qc , b dvbf%<; imvoq. 
 
 '2. \uto4 and mums are often substituted for Personal 
 Pronouns of the 3. d Person. They in that case have no 
 Article following them, but are succeeded by a Verb refer- 
 ring to the subject they , as personal Pronouns , represent: 
 av-roc faQi t he is come; hilros ult rh dliKtpw pas , he has seen 
 our Brother. 
 
 Chapter xxxv. 
 
 OE THE PRONOUN RELATIVE. 
 
 i,. The Pronoun Relative , b facToc answers to our Rela- 
 tives who, which, and that; vZw'fa rh yvvxiKx tw otoiolv hiyuc, 
 I know the Woman of whom you speak; ifitc rh avfyuTrdv , 
 b b-TTohc upikwi pi ipirx i did v you see the Man who spoksr 
 to me ? 
 
 o'ffTts is confined to the more sustained style of writing i 
 
§B „ ,. ,, ..... , 
 
 yvcof/frc roy crvfyurov cVr/c hkQi ij$k ; Ho you know the jViftli 
 who ( that ) came yesterday ? 
 
 oVJ , indeclinable, and agreeing with all persons and 
 genders, in both numbers , is of very frequent use , as a 
 Relative, particularly by the Vulgar^ and, in the colloquial 
 style : &.1 ywalKtc o-nv itla, , the Women whom I saw. 
 
 2. In speaking j the first syllable is often dropped : t# 
 %a.fTi 'n* uv 'Swxtf, the paper you gave me ( or that, or which 
 you gave me. ) 
 
 3. Some Writers place the antecedent after the rela-^ 
 live in the same Member of a sentence, thus; n'&u'fa rh mm 
 Af'yt/c v-ytiow&ov , I know the Man of whom you speak, or of 
 what man you speak. The indeclinable particle o«r» cannot 
 be thus used ; and indeed the construction is , by many 
 Writers, thought to have two little analogy with the Mo-' 
 dern Idiom , and to savour too much of Pedantry to be 
 imitated. 
 
 4. The Modern Greek has several correlative adjectives \ 
 
 Such as togoc , a<T0Q ; tomtos , ottoIgc \ l X il to<tw tu^yw 01m kxi 
 
 h dlixcpos t« he is as fortunate as his Brother ; itreu ytotl dao/u'4 
 rot* roc fooler rer ula. he is still just such as ( just what ) 
 I saw him. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVI. 
 
 OF THE REFLECTIVE ^KCJyoOT; 
 
 i. The Reflective Pronoun is substituted for the simple 
 Personal Pronoun, whenever the verb governing it expresses 
 the action of the subject upon itself: thus , dyxyr£ to/ 
 iavTbv rv , he loves himself, and in the feminine, aysta-a top 
 iavTov rm , she loves herself, yrdffi rh \avzbv o-y, know thy- 
 self; and with prepositions ; p^r^ere lid toy txuiov <mc, think 
 of yourself ; yy.ils oh iywvviSvifJLiv £/? roy ncxrfior hoc rov tuuTov juoc^. 
 We were not sent into the World ( born ) for ourselves 
 alone, The simple monosyllabic Pronoun would in all the 
 above Phrases be a solecism ; and it would be improper 
 to say ? yvd^ o-i , ffonifyi lid 7t, The polysyllabic Pronoun 
 
Is not, under similar circumstances, more Correct^ accord- 
 ing to grammatical analogy ; but , as it gives a better 
 close to the Phrase than the monosyllabic, it is admissible^ 
 as a substitute for the Reflective Pronoun ; and one may 
 say indifferently Ih kyivrvt^n^tY W toy Icwtgv juki^ or Izr ty&vYi* 
 Qw f uiv hoc wy.at;. 
 
 2. The Compound Personal Pronoun, t« hoy* <jx , without 
 Article, may, after Prepositions, be substituted for the Re- 
 flective Pronoun : (p^ovTilt lid toy* cm, llv tyirvviS-vifjLtv S/a h'oyv jxr*c, 
 re U^rxKcifjx d-rro \oyx /am , think of yourself ; we were not 
 born for ourselves ; I , of myself, understood it, 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVIL 
 
 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS; 
 
 i. The Interrogative Pronouns rf; , ot-o?cc , are construct- 
 ed as in English: r/£ HhSi ; Who is come ? trpm ry to utrt ; 
 Who told ( it ) him ; vroToc uvm olvtog j Who is he? we/a ttvu 
 ( irota, vii ) av-fr, ; Who is she? tzoioc, 'acr 'avTXt; for fe/oe ; Whicii 
 of them saw him ? luie px to $&kiov , give me the Book ; 
 
 'artnov ; which ? ( Book. ) 
 
 2. These Pronouns are also used as Relatives : P~y f&wf& 
 - fi yM tier i , I know not what he told ( said to ) me • ^1 
 ' iftorwi Kro7oi; |a,'0£ , he asked who was come; ^wftig Grb<?ca; x i ~ 
 
 \idhi; (t) %blwri) Do you know how many thousands ( pias^ 
 tres ) he has spent? 
 
 3, The Interrogative Particles ttuc , wt ; ttQ f §*c. , 
 follow the same construction : $$fo& wwc to :«^, I know 
 how he did it , lh (am uzsav won ni®i , they did not tell 
 me when he came ; M$$*i &* iTrwyt , they know ( or it is 
 known ) where he is gone. 
 
 (i) Just as we omit pounds, because the nominal coin inwhicli 
 we make up our Accounts. Piastres , as pounds , are always under^ 
 stood, unless, from what lias preceded, reference to other coins bfe 
 distinctly deducible, 
 
 7 
 
# : > ■ ■ ... 
 
 jk The neuter ri , used either in exclamation, or inter- 
 rogatively , is constructed with Nouns in all Genders- 
 Numbers and Cases : fi civd^a-rec t?r*t avroc ; What Man i* 
 this? ri yvvajxoc wott avrr,; What Woman is- this? ri met tlmtv 
 What is the hour ? In exclamation ri ojou'* yvvajxa 1 What 
 a beautiful Woman ! ri **poff$ «ra$;a ! What beautiful 
 Children! ri xcS&fo np\ What pure water! 
 
 Instead of *r&>c ,- and ri , ( except ri in exclamation ) 
 the Vulgar* use ri hoyn; how ? in what manner,- of what 
 kind ? ri ho-ynq rb 'Uapi , how did he do it ? ( or make W. ) 
 ipctQoi ri hoyvc rb txoiy.i , I have learnt ( found out ) how 
 he did it; ri AoySJc hfy-tfsroc. thou uvrb$. What Man or What 
 kind of Man is this? £Jp ■ r/ hoy»s urui auroc o atllfaicrftcj 
 I know what Kind of ( the ) Man he is. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXVIII. 
 
 OF IKDE1P1KITI rHONOUIT$; 
 
 i. Of these ttink is more in use than t?c ' it has ge^ 
 aurally a negative sense. It, in fact, answers to our o/?^, 
 body , person ; for if negatively used, to be correct, a 
 negative must be added, as we add no y thus; lb rb JR;t»$u 
 
 'x«Wc , no one ^ no person knows it It is sometimes- used 
 affirmatively, thW; rev tilt xaVt/V , somebody saw him; 
 
 : a'iicT sometimes interrogatively : n\9e **&/? ; Is any one 
 come ? It is also used with the Imperative Mood, thus : 
 «c rlv gjoLftn Kxni< let, some one take ( hold of ) lum ; 
 St hy,v rbv vicLGvi x<xni<:, let nobody take ( hold of ) him:' 
 
 2. The Neuter riperi is of very frequent occurrence, 
 as an Interrogative , with, and without negation; thus , 
 %yi& riiroTi; ( wxpov tfafe ) Have you any thing ( to say to 
 irie )? may be answered, according to circumstances , af-* 
 firmatively , fya , - m) - juuuvtol ; negatively , oer ty^ - eg - 
 rtzroTt. In like manner it is very usual to say, lh Qiko r/if^Ve, 
 I do not want { wish for ) any thing 1 Ih tltat rfcon \ I did 
 not see anv thing; 
 
3, K*p*Wt , ?7 , 6f expresses the idea of an indetermi- 
 nate quantity : £\0aK nap-mot ar^azcroi , a considerable num- 
 Ver of ( a great many ) Men came ; %wa£t , zal £#&* 
 xxy-'oicv's 7rct.$xlic , (1) he played , and lost a good deal of 
 Money) xap7ro9ov rr^oc a considerable number. 
 
 (iVowc , fl-Tflice , oVeW, answers to our whosoever, whoever : 
 it requires the indicative Mood, when referring to tints- 
 pasty Mm Tsu^iv, tvQaM* whoever said it was mistaken: 
 it may be constructed with the indicative , or subjunctive, 
 vrhen referring to time present? oiritoc to hiyit, or kiy$ itpdwu, 
 whoever says so is in error: but invariably with the Sub- 
 junctive , when referring to the future : o&bnc rb e/V* , 
 Uku 70 ptfxmuto, Whoever may say it will repent , 
 shall repent it. 
 
 4- Sometimes , to give a still nlore indefinite turn t6 
 the expression , tile particles m\ aV are subjoined : ototoc 
 nyi .civ to iiTrvi, 3-a to pirdramy whosoever may assert it 
 shall repent it. 
 
 In the more sustained style, writers use cVr/c ; for* K<xi 
 m *m > whoever he may be; %§*§ )t*i av to §*#* , whoever 
 may say so, $$c; o,ti k&} av 6§f t , <m ly^u %tH.aiov , whatever 
 he may have said, he is not right. 
 
 5. These pronouns may be governed by the Verb : 
 Vctft sTToiev 6«kj;c , take which you please, will, wish (may 
 wish )\ >i<xut o,TititKn . c,ti xai a* Ujyc , do whatever you 
 like : they sometimes , to increase emphasis , are placed 
 at. the opening of the Phrase : o,ti QImic , **£* , do just 
 whatever you please. 
 
 CHAPTER XXXIX. 
 
 OF THE OBLIQUE GASES. 
 
 FIRST PART. 
 
 OF THE GENITIVE. 
 
 i. The Genitive after a Noun Substantive in Modern 
 Greek, as in other Languages , indicates possession : ym 
 
 (1) jJXaf'ecltti i n *&« plural, is used as our generic Term Monet. 
 
3pO ? 
 T«.$;?yV i& i my friend's Son;o AvroitfaTQf tyic V'a<rdJ.cic, Tfte 
 Emperor of Russia , See Chap/ XXXII , 5. 
 
 2. It is used in speaking of age : Tfim x?' omv *■*&£■ 
 an infant three years old , or of age ir'ooav x( ovwv &?**}. 
 how old are you? uno^i n$iw, twenty three. ( x?' ovur under- 
 stood ) These and similar Phrases, are elliptical in most, 
 if not all, languages, 
 
 3. It is also- employed to fix a point of future time; 
 &xcj uVjxkS^Ow tvis xx^TTfm, I shall marry , or be married 
 at Easter j and, in the same manner, rQ %$'<»* means the 
 ensuing year. 
 
 4- It supplies the place of the dative , which exists 
 only in a few Hellenic phrases : lw<?< ps ^vpi , give me 
 some bread ; lumn eVa Trzpx tk cr^aC* r~ xo&jfitpys , give a 
 para to the poor blind man ; t» xiyo , I tell kirn. 
 
 SECOND PART, 
 
 OF THE ACCUSATIVE, 
 
 1'. The Accusative , with the preposition tk , is also* 
 iised to supply the want of the dative case : rSya tic 7oy 
 (pttcv {ax , J say to ?ny friend ; and without a preposition , 
 i/Va toy Twfyiov vd tk$v y I told George to coine. 
 
 We may therefore indifferently use the genitive , or 
 accusative, and say juv cWt , or pi e'Stoxe., he gave me • p.* 
 
 (pain-Tar, or ^\ yxivirai, if appears tO me > 7» Xiyco Or rev Atyu > 
 
 / tell him. The accusative appears to he very generally pre- 
 ferred, and indeed, m the plural, it is in exclusive use; thus it 
 would he a violation of the idiom of the Modern language, 
 as spoken, to say &£t sStoJ, I gave them, lucri %v, give 
 them , instead or 7«c $tfftl , S«« t^c. The genitive plural 
 of the second person does not exist in the Language ; 
 and that of the first , being a dissyllable, cannot precede 
 the verb; the accusative, therefore, of both is of necessity. r 
 the only case plural that can he employed: pas thi , car 
 uttv, he told us y he to id you y It has been observed, in 
 
10 1 
 
 die declension of Pronouns, that the accusative plural of 
 the Pronoun p ersonal of the third person , r«c , joined to 
 substantives, as an enclitic, expresses, as well as the ge- 
 nitive , the ide a of possession : thus , we may say, indif- 
 ferently , h vraLTi you; ruv, or h Trxrlqar, t*c , their Father: -the 
 genitive may be more elegant and correct perhaps , but is 
 by no means in general use, at least in conversation. 
 
 2. Some Verbs active govern two Accusatives , one 
 directly, of the Thing , and the other indirectly, of the 
 Pei son\ liloioyiG) to 7ra.ihi to. yfiLfAfjLCLToi. , I teach the Child to 
 read; tov 'ivlwi xuKprdn . He put him on ( on him ) a caftan. 
 
 3. It sometimes marks a particular part : ( the prepo- 
 sition Kciitti in, with respect to, as to, being understood,) 
 x'Iti thai icUkivx rd (aoltmx. <r*c ; Why ( how ) are your eyes 
 so red ? tovu tcl, they pain me, i. e. I have pain in them, 
 
 ( KXTX rot fJLXT 101. J , 
 
 4. The Accusative case expresses the circumstances of 
 time , measure, distance, &;c. , by the elhpsis of kxto. : 
 rhv ilvKivirx Ydlx Xf^" y f- 1 served him ten years; «*0e ro CpoSv, 
 he came in the evening; t^uc Qtt'fttfc tw liW^ia, three 
 
 times a Week; rh o-u^ov , to day; nui^xv understood: aviro 
 To X^V ov *' votl powfUoi <X7r zlu liKx {sJhhia this village is ten 
 miles hence ; t^p.afh to y}vot, a German born, or by birth; 
 ■iroaov iTvai jwxxfVTifos W ainhv ; how much are you taller than 
 he? fxiar o-ttSx^w , a palm : thus also, by ellipse of the 
 preposition tk or kxtx\ the accusative may, like the genitive, 
 -mark a point of future time ; &'mj fate toimiffi rm <xkkv/ 
 xvftotKYiY , I will come and see ( visit ) you next Sunday : 
 by ellipse of the proposition hoi , it marks the price of 
 of a thing ; iTtaKvfrk to a'xoy'ov /wd tnico&ta ypoaix , I have 
 sold my Horse for two hucdred Piastres ; rb ny'o^a. x' Kl0L 
 •yyoatx; I bought it for a thousand piastres. 
 
 5. It signifies the mode of action : itiiy±im yixho , ytx\h , 
 I coast it , I go along shore ; n ,x (xdlox kojSuol 7rYiydtv*r 
 yav'ici , yovix. Small Eoats go , sail, make from, point to, 
 point: of similar import are Sva', Ikjc , one by one, lvo t 'ly$ 9 
 two and two, by twos ? or in pairs. 
 
loo. 
 
 6. It also indicates the matter ; ytudrs nfi , iail »j 
 Water j rr^Kfcv \J/a'0aic covered with matting; fud *«*« «e?^ 
 a cup of Water ; w« 5 tu 7 a V vtr^hfivm. ? xaVT^a/c , a pair o| 
 -?hoes, stockings ; £?a xoWSi ?ra/W a troop of children. 
 
 7. It is also used to. signify an arithmetical proportion ; 
 sxiflwu. It** tx iKciTQv , 1 gained ten per cent. 
 
 8. Adjectives of the three degrees of comparison , in 
 the accusative plural, are often employed , without pre- 
 position, adverbially: SMtf «fy*> you are come late, ikx/si; 
 xcthd , xaxa , aor^w^ot , y\w>«f a , ttokkx , you did well , ill , 
 unbecomingly , quickly, much; also with the preposition 
 *cct* : iT^ki Kara 7T0A\a iup^afu/lr.fKfof , lam exceedingly pleased 
 5«Ca'^£/c KrtA^r&fa , ^j/portfa , gxcxaa/ttjc , you read better , 
 worse , exceedingly well j fyu*.t& kclkkicto. 7 you speak &d^ 
 mirably. 
 
 CHAPTER XL. 
 
 OP COMPARATIVES AND SUPERLATIVES, 
 
 i. When the Comparative is followed by a substantive, 
 the latter is put in the accusative case, with the preposi- 
 tK>n , aTo > or 7rapa : vVtaju-Mi-et. thai /utyoikriTi^ct cltto , or tt:/-j>~ 
 -7.-^ rcv;w/a>', Germany is larger than France. 
 
 St. Relatives, and Adverbs are also put in the same case, 
 with either of the above prepositions , though va^i is. most 
 usual; zvroc uvcu frKvaw-nfoG Trap o,xt cToxa{iat)t , he is richer 
 than you suppose: ty.c/.h yrtyivMoltPx ttx^ cax sXho-juuots , he has 
 lecLrnt more than he has forgotten. Sometimes the relative 
 is suppressed , and ? in that case , wxod becomes a°compara- 
 tive conjunction , like than in the English , equivalent to 
 « than those things which » '^uah Trt^&oxtfa 7r.<Zf<i tx^Kfrwrs ; 
 but, to admit of this, the Subject of the two verbs must 
 be the same : thus won flTpmiriftt vafd «■•«-#*?**& > vvould 
 not be Greek : it , indispensably , must be. ?**. or, 
 
 5. The Verb, when the same, is, in comparative Phrsses, 
 suppressed in the second member of the sentence : ^^px 
 tfyil'ftt rrtfinrinfBt rru? i%Wc f he knows more to day than yes* 
 
$03 
 £erduv, instead of ttolj oaoe. vi£tv$iv tyfiU' up&i <p?Qvi ( uu7iicc %&$% 
 impx* , 1 am more prudent than formerly , i. e. &%$ 9jrj 
 
 \y\(AMy 7rfo»TCt. 
 
 4. The positive , with the adverb nuay , more, is often 
 .substituted for the comparative : b ahx^k <rv lAfci ara^S»v Pfiu- 
 ^wcf «cre erg , («Vecri>a ) your Brother is more prudent than 
 you. 
 
 5. It has been already remarked Page 3i ,, N. 6, that 
 the adjective in the superlative degree is used absolutely, 
 Relative superiority is expressed by the comparative , 
 preceded by the Article: oA'^/w^f htw h dvlfuolifoc &u ?*s 
 JF^AA/iKac , Achilles was the bravest of the Greeks ; The 
 Vulgar sometimes add the adverb mkn to the comparative , 
 just as the lower clashes in England often add more ;■ 
 
 n Tthiov c/AOotpoTifn yvyyjyix azsr ohcit; , tjie most beautiful ( the 
 
 prettiest ) Woman of the whole. 
 
 6. The personal Pronoun is sometimes put in the Ge- 
 nitive Case, after the Comparative : yyaftfy tIv nxKKviTtfQv <nr 
 ( learn to ) know thy better ; avrh( thou piy*KviTifk p* , he 
 is older than I : this construction is confined to the en- 
 clitic personal pronoun. When the pronoun, not being a 
 monosyllable, cannot become enclitic, it must be construct- 
 ed in the usual manner, with the preposition Trapu, or i%\ f 
 
 CHAPTER XLL 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 pF THE VOICES, 
 
 I. The Active presents nothing requiring particular 
 Notice ; but the Passive has many peculiar applications 
 demanding the Reader's attention. (1) 
 
 1. The passive Voice. 
 
 (1) There is one rare use of the Active , that requires distinct 
 notice , or the III. d Rule for the Peculiar use of the Passive Voice 
 pight mislead 5 particularly without the restriction , I hare added , 
 /( lii -a very few instances. » The Phrases there instanced , falj. ratjiey 
 
104 
 
 L°" Is used in a Reflective Sense, i. e. the action is upon. 
 the Agent : fyivn/im , I dress ( myself ,) or am dressing \ 
 ivfi(*jfAto , I am shaving. ( myself ) Very generally the 
 reflective pronoun is used , when reflective action is in-, 
 tended thus , ayazra toy ixvrov r* , he loves himself. When 
 however the action is upon the Agent's person , the Pas-. 
 sive is always preferred; ivlwopou , I am dressing ; xy'^a/ , 
 I bathe ; vrKunpaLi , I am washing ( myself ) xtw%q{jlou y 
 I am combing myself , 8$e. 
 
 The Passive Voice in a reflective sense sometimes go-, 
 verns the Accusative case: vraurdhti^o/jioJ nm, I jostle, brush 
 
 against Some one 5 aw 'arot.yyQ VOL GraaoLKliGtvai rb ; c a\6^cJsr¥c , 
 
 ttsrulvi ihai (ntoohha. , do-nt go jostling, or brushing against 
 people , for the plague is about. 
 
 II. ° It very naturally passes from a reflective to a 
 reciprocal sense : thus dyKcckixtypiba , we embrace each 
 other , we mutually embrace ; UfvbjuikQz , we beat each, 
 other; aVra^cKo/ztOa, we meet , ( each other ) 8cc. 
 
 III.° It is used also, in a very few instances, to express, 
 what we get done for ourselves by the agency of another % 
 as in the following formula of the Greek Marriage Cere- 
 mony , when the Priest places the nuptial crown on the 
 heads of the espoused , b Ivkoc t« &« M/^aw\ vri^caonm r/,v 
 S»aw t« Gt« (dtolufuv, the Servant of God Michael weds 
 ( takes as his wedded Wife ) the Servant of God Theodora : 
 here vrupwonrou properly means that , by the instruments 
 ality of the Priest, Michael places this crown, the symbol 
 of their nuptial union , on the head of Theodora ; and 
 that , thus , he makes her his Wife. Thus also , in com-. 
 
 under the Character of exceptions than examples of a General Rule , 
 and ought to be accounted Idioms ( Idiotisms ). The Active Voice i$ 
 sometimes used, as we use it, in such Phrases as the following, where 
 ethers are employed to act for us ; I am building a House , K-n'Cu 
 eva girini ; I am sowing my Lands, erwiipq ra xctpafia f*o« ; J am planting 
 a Vineyard, cpu-reuw a^weXt ; and also in some very few instances whe?$ 
 ^edo not, as, I hare ordered a Goat, <bt«cv» i'vee o^%- 
 
103 
 
 mon Conversation , h rdlt ivTup&vdfjwi rh rxh suck a one 
 has married such a one, i. e. literally , has crowned, 
 her , or caused her to be crowned for himself ; and again 
 rh i^phij-^ has divorced her , has , by means of the com- 
 petent Authority , separated her from himself : the sense 
 being active regulates the government accordingly. 
 
 IV. Sometimes, though purely passive , i. e. in sense 
 as well as form, it governs the accusative ; b Ax^Tos iv-nffl* 
 
 Toy Qf'ovov , Kcti rh \tofo ctzro Ttt; iliKvc rx V7Tkk'o^C DariUS Was de* 
 
 prived of ( his ) throne and life by his own Subjects. 
 CHAPTER XLII, 
 
 OF THE TENSES. 
 
 -I.I have thought it more advantageous to the Reader, 
 in the English Text , and in the short notes severally at* 
 tached to the different Tenses , in the conjugation of yfa'pw % 
 to do as much as possible towards exhibiting their force , 
 instead of reserving the matter for detached explanation 
 Jiere. See particularly Pages 47 , 4 8 ] 5o , 56, Text and 
 Notes. I have not been so sillily pedantic as to think it 
 either right, or feasible, to change the Nomenclature of the 
 Tenses, though I have affixed to the immemorially received 
 Names, second Names or Definitions indicating their force. 
 Men who have already mastered the difficulties of reconci* 
 ling Names , however inappropriate, to the objects named, 
 feel habit of too much value, in aid of Memory, to give it up, 
 without a struggle. To young people , however , the habit 
 of qualifying the first Names, by always repeating witlj. them 
 the second , could not, I think, but be useful. Little re^ 
 mains to be said here ; but as examples are of great force 
 in illustration, and I have given but few in the conjugation, 
 J shall here subjoin those given by Mons. r David , on the 
 distinction to be made, in expressing continued, replicative, 
 or habitual action, passion, or state of being, and in express* 
 ing their single occurrence. 
 
io6 
 
 a. If I advise a person to practise writing, for the purpose 
 p? acquiring a good hand , I say y? d<pi hd yd pafy wh& t , 
 which means write often , repeat the act of writing , till 
 you have learnt to write well. If I request a person to 
 write a letter to one of his friends , I say y?d^ t* 9/** <™ , 
 and mean , that he should write once, and not repeatedly. 
 Should I say?fa'<P£ 7 « ?>/*« ™ , the meaning of my Phrase 
 •would be, continue to write to, keep up a Correspondence 
 with your Friend. In the same manner , in the subjunctive 
 Mood: 'crfiGru yd y?ct$rr liu V u aa'0>;c Kxhet you must write ( con- 
 tinually, frequently ) fo learn to write well; t^tth v* y?s^w th 
 9*\w 0* 7 you must write ( a letter ) to your Friend. If being 
 hungry, or thirsty, I ask a person for something to eat or 
 drink,! sstyiovi .ut m ttw, x.*\ yd <pdyu (1), give me ( something) 
 io eat and to drink ( now , this once. J But, if I speak of a 
 permanent obligation to furnish my food, the proper mod* 
 of expression is, 5/S« ,«t vd v(tu *au yd r^dyu, give (^continue to 
 give ) me my necessary supply of food. 
 
 3. This distinction must regulate our use of the un- 
 conjugated , as well as the conjugated part of the princi- 
 pal Verb, in forming the future, and conditional Tenses, 
 as I have already shewn , Page 56, at the end of the 
 Passive Voice of T^d<pu. Thus few ry yqd^u , or Ox r« yfd 5 
 <f.« » I shall, I will write him ( once ) a letter ; 8fju» f£ 
 ytftpei or Sa r» y^asw , I shall , I will keep iip a Corres- 
 pondence with him. 
 
 (1) These latter examples require a caution, or the)'" might perplex 
 the subject they are intended to illustrate. The reader must bear in 
 mind that s^w is not a present Tense , but part of one defective 
 Verb , Tisecl a . the Aorist of another defective Verb. They are , with 
 this caution ? being expressions of the most familiar use , the best 
 possible illustrations ; as they shew this admirable accuracy to be 
 an intrinsic character of the Modern Greek. No Goody Herbseiier , 
 cither in A-thens , or in any other corner of Greece , but would 
 detect a Foreigner , by the confusion of these Terms ,' and smile at 
 %% , as a most barbarous solecism. 
 
4- In speaking of Bodily sensations , particularly if of 
 any duration , the Aorist is often used where we use the 
 present: i'k'f&ck«', I am cold; ivvvTuZx , I am sleepy; \7nhauru. , 
 I km hungry; ( i.e. sleep , cold, hunger liave seized me.) 
 
 5. The Participle, past in composition with the auxiliary 
 V^w, forms also a kind of indefinite past, and of pluperfect , 
 applicable only in speaking of a thing present , or present 
 at the time spoken of: cry* 'ffffror xvtol id crerorja ; tcc t%v> 
 lictxiyjuiycL , do you like these me|ons , I chose them my- 
 self; h\Qi HOLt /ul JlfGrotZt TOL TTlTTOYlcL JU\f , T« IfTOia. TO. t/'^Ot %lCLKty 
 
 uha., he came and took from me my Melons, that I had 
 myself selected ; ivh^aaat ri ilHv h hlotMBLKoz ; do you re- 
 member what the Tutor said? to lyu y?«w*w > I nav ® 
 written it down , I have it written, or in writing. Some- 
 times instead of this participle , the neuter plural of a 
 Verbal adjective , having the force of an adverb, ( see 
 Page 102, N.° 8,) is substituted for the participle ; thus, 
 «v7oc ffycHTTvpufrie *%p avoiKTa. , This Tradesman ( shop- 
 keeper ) is open, that is, has his shop opened; ( r* 
 tfycujTrifi afayjulm ) t%ii (KpaKitna is shut ) rev lya <z**vtk % 
 I have heard of him , heard speak of him , heard his name. 
 
 6. A conditional Phrase is in Modern Greek always 
 constructed with the Imperfect Indicative: av e?x* wapc&ec , 
 Mihcc rxr lei™ tic t«V TTT^vf, (1) (/"/had Money I should 
 gwe it to the poor , or z/Vhad had Money I should have 
 'given it to the poor. See page 56. 
 
 7- For greater brevity , the Imperfect is sometimes used 
 
 (1) The above Phrase might be translated u if I were possessed of ;» 
 and then , both hypothesis or antecedent, and consequence would 
 Nearly appear to be in the subjunctive Mood : again, ft though I had 
 teen possessed , or should have been possessed of the riches of 
 Croesus, I vqould not have given him a Para, jnust in Modern Greek 
 ■he translated, Kal lv ic/a focus red; ^ctpewhs to3 Kpbia/v, $h rQiiVrzy 
 
io8 
 
 in both members of the above conditional Phrase: h u%$ 
 
 Trotyl-jit; , ry^ Wihct f/f t»V Trruyyi;. 
 
 8. The simple Tenses of the Indicative Mood Active ? 
 preceded by the Auxiliary Particles, 3-e vl or 9a, express con- 
 jecture: Autoc o yt'of QjJUKii (jvxj/a. y.l iKyvw rm xo7rthKav , Gs ca r>;V 
 dyoLTrl That youth is frequently talking with that Girl, 
 he must be enamoured of her \ rh ulic Shippim , Ge ?* 
 s^aGfc tok Qdvxlov 7« <p/A« tk ., you saw that he was distressed ? 
 he must have heard of ( learnt ) the death of his friend. 
 
 However superior the Modern Greek Verb is to ours, and, 
 I believe, to that of all other languages of Europe in the 
 expression of continued action , under every modification , 
 the great advantage of our unequivocal precision in 
 expressing Simple Futurity and necessary consequence , 
 appears strikingly in such Phrases, as the following , when 
 written , and destitute of the aid of emphasis ; o-nom ih urfk % 
 &'*« to /jLtTuioiMu. It may be guessed in this latter Phrase , 
 that a threat is intended ; and that therefore the proper 
 Translation is « whoever may say so shall repent it » 
 equivalent to, I am determined, that he shall repent it. 
 This is , however, by no means , necessary , or certain ; for , 
 if the speaker be not himself concerned , but merely pre r 
 dieting the consequence, it ought to be translated « he will » 
 See page 47. 
 
 9. The future tense Os'xe/isalso used to express conditionali- 
 ty, when referring to a future hvpothesis, *j'8exe when referring 
 to a past, as; edv }h ta-xutv, tifahtv ro ptrccioiu(rr,if he had done it 
 he would have repented it. This may be translated either , 
 whoever should assert it should repent - it , or would 
 re-pent it. The meanings are very different, though express- 
 ed in the same , and therefore in a very equivocal manner, 
 mall Languages of the South of Europe. The first transla- 
 tion,, ct should repent it » includes a threat, equivalent to 
 / would make him repent it. The second , « would repent 
 it » , expresses merely the prediction of a necessary conse- 
 quence , unconnected with any idea of the exercise of 
 volition, on the part of the speaker, or of compulsion towards 
 the Person spoken of. See Page 5o. 
 
CHAPTER XLIIL J ° 9 
 
 OF MODES. 
 FIRST PART. 
 
 What has been said on the Tenses embraces all that is 
 Mai."' T rGSpeCt t0 thC IndlCatiVG and Im Perati,e 
 
 ftF THE SUEJUSCTIVE. 
 
 i. Preceded by the particle St , instead of J it SUD . 
 plies the place of the Imperative Mood. n«>, l e us " P 
 Without, part.de ■ is the sole exception. ' S I 
 
 of a' ? P ' S als °" sed „ i " interrogation, as to the advice, or wish 
 
 In p i e ; s s ; £$r4ST£ ■** s* «***- - ■. 
 
 » ra xa0»ra CT J ^ . shall T on t n tl,„ 15 11 J- * f ' 
 
 shall T «ia„ k,i a 8 ° to the Bal! thls evening, or 
 
 snail t stay at home? T « ««„<, • what shall T <Wl- ■ ~ 
 what shall I say? °' '' n i " TU S 
 
 m ItethS ''I 8 PeCUliar f ° rCe ' in refusin g compliance 
 
 is ont of the miPctinn ti.;„ -m *? l nat 
 
 about it. f I uestlon - Th 's Phrase has a spirit of Irony 
 
 ass S,™ s™ r "* .-• '"""•»% 
 
 them. m ' ***" *? &c ra X» 1 evil betide 
 
 5. The conjunction «»,, and its derivative adverbs of time 
 
 Xu:;::: 1 ^;' : ne i- e r ' as - soon -* ***£ 
 
 P^tiXrtctt 11 "r T n I"' -^tions 5 thit wn'en 
 P Uai fdCtlS S P° ke " oh.they require the Indicative ; 
 
no ...... 
 
 trav uh toy ixfy'*% t$vyt , as soon as be s&w the enemy , nl 
 fled whilst on the contrary , when what is customary, what 
 usually occurs , without specifying a particular instance, or 
 fact, they require the subjunctive ; crav ihl to? tfflffi (pivyh, 
 us soon as he sees the enemy , he flees. ( usually , in speak- 
 ing , but improperly , fllies. ) 
 
 In this latter Phrase , the Aorist is used, where we tise 
 the present ; because the acts are consecutive \ and not 
 simultaneous \ he sees before he flees. When the acts an* 
 simultaneous , the present is requisite in both members of 
 the sentence : orav Koi^drai , ^oy^ax/ Jti , when ht sleeps , he 
 snores. . . 
 
 When both antecedent and consequent are definite , and 
 past , the verbs must be both in the indicative : b KaTcc^ 
 
 crav nxrt%vhu<Ji ry^ P.G>,«a/yc , zyuri ptiFtfrbc *'C ctvrvc as SOOfl as 
 
 Caesar had enslaved the Romans, he became hateful to them. 
 As a general Maxim, according to rule , thus , Safc/ 
 
 xxrulvhuxni tu; rye cvuTOKirai: ry , yi/trai fAWHTfli WC oo'&tvj. 
 
 Whenever any one enslaves his Countrymen , he becomes 
 hateful to them ; oiroioc , whoever , follows the same con- 
 struction ; wow na1<xlvKu<ni k , r , k Whoever enslaves 8c& 
 
 W 7 hen b"]ctv , aV 5 , §f. ; are followed by the Aorist sub- 
 junctive, in the first, and the future Indicative , in the se- 
 cond member of a Phrase, it indicates two future consecu- 
 tive acts, or events : otolv Ximn.o-A, Uku cat: evvxe^ , ibhen he 
 has supped , ( that is shall have supped ) he will come 
 and see you. 
 
 When by two Aorists, two consecutive past events / 
 to be translated by our pluperfect i followed by tvhat 
 M. r Murray calls our Imperfect , as in the above Phrase* 
 
 o Ka7<ra(j b^C. 
 
 6. The Greeks sometimes, forma compound future ,-hy 
 adding the Aorist of the conjugated verb to the first form 
 of the future of z%a , thus ; Uhu '£%u Itimncii iit w cfcrvj he 
 will have supped at eight. 
 
 If the verb be active, and the object of the action he 
 expressed , they form a. compound exactly similar to our 
 
III... 
 i-piJov ac KbWw, I shall have" riaa 
 your Book to morrow. 
 
 jl In French , « cy/za/z £&e declaration of one person 
 is made by another, that is, » in an indirect Phrase, after 
 a- past tense , the present is changed into the imperfect , 
 and the future into the Conditional. In Greek, the Tenses 
 and Moods suffer, no change , under such circumstances ; 
 and we say, indifferently, in the present, uyit , p-ri U\u t« 
 
 Swgvi -?roLf0Lhi<; y otclv koity hot. th yjitoTTW . (i) II dit, <JU il lui 
 
 donnera de V argent quand il aura recu ce quo'n lui doitj 
 he says, that he will give him Money when he receives 
 what they owe (is due to) him ; ; and; in the past, iliny , 
 
 en (Jihii ry luvu crapaSef , otolv ka&i wot rS ^iavv)tv , il a dlt , 
 
 quil lui donnerait de V argent , quand il aurait recu c6 
 quon lui devait , he said that he would give hint Money , 
 when he received what they owed ( ivas due to) him. (2) 
 
 (1) This Phrase affords a good opportunity of noticing that the 
 indefinite expressions, on dit , it is said, People say, (hey say , axe 
 almost invariably rendered by the Vulgar in :, our last niodc : fc&ywiv ', 
 X oiu>~cOv ; £.%f iTdi , ^peo)<:etTcs),' are more refined. 
 
 (2) By whatever difference of Tense, the above Phrases may be 
 Expressed, in the three languages, it is evident, that that they are r 
 in all, equivalent to , « he says , that when he shall » « receive etc. y 
 he will give etc. » and « he said , that when he should receive etc. 
 he Would etc. >> When the nature of the Subjunctive Mood fs philoso- 
 phically considered, that, like, the Imperative, it necessarily implies 
 some modification of futurity/ inasmuch as obedience and consequence 
 must necessarily follow their correlatives command and hypothesis; 
 these striking anomalies of the three Languages are easily accounted 
 for , by an acquaintance with the subtilty of the human Mind , and 
 the very different, thought nearly equivalent means, by which , under 
 very varied circumstances, it reaches the same ends. I have thought 
 
 ■ this opportunity of illustrating what I niay have to say, in the Ap- 
 pendix, on a very perplexed subject, too good to be allowed to slip. 
 I have therefore given in this instance, an exact translation of Mon^." 
 D. 8 Rule and the original French of his example ; though , withou* 
 such an object, the Rule, to" apply to English , must like some others, 
 have been entirely remodelled ; for after what has been said 011 the 
 peculiarities of the Modern Greek , as to the future , and conditional 
 Tenses, Pages 5o and 108 ,§ o,- ; if differs nothing , in principle , fro^i 
 the first part of Rule 5, though the example is transposed. 
 
ii2 
 
 SECOND PART. 
 
 OF THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 
 
 I. There being no Infinitive in the Modern Greek, its 
 place is supplied by the subjunctive ; 6eag» vd tt/J , je veux 
 Loire; that is to say, is used, in the three Persons, as the 
 French use it in the 2. d §• 3. d for they can use the in- 
 finitive only in the i. st ; je veux boire , and employ the 
 subjunctive in the i. d and 3. cl ; je veux que tu boives, 3-s*» 
 ret vrirQ , je veux qu'il boive 6Ias> vd W ; whereas the Ancients 
 would have used the infinitive in the three Persons ; bibere 
 volo , te bibere volo , ilium bibere volo; mu* /^Ac^a/, wtfo 
 
 i. The Neuter J r dele to is sometimes prefixed to the 
 Subjunctive , together with the particle vd , as a Noun ; 
 and the Subject of a Verb, as we use the Infinitive: iT L ai 
 7.0LK0V ro vd dwoQdw tiq lid tw Trof'^floi r« , it is noble ( comely ) 
 to die for one's Country. This construction facilitates the 
 use of whole Phrases as Substantives ; thus, to vol xwiOgljJftf, 
 
 xar vd lita^yi ti$ Kotxd rd ttoliViol ry , ecu to iJvcll KotKAviTtfov Grctpx vs. 
 rot ^aStuw . It is better well to train (nurture ) and instruct 
 
 (i) The English in this exactly follow the Ancients; I wish to drink, 
 2 wish thee, him, her, it, jaai\ them, to drink: so in the plural, 
 We wish to drink, We wish, thee, him, her, it, them, to drink. 
 This comparison with French may serve to abate , somewhat , 
 the prejudice , which many have rather hastily taken up against the 
 Modern Greek, when it is observed, that what they have deemed 
 clumsy exists, as a very extensive anomaly , unobserved, I presume, 
 by the impugners , in one of the most cultivated languages of Mo- 
 dern Europe. There can be little doubt, that under advantages j 
 devoutly to be wished , the Greeks will gradually raise their language 
 to a rank not at all unworthy of the unrivalled Parent ; and will 
 probably unite many of the pre-eminent privileges , and much of 
 the fascinating naivete of her Infancy , with the peculiar Graces of 
 the Offspring : for it is most certain , that a great part of the in. 
 definable naivete, and playful simplicity of all Languages is due tor 
 . the exercise of strong Minds, and quick and brilliant Imagination 
 among the lower classes. 
 
n3 
 
 Children than 10 indulge ( fondle ) them ; to vdt otyowa k«- 
 
 ri.'C rr.v -srefT^/Sa, uvtv thai n ZTfOTn dfirn , to love Olie S Country 
 
 it the (i) first of Virtues. 
 
 THIRD PART. 
 
 01' TITE PARTIlfcPLE* 
 
 i. The Active Participle undeclined agrees with all 
 humbers and genders, though not with all cases ; for it 
 can only refer to a nominative, which is usually the sub- 
 ject of the Phrase : aJra?c 9.1 yvwTKts QKinovras toy khIvvov ttpvyoLv , 
 these Women seeing the danger fled ; rd nroLtltd /fosVorrotc 
 7yii afjcfiXoe, hfbpzZav, the Children seeing the Rear trembled. 
 
 Tt is not the same with the present passive participle , 
 which being declinable, in gender, case i and number , 
 agrees, with the Subject ? cx.vra.7i; a! yvrwittt , fofivpivouc to* 
 xiHvyqv s 'iyvyav. 
 
 i. Whenever the Undeclined participle, or the participle 
 present passive , refers to any other noun, than the sub- 
 ject of the Phrase, it is used absolutely - y and expresses a 
 
 (i) Good as & Grammatical Example, and an admirable moral 
 Maxim from Cato , or any other Stoic , among the Heathens ; but 
 Christianity requires one other Virtue , at least , to have precedence , 
 the love of God , as the only solid basis of every other Virtue 9 the 
 onlv firm security for the performance of any of our Duties towards 
 our Fellow Creatures , to which latter the qualifiying word Moral is 
 usually most improperly limited. Silence is by many thought equal 
 to consent. Stability of Morals b without Religious Feeling , is what 
 I cannot understand ; MonsJ David is perhaps of the same narrow^ 
 understanding with myself; but many of his Countrymen , and of 
 my own , I know , have long since shaken off these , as they think, 
 puerile , vulgar prejudices. Did not Aristides feel accountability to 
 the God of Nations, whb maketh empires rise and fall? Did he not 
 act under a much higher principle, when he nobly rejected the time- 
 serving expediency and treacherous baseness of the laxly moral pa- 
 triot Themistocles ? I know thousands of my Countrymen consider it, 
 as it truly is , amongst the first of Virtues, 
 
 8 
 
circumstance attending the action : the participle passive 
 declinable is, in this case, always in the nominative: xvx%afuyT-/e 
 (iyu ) ttlro tm zptifw , zywt cur/Ac , on my quitting ( as 
 I was setting out from ) Smyrna there was an earthquake^ 
 cuiy.lQ is the nominative of the Phrase; ov%s vpiis ik % x a ? l '°* 
 nan To dTrhi (jl'jlq , while we were in the Country our House 
 was burnt ; kx^ivoc aiTs efc To IgQurfy » hfiSav ol flhoi ™ , 
 His Friends came, while he was at Table ; vnryaurdfarot avrol 
 uq To x u ? l0V i Me ']o y-ci^lQi tvc, their Vessel arrived while they 
 were proceeding ( on the road ) into the Country. In the 
 three first Examples, % irsrviTi , ol <pfkot , % xxfdGt , are the 
 Subjects of the Phrases. 
 
 CHAPTER LXIV. 
 
 OF PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 a7// v , or x/lkfor, in exchange for , instead of , requires 
 a genitive , y.h dv^a^olilrx kolkov aYli hum , return not evil for 
 evil ; ciTiKTWii; yihov Atfr e^S ; you have acquired a friend 
 instead of an Enemy, drrt t3 t'd Tv htatnsj % v&fi&c instead of 
 commending you insult him" 
 
 In composition , it signifies ( against ) dvTiKtf pivot , op* 
 posite; aW^/a, the reverberation of the Sun; 2. ( before:) 
 
 diTiwfoxQte, the day before yesterday ; 3. ( Imitation^ 
 
 counterfeit'.) dvrahtili , a false key. 
 
 Azjo (from, by y) governs the accusative; this preposition 
 indicates ( the point of departure ; ) 'i^x°y- ai *w ™ r 'sroxty, 
 I come from the Town ; — — 2. (The origin, ) ccvtyi y K&jf 
 GrafdyiTcu aVS ra eVa^^c/, this word is derived from An.* Greek; 
 To *&$/&« atzrh Tv qihov pv , I have received it from my friend; 
 el/tat dvro %r vm'ov ; ( I am from sleep, ) I have just awakened, 
 I am just, ( hardly) awake — — 3. [apart : ) mdvilot dvro to 
 X^i, take him by the hand ; — — 4- ( abstraction ) «V/a «V» 
 TdTo to noh % I have drunk some of this water ; -nolot cItto tad; to 
 ty.aui; which of ( from amongst ) you did it? — — 5. ( the mat- 
 ter: ')xv5T« ■"«&■• udhayyMj a cup of gold ( a golden cup ) yipotjr 
 
Hi 
 
 «t*e Hf.o, JFxi.ll of water : see p. 102 , § 6. 6. ( the efficient 
 
 eause'. ) in'dfa-W «to Ihf S/'^ay, he died of thirst; a^ro fw? |Wtj?k, 
 
 of fever; E"x1«f wwrafiu aVi le/ A'^ixwa, Hector was killed 
 by Achilles ; ixpffOtf a«?3 7cr pobov ** ; he AzV/ himself 
 
 through fear; 7. ( division, allotment : ) *a'0e <r^«r/ *£*/ 
 
 «cro Jm«; jra/J/xaTa, each House has three Stories ; ( is of 
 three stories ) % tumor ( '{%u ) Sw^xa yf'cvix , el/ufac rfc-rifcc , 
 iriyrvv Komh aVo Tf/a -yfocr/a rsr xafiha, the supper COStS twelve 
 Piastres , we are four, that is three, Piastres a head ; ( three 
 Piastres therefore fail to each) — ■ — 8. ( an epoch past,.) 
 uq 1«c $w «' z « r * ^* yw^a, two hours after dinner ; oltto "iorsc 
 thenceforth ; aVe Tal^a , xa/ tfc to ^w<, henceforth; Thus, 
 in dates , the genitive also ; dwl Xftarv, after Christ ; ik Id 
 v/A/a oTtraKoaia aVi Xfws , 1800 after Christ; di-h jlsltolGoxic 
 xocfjLM , from the foundation of the World ; — — - q. 
 ( time ) clvro Gf'q&nt , at nightfall. 
 
 In composition cItto , marks, — — 1 . (separation, ejection) 
 clttcppitttcj , I throw away , reject ; d7rir.cn oc ; getting up from 
 his recumbent position , as a Man from a couch or bed, 
 
 a Hare from her seat, ^ c. , — 1. ( Privation : ) fcWr0j»«3r& 
 
 inhuman; 3. ( cessation:) d7Ti<pctyccr, they have finished 
 
 eating; a^-f^aMf ixxw/a^ the Mass is finished ( the church 
 has chaunted, the Church service is over. ) 
 
 Aid ; this Preposition governs both genitive and accusa- 
 tive ; with the Genitive it signifies, ( through, across , by ) 
 to aTPciTivpa tTTi^oLfi lid °\y\$ 7roKiTua(, the army passed through 
 the City ; Me ltd ?«$>*? , lid fatfkdmic , he came by Sea^ by 
 Land;*- — — 2. it indicates the {ineans) f^V 'Uiuhu lid % 
 l*h* (jlv, I sent it you, by ( means of) my servant : we may say 
 
 in Greek lm ^ww ; With the Accusative it indicates i. rtr 
 
 ( the final cause : ) *s*j&u to lid x^ lv #* , do it for my sake; 
 ctViOavs lid nit vaTfila , he died for his Country ; dybfxca, 
 TOLV7& °rd CiChtx lid toy dhh<pot p.* , I bought these books for 
 mv Brother ; lid crop* t* ttch^U ?«. cl &&'{&&&& , in the name 
 of your Father 9 for your Fathers fame's sake, I intreat 
 vou" To&&tvtt , lid vd pd% £*><*«• yKuinraiG., he travels to acquire 
 foreign languages , — .- a. ( the efficient cause ) U d^teuk 
 
&vin-vxmi , he has become Unfortunate through Idleness / 
 ^ or Carelessness ) ; ci Wano) ltd to pftripb't vm , I commend 
 you for your behaviour; er^cmyyv^c, lyyvupou ItavToi/, I pledge 
 
 myself for him ; 3. ( the end: ) i^/V«wt lid Wr no^r, 
 
 he has set out for Constantinople ; ltd n* iTmi auV V xapa£< ; 
 
 whither is this Vessel bound; 4- ( the subject) okm 
 
 vy.i\Q<7M ltd whhiuo* , they talked of nothing but War ; li'icic 
 ictivtlou li aula ; What think you of this ? 
 
 In composition it signifies, through, thoroughly, distribu- 
 tion ; it implies also intenseness of the simple. 
 
 E/f ( in , into ) requires uniformly the Accusative; ttdOoasu 
 . ik% Kfi/3,8ar/ , I keep my bed; vmymm its to S^cAe?^ , I anr 
 gcing to School, 
 
 By ellipse of the Accusative ,-• it sometimes appears in 
 immediate contact with the Genitive: wyahu tiq t« o/xo^* , 
 I am going to OEconomus^ ro wati, house, understood. 
 
 Kala, governs both genitive and accusative. Witfiz the 
 Genitive , it indicates opposition, contrariety: avfis upiKwri 
 y.<x}ci cry , he spoke against you; iini ttokkx xara -raJV T^xikcoy , 
 lie said much against, spoke much to the disadvantage of , 
 the Greeks : With the Accusative , it signifies in , or at , 
 and expresses cO?iformity : act? ewroy for x-atfor , at that time 
 xafld Vv Tpnoy t*toy , in this manner; jtatfa %<; vspvc , according' 
 to the laws; xo?a %v yyupmv px, in my opinion; *aja wpfitfiwk, 
 by accident, accidentally. 
 
 In composition , in addition to the above senses , it ; 
 augments the force of an adjective: yc'dTd^n^c > very dry ; 
 a'«Vao-^of , very white. 
 
 Me , with, requires the accusative, and indicates union: 
 vrtiyoum pi olCtvc , I am going with them ; and the name of 
 the instrument or matter, with which any thing is done: 
 yf d<pu /A tJ aovlvhi, pi to pixdvi , I write with the Pen , 
 With Ink. 
 
 Mera, after, requires the accusative; Oa 'Ik% y.trd fye?c »f^lf««v 
 lie will come in ( after ) three days. 
 
 In composition it signifies change : to ifittdroiMot. , 
 P repent it: ( I hav€ changed my mind about it ) i 
 
i*7 
 p.£Tq.{i>olhKu , I change ; piTafixtvu , I change position, p'asf 
 £roni place to place. 
 
 'Zava. , contracted from i^avei, is used only in composition 9 
 jand indicates reiteration ^as re, in English: {Ut^a 1 see ; 
 £am£\65r« I review. 
 
 ITa^a/ £^<w?, ai ^d also , against , as the inverse of **r« 
 according to % admits only of the accusative: Sev -fiTSee rap IxtM-or, 
 J have seen no other than him; 7ra$& yuan, against nature , 
 ir^a lit v'ofMQ , against the laws. 
 
 It is sometimes a conjunction , and always marks dif- 
 ference , as cLKhot, fAtt. , but : llv /u* to umv b <pihoc <r* , ttcl^I 
 e xlih<pb( juv ; it was not your friend , but my Brother who 
 told ( it) me; lly iTv'&i <ro<pb; 9 zo-ol^ol loKWivfxpoc , he is not wise, 
 hut thinks himself so; lly tov ivKOTactv cihkot , srajsa fauvos , no 
 other than he killed him : here the accusative does not 
 follow T^, because it is, in this instance, a conjunction (i) 
 and not a preposition. It might without solecism be re- 
 garded as a preposition j and the accusative put after it, 
 ay tov ioKorucnv ciKKoc nctf Uuvov but this would lead to 
 ambiguity , which ought to be carefully avoided. 
 
 This preposition is ocasionally seen constructed with 3, 
 genitive , signifying the efficient cause ; fitChfoy cvnaffiv 
 vafci 7« rdli , a Book composed by such a one. 
 
 It is sometimes purely intensive : ilvxi vraod ttokkoc rnxk , 
 he is exceedingly silly, an exceedingly great fool; and in this 
 case often retracts its accent 9 and becomes paroxytonon ; 
 
 «r«tia TroKka, xyhbc* 
 
 In composition it preserves analogous senses of change f 
 opposition , intension : xufdnpo? , illegal ; 7rcL$a&nha> , 
 / transgress ; to. -n-^^Kovu . he exaggerates; aur» rp £/- 
 Chiov yX TroLfdfitru . this book pleases me exceedingly* 
 
 Ufo\ before , since, requires the genitive ; tt^o Trivn ipifur 
 five days since. 
 
 (1) If not a solecism , it does great violence to the plainer princi- 
 ples of grammatical Analysis to consider it a preposition. Habit very 
 jnaturally , as in our own language , leads to the Offence ; but it 
 certainly is a great offence against precision and perspicuity , whicfo 
 are v irtues of the very first rank; in writing and sneaking. 
 
n8 
 
 It has in composition the same sense: vfoptiolw , I antici- 
 pate, arrive before, get the start of. 
 
 Ufo;, towards, governs the accusative only ; myoum irfo$ 
 avroy ; I am going towards ( to) him Itfai , ?rfoc ro'Ult x^'°h 
 on the right, going towards that Tillage ; 
 
 It has the same sense in composition: -Tr^oawkZ , I invite,, 
 (call towards ); tj Tlarfh tr«t 7rfo<ntakt7, your Country invites 
 you ; TrfQZTpx® > 1 mu towards , I have recourse to. 
 
 TVep, governs both genitive and accusative : With the 
 genitive it signifies, for, for the sake of, in favor of. h h foe 
 i-'oy^os a.7r'i^'j.vi uVfy rkt- ttoltoiIoq , the sacred Band ( Battalion ) 
 died for their Country : ilm ttokkol uVty \um, he spoke much 
 ( said many things ) in my favour ; In this sense , it is the 
 inverse of kutcl. 
 
 With the Accusative , it signifies beyond , above : duro. 
 10 £aw (ft V7ttf 7*V l^mla. Xf^xs y this animal lives above thirty 
 years ; nn^i uVep rcl kaxocuuhx he exceeds his limits, he goes, 
 beyond his Sphere ; It preserves in Composition the same 
 significations: v7n^a.a7ri{ovToa %v E\\a'Sa, they defend Greece; 
 vTiffioLivu rx ofix ; he exceeds the limits. 
 
 Other Prepositions are , amongst Writers , in use in 
 Composition of Words , and arc sometimes met with 
 detached ; but these all savour of Hellenism , and their 
 senses, and governing influence must be sought in Hellenic* 
 Dictionaries and Grammars. 
 
 CHAPTER XLV. 
 
 Of ADVERBS* 
 
 i. Many adverbs admit of two modes of construction, ac- 
 cording to the nature of the Words with which they are- 
 united. I.° When thev are followed by a substantive, or pro- 
 noun , not monosyllabic , they are connected by a preposi- 
 tion , governing its usual case : II. ° When followed by the 
 monosyllabic personal pronoun, the pronoun, without pre- 
 position, is in the genitive, and as usual enciitic : Such 
 
:W£ fjLx{u , with ; kovtx. , near ; ittclvq upon ; vnpkzlq \ un- 
 der ; oni'™ behind; e^oV , before: Thus ; with the aid of 
 a preposition , we say 0a waya y-*{v (£> %'t <pi\ov (am , I am going, 
 I shall go, with my Friend; b aliKtpk (am krov xovtcl e/c e,a=', my 
 Brother was near me ; To <nta/u.yl sTtaj vttokzIu u$ to TpaTreC/ •, 
 the stool is under the Table; ovrfaa aVo rMv zj'qotm , behind 
 the door ; tov CaeVw t/Awfos tic tfA&m 9 I see him before me ; 
 with the enclitic , thus ; 0a vrdyo (aolIJ) r« , I shall go with 
 him ; b dlihcpoc (am vtov kovto. (am. My brother was near me; 
 avTYi v\ K07r£KKcillv 'iyu Kd(Ajuis(.y %apiv zTTxvb) rv\s this Girl has not 
 a charm about her ; tov vfvpv vztok&tq tm , I found him under 
 jt ; cits- b trie co tm , behind it ; (ay) 7rifdffr,c octt ifAzzr^bt; (am , do 
 not go in front of me: the two last preserve the preposition, 
 tut it precedes the adverb. 
 
 2. Tfiyvfv 9 or -Tfiyufa around, is, with pronouns, con- 
 structed in the latter mode only ; Tpiyv^M (am , tfiyvf* y* a s '> it 
 may, with Nouns, be constructed with an accusative, pre- 
 ceded by a preposition; rfiyvf* t!$ to un'mi, tic to d^v'tKi /am , 
 around my house , my Vineyard, 
 
 3. e'W , till, unto, requires the accusative, with a pre- 
 position ; "tug ilc tov Mfotybv , unto Heaven ; though sometimes 
 before Nouns, and invariably before other Adverbs , the 
 preposition is omitted ; s&c avgiov , till to morrow j*la; rore, 
 till then ; "tot kt'oti ; till when? 
 
 4- The indicating Adverb m, there , To ! behold ! is 
 followed by both Nominative and Accusative ; by the for-, 
 mer , when the word is of more than one syllable ; by 
 the latter , when it is the enclitic personal pronoun : vd 
 b dliKpbr. a* , there is your Brother ; vd tov , there he is. 
 
 Followed by gym, it marks astonishment ; (a eirctfoutaKHrtc 
 fbffov % yd ff to ow'o-fv, um to zlcoxot, vd ttm llv to Uhtit; 7Thiov , you have 
 
 so often begged me to give it you , T have given it you, and 
 npw. forsooth you no longer wish it. ( will have it. ) 
 
 5. The adverb of time ttoti. , never ; with what strikes 
 fne as singularly happy brevity , and a most graceful 
 energy , assumes the monosyllabic personal pronoun , as an 
 enclitic ; llv tov via. wot{ ^m , I never saw him in my life l 
 
120 
 
 We arrive , perhaps, at something very near this energetic 
 turn , by reversing the natural order of the Words cc In my 
 life, I never saw him; and in our impassioned stile, by & 
 beautiful reiteration ; Never , no , Never , shall I see him 
 move. The Greeks would here like ourselves , reiterate ; 
 troA Trore px , llv Sa rh ilia. Again , never in their lives did 
 they harm him, Ih rh l^Kou^m vot* t*c , the sentence com- 
 pleted would run , as in English , 7totI t/f rw {uw t«c. 
 
 6. The Privative Adverbs x u ?'* > ^X wf » without; take 
 the Accusative ; h'x^i wr , without judgment , x^f' c 7rn ^H- ,ji 
 without Talent. 
 
 7. The Interjection dhhoifAovov , Alas ! is followed some- 
 times by the prepositiou tk , and its case: olkkcIuovov i\$ ifxkva \ 
 woe is me ! tlytl bravo ! sometimes by the enclitic persona! 
 pronoun ; tlyi <jy ! bravo! well done ! bravely! and in the 
 plural, ilyt Ttff ! English the same as in the singular. 
 
 8. Ma is used in oaths, and solemn asseverations, and ue^ 
 gations ; (A.d 7w 7r;7 7iv p\; ; %*.& T h frovftw u , Faith, I'll support 
 ( stand by ) him; /ud rh <dih Ih rh ula. , On my honor, As 
 Heaven is my witness, I have not seen him. 
 
 9. Vc is constructed with both the Indicative and Subjunc- 
 tive ; with the latter , independent of its imperative import, 
 it indicates permission , consent to something that has not 
 yet occurred ; with the Indicative, adherence , assent, to 
 something already effected : thus , when I say , aV r% noi/ifi , 
 let him do it, I signify that, without being much interested 
 about the matter, I have no objection to it; but if I say , & 
 to 'inapt , let him have done it , be it so , suppose him to 
 have done it, fyc. 1 imply that I am not against it , I am 
 not displeased, though I do not approve it: ac , with the 
 present ofthe Subjunctive, indicates consent to the continua- 
 tion of what is taking place at the time we speak : as rh Wj>* 
 let him beat him; ( set about beating him, ) «c rh Ityn, 
 let him continue beating him. See Chap/ f\i , § 2. 
 
 10. a"? is also optative; «V aj/a6w \% rh ^xvxiI-jo f **} tJS-u* 
 *c etTTofo'vo ; the optative ofthe pathetic language of Jacob , 
 on regaining a sight of his Son Joseph. , let me but see 
 him before I ( and immediately ) die* 
 
Sal 
 
 yx. There are , in Greek , three negations, lh and %yj- \ 
 Vulgarly cyiom , and the prohibitive juh , vulgarly pm* 
 lh is always connected with a verb and is never used 
 independently , or alone ; lh fchu , I will not ; c'x< ori ^ ie 
 contrary always, and it answers to our adverb No ; to 8«m/c; 
 do you wish it? c^/, No. Ah, is used only with the Indi- 
 cative, and juYi with the Subjunctive and Participle-, jam rh 
 Wouvh, dontpraise him; pm ovrac //a^eVcc , not being accus- 
 tomed. Thus in negative Imperative i. e. Prohibitory Phrases, 
 it. is always requisite to use the Subjunctive after /uu * 
 pYirriv x-TVTroic, dont beat him i. e. leave off beating him; 
 pfo rhv KTUTTwiit; dont beat him i. e. dont se^ abouj; beating 
 him. See Chap/ /\i , § 2. 
 
 12. d'yi and t uri form Negative Conjunctions , are , /uuTi , 
 neither, nor; lh \x w * 7t n f° > * T * $opi » I have neither Water 
 nor bread. In such Phrases as these , where the Negative 
 is conjunctive, Custom is in favor of pint , even with the 
 Judicative: thus, it is most usual to say, lh 'ix® **f°p w 7 * 
 ^u/ut , / have neither water nor bread ; and with a dou- 
 ble negative , thus ; lh e^w pun vi^'o , juvn -^aui- though ire 
 would be more correct. With greater reason, in the subjunc- 
 tive , lh 0£aw ra rhv lla , pun vx rh hpiMiM , I will neither 
 see , nor speak to him ; and with a double Negative, lly 
 
 viKto , juvri vol rov iba , jL>.v)ri vet rov opikwa. 
 
 i3. From these Negatives are also formed, v*$t and ^e, 
 in which the particle Se answers to our, even, so much as; 
 lh rhv yvofifa , y'o£ rov tilt , he neither /mows, nor has ever 
 even seen him. ( So much as seen him. ) instead , of 
 these Intensives , it is very common, however incorrect , 
 to use the conjunctives vm and /uvp,t , particularly the lat- 
 ter: lh \)(0(j.iv (j.mi nfo tic rh an'wi. We lyzve not even^vli ) 
 Water in the House. 
 
 j 3. The Affirmative Particles Na/ , Na/<n« answer to our 
 yes ; txuc ^aui ; have you Bread ? Na/ , yes. McLittol is 
 much in use as an affirmative , particularly intensively. 
 
 i4- It is considered more elegant to answer by re- 
 peating the Yerb in the Question , particularly , if affir* 
 
122 
 
 matively ; thus , tj&ic ^P » have you any Bread ? 'lyu \ 
 I have ; K^ac rh ti2>Kiov ; have you the Book ? % tx a > 
 I have; opihwic rvs p/\«c y.as ; did you speak to, or have 
 you conversed with our Friends ? rx<; auixma I did , 
 I have; ula; rh dliKy'ov (jlm ; Did you see my Brother ? rh 
 uloc , I did ; When the Noun governed is definite , the 
 Article must accompany the Verb in the Answer ; thus : 
 txi% Kfcici ; Have you any Wine ? e^co , / have ; lyi* to 
 KfoLoi ; Have you the Wine ? To i^a , I have. 
 
 1.5. "low , perhaps , when referring to a future time , 
 is constructed with the Aorist of the Subjunctive ; %u<; \k% t 
 perhaps he will come ; i'aue tov f^q , perhaps you will 
 see him. 
 
 1 6. The comparative particle wo-aV , Vulgarly o-otv , like*, 
 just like, is followed by the accusative, though preceded 
 by a nominative ; ol <pikot gm thai guv tvz huhxc , your friends 
 are seemingly ( just like ) fools. 
 
 17. Many Adverbs such as ttowoI , much , *a,\a, well ; 
 <rv%yci, often ; TrfUTx. first ; ivkokcl , easily; Ivckokcl , with 
 difficulty , are compounded with Verbs , particularly if 
 employed negatively; lb %v o-vxvoZkztto, I dont see him often; 
 lly 70V icpLKoyvadoi^ii , I dont know him well; ph (/.l woxy^x/^c 
 dont worry me, pester me, turn my brain, orav rh yrforoulx 
 when I first saw him ; ccoto to oMx.1 IvuKohooLvolyu , thjs. 
 trunk opens with difficulty, tvKoKooc.voiyu , opens easily, 
 
 CHAPTER XLVL 
 
 OF CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 i. The copulative xou , and, is sometimes substituted 
 
 IOr VZ' 7TM Y\fA.7T0^U KOl) KOl/kOLTOU (A TGGW ViVTY^ \ llOW Can llC 
 
 sleep amidst such heat ? %<u is here substituted for m , in 
 appearance only ; for it imports much more : since, if v* 
 were used, the Verb would imply merely the possibility of 
 the thing , and would therefore be in the Aorist of the 
 Subjunctive , n-uq n&&rop7 vl wpftn'i instead of which it ex- 
 
ia3 
 
 presses ? not only the possibility , but the actual or present 
 occurrence, which is its principal force ; koi/uoltoii , he sleeps? 
 the possibility , ttq( mvoyii , is but accessory. 
 
 The Particle km, has a very nearly similar acceptation, 
 in certain elliptical Phrases, demanding an explanation, 
 of something unpleasant , or questionable : ri tKocpa. , k«? 
 ilfxm djUihk ; what Jiave I done , that I am ( should bo 
 called J idle ? r\ Kcotbv zKOLfXiv b Tltomwc , koli hrov tv^clvvoq ; 
 
 What harm did Pericles do , that he was ( should be 
 deemed ) a Tyrant ? 
 
 This Particle is also employed as the correlative of 
 ^•'ohiq ? hardly , scarcely, when the Phrase indicates two. 
 immediately consecutive events ; yjohic fbv ifiat* , **•* t"ox 
 'iwioLvM, They hardly caught sight of him before they 
 seized him. 
 
 2. Mh , and \\ , mark opposition between two Phrases, 
 two Ideas , as our indeed , it is true , / grant , 8$c. , 
 followed by hut , hut surely , <^c. ; juutfov ph , x a ¥ iiv ^ * 
 small indeed , but lovely. 
 
 3. a'V , if; otocv, when; byrbrav > whenever ; a<p' 5 , cis soon 
 as , from the moment §*c. : See Page 109 , § 5, 
 
 4. Atari , because , compounded of lid and 0/71 , and 
 t&iibyi , whereas , since , inasmuch as , are causatives ; 
 rov dyoL7ru lion iTvcu kclkoq , I love him because he is good ; 
 to Qiha itarulvi ju aiffau I wish it , or / will have it because, 
 ( since , inasmuch as ) it pleases me. 
 
 EVA , answers also to our for ( french , car ) which 
 is a stronger expression than the former, and implies a 
 kind of appeal llv rov yvafila^ i-riily Ih rbv tTlot srsre, I know 
 him not , ( how should I ) for I never saw him. 
 
 dV/ and voi both mean that ; but the first is simply 
 ji irrative , or affirmative ; whereas vol must be used , 
 whenever any influence of one action upon another is to be 
 indicated; KiyuoWt b (ptkot; potc &7ryiyn, he says that our Friend 
 has been drowned ; Ktyu on to Uku , he says that he wishes, 
 it ; vol could not he used in either of the above Phrases : 
 hut 5 I wished that he should see it ? I ordered him not 
 
124 
 
 to come ; he did all m his power to arrive in time ; are 
 Phrases that must be all translated with vol : nkhu yd rh iU 
 Wirt; , izTfbffTascL va juyiv tx8»», sxa^e tc Wrtr ?« pGa'aw t/'c xa/p9». 
 
 Instead of ?r; the Vulgar very commonly use *vaf jjytj 
 f& t/Va/ xa\o? , he says that you are good. 
 
 6. After Verbs signifying fear, ^, and pvvw are sub* 
 stituted for en , with the Indicative , if referring to any 
 thing present or past ; with the Subjunctive , if to any 
 thing future ; $o£utcu p.hvm x* oy ) *** jra^a'Ssc , he is afraid 
 of losing ( lest /ze should, that /ze? /zzajr /oje J ^« Money ; 
 fofrt'tTM juvttuc b pihoc tv Uv £\0;i A<? # afraid that /zw Friend 
 may not come ; ycfiiirai (A.mw; w e^«a« , /ze z> afraid that 
 #<? 7z<z^ ( may have ) lost them. 
 
 7. Thence it is , that (jmnat , at the commencement of 
 phrases , is expressive of fear, approbation , conjecture; 
 f/.y}urw oh jf J.yoLvcL, perhaps ( I fear ) he does not love me ; 
 fiYixzuc <iat tei?fat%ct, perhaps, ( I fear ) / have disturbed, mo- 
 lested you. 
 
 Instead of /u^twc, the Vulgar say vac v.*) ; tzq kcu llv ro 
 Ik ; Would you not wish it? perhaps you would not 
 wish it. 
 
 8. The particle on forms a remarkable Idiotism (1), when 
 prefixed to a Verb in an independent Phrase; for it in- 
 dicates , that the action expressed by the verb has just 
 occurred at the instant of speaking ; on hrnxalhtr , I have 
 this instant risen ; on tfvyt , he is but this instant gone out. 
 
 In analogy with the above sense , it has that of p'ohis , 
 
 hardly , scarcely , and answers to the same correlative 
 
 ■ *flu* on ifht rbv tp£0for ra , xai ixyfai' wavco % , he scarcely 
 
 saw his enemy , before , he rushed upon him, similar to 
 the Ancient Phrases ut vidi , ut peril \ ac ulov , a>c ijjlxyw. 
 
 (1) I fear this Word may appear pedantic ; hut Idiom and Idiotism % 
 in speaking of languages, are of such very different extent in their 
 Import, that they never ought to be confounded. The idiom, of a 
 language is its general distinctive character : an Idiotism is a sin- 
 gular exception, a departure from that character; either partial ? or 
 originating with the Vulgar. 
 
g. A/& yet ( lid indicating the final cause ) signifies tci 
 the irttint that , for the purpose of : See page 1 1 'J $ 
 
 tuny l t/f TWK TcLKKtOLY, QfX V* jUClS',1 7M ioLT^tKY\V , he LS gOH& tQ 
 
 France to study Medicine. 
 
 10; Ml to tol , by means of , is very little in use ; it is 
 better to form the Phrase either with tiie participle, or with 
 the particles lion, touta ; thus instead of ,/ul to rd %1'y.xi a ff «*}.•£ 
 Sir i^q cft£ iy f being indisposed I have no appetite, it h 
 better to Say , crrac «^«jt9c , or Hrf/U , $«7/ t/Jua« 4f^r 
 
 0"75f , X. t. \. 
 
 ii. Independent df its other meanings > the particle rd 
 eonstructed with the Imperfect of the Indicative is expres- 
 sive of desire, or regret of something wanting ; rd »«* */; 
 
 ryr<? t$ Trtfifcohi ( utotKaQxfcl £$>J<nc, that there were a clear spring 
 
 irt this Garden ; rd y\tov >] E\A.ac ihtuOiox, 7/ wjuofpoc *zr\s viftiKi. 
 
 yiyv. What a beautiful place ( Country ) would Greece 
 become were it but free ! This Phrase shews its clos-3 
 analogy with «V. 
 
 12. This Particle forms with the verb s^w , joined to 
 Nouns of number, and of time, a very peculiar Tdiotisnif 
 f^« TfiTs njuifdig vol tov ilco , it is three days since I saw 
 him , or I have not seen him these three days ; t;y^ 
 Tfi?c iZlotiollt.: vx e\0j; j he has. not been these three Weeks. 
 For such phrases , the following turn , with dp « and th(2 
 negative Ih , is preferable ; that rft/'c v 6 'f a/ f «V * ^- y T0Y ^ ox ' 
 
 1 3. xiVre ( to the degree ) that, is a correlative to ths 
 adverbs Vovor , to such a degree; yrw , So ; and the pro- 
 noun TQ'HToq t SUch ; e/Va/ Tocrov d-raioiVTO^ , axrrt ofcr Yi£,iu$u y.y\ 1 
 
 m \ixp>«.{n , he is so illiterate that he knows not even how 
 to read. 
 
 i4- The Vulgar use hvrx instead of wot*. As to jut] i See 
 the preceding Chapter § 11. 
 
 1 5. a"o*, aoitok , then , and the latter with the Article, 
 ri hoiTTbv , o'0« (therefore , wherefore, whence, on that or 
 on which account, ) are conclusive particles ; drxtfyiv \ d$a lf { , 
 he breathes , he therefore is alive ; kx7tv:?u 7 cl^a k */'u 
 k smokes, it, therefore , burns : kqivm is more in use in 
 
longer Phrases^ l Koufit; ttvcu ^-o\urip.cv rrfiyyi llv r^u kotwty 
 yd toy x^ VQ y iY ' Time is precious we ought not therefore 
 to waste it. 
 
 1 6. Ayjtaxa is used in resuming discourse , and in mo- 
 difying what has been said ; kolkol zet/tms kzi yy^dvuq yt'xv 
 ri-^vnv , dyKXhd Ih <rl ^ad^irou , i-mby QiKiig 'i)(_u vd (ru>K , VOLl 
 are right in learning a Trade , or Art , though, indeed 
 ( rigorousl)> speaking ) you need not, since you will have 
 where wi tli to live. 
 
 17. m' ohov on , ju'dhov I™ , although , is an Italicism , 
 ecinluttociocche ; Ijv . y dfs<ni y okoy ottS ihoii 'ivyo^c , he 
 does not please me , though handsome ; dv kxi although ; 
 yl dfhui dv Ktl m-xjiyw ; he pleases me, though ordinary , 
 or plain. The Verb may be used; ydfau , a* kxI uvqu ««3£tyc«&j 
 tliough the former turn is more concise and elegant ; 
 y okcy 7«7o, yet , notwithstanding , however , in spite of 
 
 all that * uyxi 'unJ'jiQ!; , yl o\ov %ts llv Osa« yd Tov Trdpa ; he 13 
 rich ; but yet I will not have him ; we may also say yl 
 c-kx fv 1d vmtyi oh 3lx<» m %v &dfG}$ notwi thstanding, or in 
 spite of ( or with ) all his riches , I will not have him. 
 
 1 8 KaV , TH\d^i(TT0Y , at least; ypd^f. tov kxv yfx yfcfep/rfa^ 
 write him, at least, a short letter; xdv is peculiarly ap- 
 propriate , after the conjunction if tt^-ttu id toy lyikww , 
 7) xdy yd rhv yfd^ye , jou must speak to him i or at least ( at 
 any rate ) write to him. 
 
 19. "Owwc, But, however , often commences, but, more 
 elegantly, closes a Phrase ; iTvxt cuvriioQ oyooc lb yl xdyvu yd 
 ye\J , he is smart, ( sprightly , quick at repartee , ) 
 but yet he does not make me laugh ; also, lb yl mpu vd 
 
 ythu oyuc 
 
 20. A'?,hd, ttKYir- , but ; uvcli tvyoffoc , dhkd llv.'i^ii 'urvtvya, 
 he is handsome , but he has no talent ; yl dyxtrd , 7rkh lb 
 bihuVov craft i, he loves me , hut I will not have ( marry ) him. 
 
 ir. TTpir , Trfo Ty vd } before, till, require the Aorist of 
 
 the Subjunctive', llv &a<m yd toy byi\Wto f 7rfiy hxfixoa to fiifihicy rt$ 
 
 or vfo iZ vd liafidvii x. r. \. I will not speak to him before, 
 ( till ) / have read his Book, 
 
:. { tit 
 
 *il. eV a> , ik yiotioh It*, gVt«c, while, whilst, meamvhile, 
 meantime, are both conjunctions and adverbs of time; 
 Ask (jcdyxTTOLc; h w ci KxTfivu, you do not love me , whilst 
 I adore you ; the two other conjunctions are considered 
 less elegant ; uq ncafov osrS hrov ik to urt^oht ry , g^iwar ol 
 xhiflat , koli ahnroiY to ctyiti , Thieves entered , while he 
 Was in his Garden , and stript the house • oytoc infi7roLTV(rtv 
 tig to yictho , rjhk to ycxfaGi rv , whilst he was walking along 
 the beach , or shore, his vessel arrived. It is unnecessary , 
 I presume , to -notice that ovtolq is the undeclinable participle 
 of the Terb Substantive. This being known, the Reader 
 will , by referring to page Ii3, § 2, see this turn of 
 Phraseology explained , and the principles on which the? 
 participle oyruc is substituted for a conjunction. 
 
I2Q 
 
 A P P E N D 1 X. 
 
 SECTION L 
 
 What ia the following remarks, particularly on accent , may to 
 the learned appear superfluous or trifling , will, I am lold, be 
 very acceptable to those who know nothing of Ancient Greek, and 
 study the Modern for practical purposes only. 
 
 ALPHABET. 
 
 As some of the forms of Letters in use are, in the Alphabet, 
 omitted , it will be necessary, as far as the means of printing will 
 aliow, to add them. 
 
 After X, read another form £ , after 9 , 3- after w , & , after p , p. 
 
 The Letters o and w have no exactly equivalent representatives in 
 English : they have both one sound, between the o in bond and bone 
 English ; and as nearly as I can represent it , that of o in bonnet 
 French, or bonnie Scotch. 
 
 SYLLABICATION. 
 
 As the Nouns and Verbs declined and conjugated are divided with a 
 view of distinctly marking the variable part of the Word , and the 
 accented Vowel, the Rules for distributing the Consonants have not 
 been there observed : they are the following. 
 
 A Single Consonant is to be written with the following Vowel ; 
 as oe'-pw, Xo'-'yo:, a-v£-;A0?. 
 
 Doubled consonants are to be divided between the preceding and 
 following Vowels, thus, aX-Xoi -^Xwc-aa. 
 
 Compounds when, divided, are to be divided into their component 
 parts, thus, I'^-yiXOov, cuv-sx-^i^ojxai > Kuvdc-oupaj 7:poa--aTTw, w^-re. 
 
 All combinations of letters found at the beginning of Words ori- 
 ginally Greek (i) when in the middle , are to be written with the 
 following Vowel , as xo'-tttw s-C^cp.0?. 
 
 All other combinations are divided between the preceding and 
 subsequent "Vowels, as 07-^00;, au^-^o;, sVrb; > 7rop6-[Ao;. 
 
 ACCENT. 
 
 As some idea of the Ancient quantity of Vowels is necessary for 
 readily determining the change and movement of the Accent, I shall 
 subjoin the Ancient Distribution of the Letters. 
 
 (1) 1o tk Sa -yX 7? fy dv £p 6X 6v G? xX y.v xp xr pv ttX t:v irp tct <rS 
 c9 x <r/- ff«X ou 17- g-X ct cto c-f co? <7£ tX T/X rp 06 oX op yb y\ jjv x&. 
 
 9 
 
VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS, 
 
 Long y) « 
 Short £ 9 
 Doubtful a t u» 
 Diphthcngs long (:) 
 
 9 TJute 
 
 cgnscnahts. 
 
 
 
 
 f Soft 
 I Middle 
 
 { Aspirated 
 
 i 
 
 
 a 
 
 4 Liquid x p v ? 
 ; 3 Double t 5 <I» 
 1 i Called Solitary $ 
 The Accent should always be placed over the last Vowel cf a. 
 Diphthong. / 
 
 There is an error of the press , page 6 , 5 fo|3o; instead of 6 fcflos 
 which affords a fair opportunity of explaining more distinctly the 
 circumstances in which alone the grave accent is to be used. All syl- 
 lables are accounted grave that have no mark of Accent ; but the 
 sign of the grave accent is never used, unless as a substitute for the 
 acute, when acuted Monosyllables , or Words acuted on their last 
 syllable , are followed by other Words (2) in the course of a Period: 
 9 g&Xfog f'.cj <5"ev ei^ev rev d^Xeov roD Kuptcu (3 , ccXXk rev tcu Kaptou A 
 ioO.<z:v , My Brother did not see M.r B's but M. r D's Brother T t; 
 irzr.oi ro pipx'cv 4 Who took the Book ? ?i eTire ; What did he say ? 
 In the first instance a^sXp-'; retains its primitive sign of acute accen?, 
 being followed by an enclitic ; in the second it assumes the sign of 
 the grave, being in the midst of a period, and not followed by an 
 enclitic ; in the third it resumes its primitive sign , being at' the 
 close of a period, 
 
 GENERAL RULES FOR ACCENTING HOUNS. (3) 
 
 1. u OXYTONA IsosylTabic become Perispomena in the Gen. S. and 
 Pi. see rtavi p. 16, and in all cases ending in » of the 3. d Declension. 
 See euXa{3-ri;. 
 
 2. Imparl syllabic of more than one syllable (4) become paroxytona 
 in all increasing cases. (5) See Tpu-fcov, and perispomena in all case 1 
 ending in et$ and eu* See BaffiXsu; p. 24. 
 
 (i) Except at and C t final, and, in the Vulgar Form of the Imperfect 
 Tense Passive ;u, as I-yoaaou -acuv . couv , etc. 
 
 (2) The Interrogatives tic ti, nnd acuted finals followed by Enclitics 
 are the only exceptions. The above Rule , and the exceptions prove 
 most clearly that the variations of tone must have heen very nicely 
 observed by the Ancients. 
 
 (3) See page 8 , line 6. 
 
 (4) For Monosyllables increasing. See page 23, §* 3. 
 
 (5) Except pvvi irregular. See p. 1 35, and Nouns having their final 
 long, which, in all cases, circumflex a long penult before a short finaL 
 See wetf page 23 9 §. 2. 
 
r3i 
 
 3< PAROXYTONA Itosyllabic become Perispbmerta in tlie Gen. S. 
 niid PI. if contracted by synezesis , as (pa^-tca-twv in the G. S. of 
 ftia j«oU,and in the G. PI. i.st(i) and 3. d Declensions. 
 
 4. Imparls yllabic (except of the 2.d Declension which never mov* 
 nor change their Accent ) advance their Accent one syllable in the 
 Genitive Plural. See u|3pi$, -pbuv. P» 24. 22* 
 
 5. PROPAROXYTOJNA Isosyllabic become Paroxytona in all car,?; 
 where the final is long. See av8po>ijo; p. 17 , unless that final be con- 
 tracted by synezesis, when it must be circumflexed. See toxtfireu£e, d 17. 
 
 6. Imparisyilabic advance their accent one syllable in all cages 
 increasing, or ending in etc 5 except the G. PI. of the i.st Declension, 
 where they advance it two. See ay-piotsi;, cpo'pey.a p. 2 5. 22. 
 
 7. PERISPOr.iENA Isosyllabic undergo no change (aj. 
 
 8. PROPERiSPOMENA Isosyllabic become Paroxytona' in all cases 
 ending with a long syllable, in, n? ? ou; , wv, a;, except, in the Gen. 
 H. i.st and 3. d Declensions, where the final is always •. circainffexed. 
 See Mouaa rei^e? P- J S. 2 °j 
 
 9. Imparisyllabic become proparoxytona in all increasing ca^es. 
 except the G. P. of the i.st Declension, where, as well as in all 
 ending in et£, they become paroxytona. See Trpa-yp.a, puat;, p. 22. 2:1. 
 
 accextttation of verbs, 
 
 In addition to what is said page 71, it is necessary alone to add 
 that the participle past passive^ in the Masculine and Neuter, is acuted 
 on the "penult, and that in Dissyllables, an incipient Vowel or Diphthong. 
 preceding a short final Syllable, is, on general principles 7 cireum- 
 iiexed. &ee 4%a P- 47 s and itux® r.ao p. 71. 
 
 I.St DECLENSION ISOSYLLABIC, 
 
 The Vulgar mode of declining has here nothing freculiai 5 , either 
 c.? "■? Accent cr Termination, beyond what is noticed^ p. j6 and 17.. 
 except with respect to Nouns in tyi;, which, whether oxytona, or 
 paroxytona, are, m the plural, accented and declined like ©a-va? p. 26. 
 Jvr£«rr,4, a Builder, MoOnriit a Pupil. 
 
 (1) In the i.st Declension, if the penult of the N. PI. be l&n™ 
 as at ow&Tau from V) d--ota, it is cireurnflexcd. 
 
 (<•} Beteroclifes becoming Imparisyllabic in Hie plural , according 
 to the Vulgai; mode of declining, can hardly be cal'ed exceptions 
 to the above. However written the penult of thgjr plural is always 
 acUUicL Sec p. :■() >;. 
 
*&2 
 
 S, P. 
 
 N. Kr/Vr-:,'c (\i) Kr/cr-ft^a/f (V, 
 
 G. J7 or * a'W 
 
 A . n -a'^a/c 
 
 V. *? a'^a;c 
 
 N. Ma^/r-tfV Wxf}r,T-dtm; 
 
 C. 57 OF 5 aW 
 
 A. « a'Sa/ff 
 
 V. w a'^a/f 
 
 2.d DECLENSION ISOSYLLABIC 
 
 Iii ordinary language some Masculine Nouns which are, m the 
 singular, declined after the first Declension, are, in the plural, declined 
 after the second, as ^cropi; a master workman, chief Artificer, 
 xscjtawKf * » crab or cray fish, 
 
 s. 
 
 
 MadTOP-KC 
 
 
 — — v\ or 
 
 Maj 7 op* 
 
 — — n or 
 
 r,v 
 
 — — n 
 
 
 S. 
 
 
 KoLhovo-a; 
 
 ■ ' 
 
 - — — a or 
 
 
 — — a or 
 
 ca 
 
 IS ouns of two terminations ai e, by the Vulgar , declined with 
 (1 ree, and often accented on the syllable marked with double lines,. 
 
 SINGULAR, 
 
 m r. 
 
 * £ \-&«g 
 
 — — v\ or w 
 
 (i) As v] t u gi oi are all pronounced alike, at and e alike, and q 
 and o> alike , and the three accents have precisely the same force 
 in enunciation, they in letters, and in other writings of the Vulgar, 
 are indiscriminately interchanged, as at; for e;, and r,;, is, mz, ei;. for 
 each other. 
 
i33 
 
 PLURAL, 
 
 M. F. N. 
 
 ■ " 01 -' CLIC ■ " CL 
 
 The following Heteroclites belong to this declension : 6 M-ps the 
 Word or Discourse, T a Xo'-yta ; 6 uuaXo's the Brain , T a puaXa, 6 tcaouto; 
 riches , -ct -jtXoutvi* o^po'vo;, the year, tcc x,P°' via ^ - T &v x? ovo)v ' T ^ ^Xo-yov 
 the Horse td aXcpc, or aXo'-yatra* to TrpoawTrov, the face, ra -ftp o'er to 77* or 
 ^poffWTrara to ovsipov* the dream, ra 6Wpa* or ovjEtpaf a. 
 
 3.d DECLENSION ISOSYLLABIC. 
 
 Nouns of this Decknsion are very little in use among the Vulgar, 
 They, in a lew instances, form a feminine of adjectives such as EuXa^vi;, 
 by substituting <$W a for the final ? , suXaSvi^aaa , and decline it after 
 the i.st Declension of Nouns in « pure. 
 
 I.St DECLENSION IMPARISYLLARIC. 
 
 In ordinary Language, Masculines and Feminines of this declension 
 become Isosyllabic, by substituting the Accusative Singular unaltered 
 for the Nominative of Feminines, «*md the same case with ? added 
 .*or the Nominative of Masculines. They are, except as to Accent, de- 
 clined like Nouns of the i.st Declension Isosyllabic, thus. 
 S. P. 
 
 yifovT ar yi^ovT u or 
 
 G, a - — — 
 
 A* « *-' - 
 
 V. a — ' — - 
 
 If* r^vyov a TWyov 
 
 G. ■ ■ ar — 
 
 A.— — ' a. % 
 
 v. — — 'a * 
 
 ac 
 
 or c/jq 
 
 iC 
 
 Or air 
 
 P. 
 
 
 *$ 
 
 or CilC 
 
 M 
 
 
 UG 
 
 or air 
 
 Z£ 
 
 Or air 
 
 N.« fKoy ot <pkoy ic, or cf/g 
 G. ar coy 
 
i34 
 
 2.d DECLENSION ISTPARISYLLABFC. 
 
 In the language of the Vulvar, Nouns of this Declension are very 
 variously declined and spelt. The following examples will suffice to 
 indicate the pronunciation. 
 
 S \. ? - 
 
 jf. yiw ts Or n yvuv i$ 
 
 Q, ~J VC t - QV 
 
 a. — - i or iv — ~ tc 
 
 V. — • / — * tff 
 
 $G$m in eu 5 as A%i&&fa 3 Iepeu; thus. 
 
 S. P. 
 
 G. 6*« e - <J* 
 
 A. E-a Or ay vc 
 
 v. *-a €?* 
 
 More by Syftezesis, thus, as SzyvAs, yoHtmf 
 *&V £«^su? eoveu; axatpeu; €aciA£V$«. 
 
 P. 
 
 uaSau; 
 
 N. 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 N. 
 
 £a<p 
 
 
 
 
 G. 
 
 
 
 
 
 A. 
 
 
 un 
 
 or 
 
 ilOLV 
 
 V. 
 
 
 eta 
 
 
 
 Adjectives in 0<j eta u 
 
 thus. , 
 
 
 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 F. 
 
 N- 
 
 £aG 
 
 J{ 
 
 
 £a& ax 
 
 G. 
 
 
 u* 
 
 
 uetg 
 
 A. 
 
 
 v or vr 
 
 ad 
 
 
 
 
 
 ***$ 
 
 V, 
 
 
 u 
 
 
 tlOL 
 
 F3LCRAI.. 
 
 N, 
 
 ^a9 
 
 tm 
 
 
 Ca0 e<«<£ 
 
 G. 
 
 
 acoy 
 
 
 &*&? 
 
 A, 
 
 
 tievt 
 
 
 it'MC 
 
 V, 
 
 
 flQI 
 
 
 t(ot7( 
 
 Ca0 
 
 UtL. 
 
 iioi 
 
1 35 
 
 . S: 
 i yym 
 No I or 
 ( ywcux 
 
 a 
 
 ANOMALIES, 
 
 P. 
 
 ywauii 
 / 
 
 % 
 
 ( yvvcuz 
 G. 1 or 
 
 ( yvvoctK 
 
 ace 
 
 
 yw&tK 
 
 <Jf 
 
 A* yvvouK 
 
 a 
 
 i 
 
 yviouK 
 
 ■iS 
 
 ( yvvas 
 v, < or 
 
 ( yVVQLlK 
 
 a 
 
 SINGULAR,, 
 
 yw&m 
 
 H 
 
 M. 
 
 Cr. AH 
 
 A. p'y 
 
 
 F. 
 
 7T4K AY) 
 MS 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 N= 7TQA hot 
 
 Go A&y 
 
 .<sro\ hat 
 
 KUV 
 
 Or h&$ TTQh 
 
 or Koui; 
 
r36 
 
 SECTION II. 
 
 MOODS AND TENSES. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 Of the two English Modes of translating this Tense , the first has 
 
 reference only to Action , Passion, or State of Being , indefinitely, 
 
 as a habit , without regard to Time; thus, lie writes well , he 
 
 reads badly, he laughs heartily, indicating habit, may be said of 
 
 persons whom we have not seen write , nor heard read or langh for 
 
 Months. I am writing , the second form , is necessary (i) whenever 
 
 we would express present action; and it is an error to say, as a 
 
 Foreigner very frequently does, I write (instead of 1 am. writing) 
 
 to your Brother, have you any thing to say. I sleep soundly indicating 
 
 habit is a very correct expression ; but I am sleeping soundly would 
 
 be ridiculous. 
 
 IMPERFECT TENSE, (l) 
 
 I have added to what many Grammarians give as peculiarly the 
 
 (i) Except in cases where, though in actual exercise, the act is con- 
 sidered as always equally complete, I hate, I believe, never I am 
 hating, I am believing. 
 
 (2) If a Name should designate what is named, our Verb has, in se- 
 veral instances, been often very unhappily managed, as must be evident 
 on comparing the force of our forms of Tenses with the Names 
 attached to them. I have been writing all day , though it seems to 
 ha\e the form of our perfect , may be , and very often is said, while 
 the act of writing is still in progress, anamust be translated with the 
 Modem Greek Imperfect as above , or with the present -ypaaio. I have 
 written to him this Week, indicates indeed a completed Action , but in 
 an unexpired , and therefore still present period of time , and yet have 
 written is given as the peculiar expression of what is called the Perfect 
 Tense. I wrote to him last Week indicates a perfectly past action in a 
 perfectly past period of, time , and yet most grammarians give wrote as 
 the peculiar expression of what they call the imperfect Tense. Another 
 error very perplexing to Foreigners, studying our Language, is that did 
 is very commonly in Grammars of Foreign Languages peculiarly an- 
 nexed as a translation to their Imperfect Tense only; whereas it 
 is equally applicable as a translation of their preterite, and is used by 
 us merely for emphasis , or to obviate an awkward arrangement in 
 negative and interrogative Phrases, in the same manner as do in the 
 present Tense. While in the treatment of our Verb such confusion 
 prevails, our Language must needs be difficult to Foreigners, and 
 their Languages much more difficult to us than they otherwise 
 would be. See page io5, line 19. 
 
... l3 7 
 
 form of our Imperfect, I wrote, a second form, I was writing, which, 
 alone gives a distinct Idea of the force of this Tense in Modern 
 Greek*, and in all the Languages of Europe derived from the Latin > 
 that of continuation , admirably expressed in the Greek Name 
 or Definition of this Tense itapiXTaTGw's. Modification of Jction and 
 not of Time is its main scope : it always implies habit , or con- 
 tinuation of action , whether the time be perfectly or imperfectly 
 past; thus, I have written or been writing ail day, and have not 
 finished, must be translated with the Greek Imperfect , or Conti- 
 nuative e<ypa^a oXviv triv vjj/ipav , y.at ^sv irsXeiwija. So , Cesar wrote 
 elegantly o Kaiaa? %pa^>s xaXS>$. Alexander conquered wherever he 
 appeared , 6 AXs^av^po? cftou^TjfiTe eWvetc, ivi^suas ; My Brother wrote 
 while I read, | v ^ g£tafftcCtt %*'£= 6 duh&oo's y.cu. v 
 
 To express distinct , completed actions , however numerous , un- 
 der precisely the same modifications of Time as above , it is neces- 
 sary to employ uniformly the Greek Aorist , I have written one , 
 two , three letters to day , fypa^a eva , £u«> , Tpia ^pa^ara orri[i.epov. 
 Cesar wrote the History of his own Campaigns , 6 Kai'aap e-ypa^s tw 
 fcop'.av to>v £K7pav=iwv too. Alexander conquered Darius , 6 A'Xs'l-av^poc 
 evixr,(T£ tov Aapeiov. He killed him in his flight -rov scoo'veusev ev &> i^Eu-ys. 
 This last example in which both the Imperfect and Aorist are used 
 is a striking illustration of the very different force of the two tenses, 
 As to Modification of Time , we have an advantage i) in not con- 
 founding a period of Time perfectly past with a period of Time yet 
 unexpired , as last year , with this year , I wrote last year , I have 
 written this year; but our advantage is of very inferior moment., 
 compared with the admirable Modern Greek distinction of continued 
 from uncontinued , completed action , in future , as well as past 
 time, in the Imperative and Subjunctive Moods , as well as the In- 
 dicative, (a) 
 
 (i) It is singular that though, like ours, the French and Italian Lan- 
 guages have separate forms of expression for these distinctions of 
 time , they are in numerous instances confounded ; thus , je lui ai 
 parle hier , gli ho parlato ieri , though not correct are common 
 expressions 9 yet I have spoken to him yesterday, a literal translation , 
 is inadmissible in English. 
 
 (?,) As specimens of this extreme nicety of distinction the follow- 
 ing examples may be useful for exercising the Mind of a foreigner 
 on a subject, which, however abstruse and recondite it may appear 
 Iq him, is comparatively familiar even to the Vulgar among the 
 Modern Greeks. Verbs that intrinsically include the idea of conti- 
 
PLUPERFECT, 
 
 This Tense, when used, which is but rarely , exactly answers 
 to ours of the same £fame; the Aorist is much more usual even in 
 an anterior , or relatively perfect sense ; as I had closed my letter 
 before he came in, eacppa-j'taa to -ypaujAa [aou ttsIv ^xar,. He had gained 
 the fort before his Enemy arrived, exupisuas to cppoopiev irplv cpOaavj 
 6 s'x9pcc tcu. This confusion in Modern Greek is certainly a defect ? 
 because the distinction is occasionally important. Thus , partly 
 through the defect of our own Verb, and partly through that of 
 the Modern Greek, the Aorist is to be translated, according to cir- 
 cumstances, sometimes with what is called our Imperfect, sometimes 
 with our Perfect , and sometimes with our Pluperfect. 
 
 FUTURE TZKSZ. 
 
 Declarative' Interrogative 
 
 I shall Shall I ? 
 
 Thou wilt Shalt thou ? 
 
 He will Will he ? 
 
 We shall Shall w e ? 
 
 Ye will Shall ye ? 
 
 They will Will they ? 
 
 The English Language , as it is universally spoken and written in the 
 South of Britain, has a decided advantage over all the Languages of the 
 South of Europe, both Ancient and Modern, in its expression of 
 simple futurity, (i) A little attention to the original meaning of the 
 Words « shall and will » will afford an easy solution of all the dif- 
 ficulties about their appropriate use, as auxiliaries , as well in inter= 
 
 nuation,such as Xj& , ^Wpipw are exceptions , and are used in the Aorist 
 when continuation is intended to be expressed: thus turoc 6 cv9?<dt?c? 6c; 
 Zt.gyi 7roXXous xpo'voj?, this Man will live many years, Qa £ia.Tpti}/a> <5y&> ^po'voys 
 tlq FaXX-av , I shall spend two years in France. 9a xaaa ^exa x? ovou » 
 9paTiwTr,?, I shall serve ten years as a Soldier and not 6a Ky 3 ^arptSw., 
 xa' ( avu. Verbs implying commencement, continuation, cessation, and 
 phrases implying habit naturally require Verbs dependent on, or 
 qualified by them to be in the continuative form, as a.cyj£u, axo- 
 Xtu8ei, srauei Ma 7pa<p7j he is beginning , C07itinui?ig, ceasing to write f 
 and not v <x 7pa^' 9 -jtostsi eva i-upwpi vx xo'tt-y) xaXa. A Razor should, 
 cut well \ and not V a xo§$. For further illustration of this very curious 
 subject , see David's Parallel of the Ancient and Modern Greek Lan- 
 guages. P. 92 — 99. 
 
 (1) See Mitford on Harmony in Language, 
 
139 
 rogative as in declarative Phrases. Will originally was , and , when., 
 nsed as an independent Verb , still is expressive of volition; shall , 
 no longer an independent verb, was expressive of obligation or 
 necessity, and indicated a dtity , wish, or intention to compel, (i) As 
 no man can be supposed to force his own will , when speaking, or 
 writing of himself , shall therefore , as an auxiliary, can have no 
 s.mbiguity, but must have a simply future sense : as again no one 
 can exercise volition for another, will , when used as an auxiliary, 
 is free from ambiguity , and has merely a predictive sense. The 
 reason for the use of shall in the os/ 1 Person in interrogative Phrases 
 is plain , for , without emphasis , the very act of asking a question 
 is inconsistent with the idea of an intention to compel the person 
 questioned, though not with that of an intention to compel a third 
 person, therefore shalt thou ? shall you} are questions about simple 
 foturity , whereas shall he ? shall they ? are questions implying an 
 intention to compel, (2) 
 
 The Modern Greek has no anterior, relative , or compound future 
 in general use , which is certainly another great defect. The Greeks 
 sometimes indeed form one compounded of the future of £x© and the 
 Aorist Subjunctive of the conjugated verb: See page no, § 6, 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 As this Mood necessarily implies futurity , without considering 
 the Modifications of continued and uncontinued Action, it is impos- 
 sible to understand the appropriate use of the two Greek Tenses, 
 particularly referring them to the Tenses similarly named in the 
 Indicative Mood: The Present is confined to action etc. , to be con- 
 tinued , the Aorist to action etc., not to be continued,. 
 
 (1) Whenever Volition on the part of the Speaker, or his intention to 
 compel the Person or Persons spoken to or of is included in the Mo- 
 dern Greek or other For *lga Form of the Future, instead of the 1 .st 
 English , or Simple - future Form, the 2.d English Form page 47 ? 
 must be used. This is equivalent to, Sing, i.st lam determined as 
 to my writing , 2.d I am or we are determined as to thy writing: 
 3.d , as to his or her writing - Plur. i.st as to our writing 2.d as to 
 your writing 3.d as to their writing. 
 
 (2) Will I ? Will we ? are preposterous Solecisms , because it is 
 absurd to ask others about our own volition. Wilt thou ? Will ye? are 
 questions about the willingness of the person spoken to. When , 
 without emphasis , as in writing , we ask about a third persons 
 willingness, we either by some adjunct , or by resolving the verb \ 
 make it clear that will is not used as an auxiliary , bwt as an independ- 
 ent Verb: is he willing ? will he be willing? etc, 
 
i4o 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE, 
 
 Considering that relative futurity, under some modification or other, 
 is also always necessarily implied in this Mood , the limitation of the 
 Tenses in Modern Greek to two is easily accounted for , precision as 
 to the Modification of Action being, under such circumstances , by far 
 the most material. When hypothesis is referred to past time , the 
 indicative answers every valuable purpose ; as indeed it seems to do 
 ■with us ; for we hare no thing to distinguish our pluperfect Indicative 
 from the more general form of our relative , or anterior perfect 
 Subjunctive , « though 1 had been possessed » equivalent to should 
 have been possessed , See Note to page 107. Even when referred to 
 future time , we may substitute the future Indicative for the present 
 or perfect Subjunctive, both having a future sense ; thus , for 
 « if lie come » « if he shall come » for « if he have supped before ten » 
 « if he shall have supped before ten. » 
 
 SIGNS OF HYPOTHESIS. 
 
 I have given may and should only as auxiliary signs iu this Mood ; 
 for, after a close examination, it appears to me, that , in hypothetic 
 phrases , all the others given as signs , when purely signs, distinguished 
 from independent verbs, are resolvable into should. Even may when 
 purely a sign of hypothesis is always resolvable into shall or should. 
 This seems to me for an Englishman translating into other languages 
 ihe readiest mode of detecting a sign , or intrinsic part of the con- 
 jugated Verb , ( i. e. ) its being always reducible into shall or should. 
 In hypothetic Phrases, when not so resolvable, the others indicate the 
 hypothesis as merely possible or probable , and if translated generally 
 require some adverb equivalent to perhaps , or some independent 
 verb, as it is possible or probable that I shall etc. , that I should etc. 
 In this restriction I , of course limit, myself to the hypothetic part of 
 the conditional Phrase ? whether it be placed first or last. Where 
 nothing of the hypothetic or contingent character appears , it requires 
 siot a thought, to translate may or might as independent Verbs 3 
 expressive of ability, permission, inclination , etc. Should, whenever 
 it includes the idea of duty , is an independent Verb, equivalent to 
 < ought to, » and must be so translated. 
 
 CONDITIONAL FUTURE. 
 
 Declarative Interrogative 
 
 I should Should I 
 
 Thou wouldst Shouldst thou - 
 
 He would Would he 
 
 We should Should we 
 
 Ye would Should ye 
 
 They would Would they 
 
The above is , in "all respects , analogous with the simple future , 
 and is the correct form for expressing necessary consequence , 
 whenever the hypothesis is expressed with a past tense. Might 
 if not resolvable into should , implies that the consequence is 
 merely possible or probable. Could , when properly a sign, and 
 not a catachresis _, or abuse of Idiom, is optative. Can, in correct lan- 
 guage, is never a mere sign of Tense, but is always equivalent to am^ 
 or should be able, etc. 
 
 COMPOUND CONDITIONAL FUTURE. 
 
 English is farmed by adding have , to the above , as I should 
 have , etc. The want of distinct forms for the sense of tins expres- 
 sion and of shall have is perhaps the greatest defect in the Modern 
 Greek Verb, (i) See P. 107, § G, and note: also P. 11 1 , § 7, 
 and note 2. The last line of the Note refers to the Paragraph 10 
 lines above Rule 6 , beginning « When iVav » , the figure 6 being mis 
 placed. 
 
 (1) Except the loss of the Ancient Infinitive and Participles, so 
 singularly precise with respect to Modification of Time and Action, 
 and so commodiously , and so gracefully blending themselves in 
 substantive and adjective forms with the current of the most har- 
 monious Periods. 
 
t4a 
 
 iosgSe&SSi 
 
 DIALOGUES. 
 
 AIA^OFGL 
 
 I. 
 
 -L/o you speak Greek? 
 
 A little (i) 5 very little. 
 
 How long (is it) since you began. 
 
 Neatly six Months. 
 
 Who's (a) your Master ? 
 
 One cf the Deacons of the Public 
 School. 
 
 Is he a good Scholar ? 
 
 I think go, but I'm not a compe- 
 tent judge. 
 
 Does he know Hellenic ? 
 
 They say so : lie is one of OEcono- 
 raus' (3) Pupils ; and, being a 
 Man of application, and of good 
 intellect , lie must have made 
 considerable progress. 
 
 What is OEconomus' Opinion of 
 him? 
 
 He speaks highly of him , and 
 recommended him to me. 
 
 How do you think I speak ? 
 
 Tolerably well for the time; but yon. 
 still with difficulty pronounce 
 the aspirated consonants, and 
 
 A. 
 
 O: 
 
 ML1EITE pMfAcuxx ; ( «yp atxwa ) 3 
 "OXrpv, /.C{xu.a:Tl , kcu.u.%T'XM. 
 
 Airo wots ra apyjcsrs ; 
 Etviu T.zzi tto'j t'Z JJOjVc.;. 
 Ucio; eivat. 6 A\<^ao-;taXc'<; car. 
 f 'Eya; £ia>co>c; d-ro to sr^sOiCicv 
 
 Evat ivpoxc{i.p,evc? ; 
 
 Sroy^c^sa , c) x sv elp.ai E ■■.■/.: -^ I '. 
 
 VQS Va XflVM. 
 
 H?£upE'. i/.XY<vix.«; 
 Ai^ouv otfTa v^eOpe:*' ifaffil 
 rfft' tou Oi/Civo;/.0'j, y.at eirst^ £tv->; 
 
 wet va eivpoy.o^s naXa. 
 
 Tt Xs'^ei OtxcWf/o? wept kOt: ; 
 
 Tov ijTatveT, xal p.s tsv Itfis-tfWi 
 
 riib; aa? cpaiverai va oa'.Xo ; 
 H; 7rp6? tov xaipuv, apx,£~;. 
 
 (^'JCTX0A£U£C9S a540p,7) V3C irpGtpe'pSTS T«- 
 
 &a.a£a. oup-^wva, xat a^aXASTc cu^voc 
 
 (1) See Note Page 4. Type confines me to one Accent for the 
 English, but that w ill answer my object , indicating to a Foreigner 
 the obligatory position of the English Accent generally, with or. t any 
 reference to its nicer modifications in refined elocution. The few 
 slight liberties I have taken in the Translation for the purpose of 
 making the Phrases tolerably idiomatic will very little interfere wi^h . 
 a due appreciation of the Greek Words severally- 
 
 (2) See Note Page 10. 
 
 (3) Pronounced OEconomusis, 
 
are 6ften wrong In Accent : you 
 paroxytonise, (i) as the Vulgar 
 say. ( i. e. you. throw the Ac- 
 cent on the penult. ) 
 All that will correct itself with time, 
 I ought for the moment to be 
 satisfied with being able to speak 
 so as to be understood. I wish 
 no more. 
 
 II. 
 
 Good Day. 
 Good Day to you. 
 How do you do my Friend ? How 
 is your Health ? how are you ? 
 Very well thank God. God foe 
 
 praised. 
 Where ( whither ) are you going* 
 Into the Country. 
 What business have you ( what 
 
 have you to do ) there ? 
 I mean to pass a few days there, 
 
 as I have now nothing to do , 
 
 and wish a little recreation after 
 
 my late close application to 
 
 Business ? 
 Is there any Society ? 
 There are several Friends of mine, 
 
 with whom , I walk out during 
 
 the day; and in the evening we 
 
 play at Cards. 
 How can you walk during the 
 
 day , hot as it is. 
 It is not so very hot : indeed the 
 
 day before yesterday it was 
 
 cool. 
 Have you then a different climate 
 
 there from what we have here. 
 
 We are suffocated with the heat 
 
 here in Town; how can it be 
 
 cool there ? 
 
 l43 
 wept toy? tovou? , xa{xvEf£ wapo|uT&- 
 va , K&Ocdc Xe'-youv ct ^uaavot. 
 
 'OX* Taura ^topOo'vcvrat pi tov 
 xaip'&v , x5CTa to Trxpov rzpimt v'ft 
 eu^apt^YjSw, av rlp-at xaXo; va 6p.iX6 
 et$ Tpo'-nrov ottou va (te Jt~aT*Xap.(3a- 
 veuv. As-y £yit5> aXXo. 
 
 B. 
 
 K«X rjAspa ff«?; 
 
 K.aXn era? rpipa, 
 
 Ti xap-vet* <p(Xs; wS; ejj-e'is stj rV> 
 07c tav aou ; ttu? ey^et? ; 
 
 KaXa 9 ^o£a sot 6 0,«oV 5 ©s§s 
 va v/r\ £o'£av. 
 
 not* -??v)^aiv5t?j 
 
 Et's tA x w P t0 '« 
 
 Ti v« xap."/)? 6)661-5 
 
 Ey^w ff)cc cov va 7r£pa«Tw fispucaT? 
 XptEpat? , eret^ rtiipa <£ev s/w <^gu~ 
 Xetat;, jcal GiAto va ^ejecupac^ xop,-* 
 jAart obeo t&u; airepacxpivou; xo'irous, 
 
 Etva't cuvTpojpia exel ; 
 
 Eivat p.epi%oi ^kXgi, (xs t'ou; 6370''- 
 cu; lu&ptffaT-S tt,v iQpu'pav , )ca! to 
 Ppa^u -rcai£op.ev yapTta. 
 
 H5»? Yiu.'rcopetTs *al irspMrttteiTi-T^v 
 ■fluipav {jig to'<tv>v £^r,v ; 
 
 'A pi £ev etvat tco>Xt\ Se'ctt , ftacXt- 
 £U iirpo^s? ^tov Jtai ^poffia. 
 
 "AXXo etvat Tayjx to xXt'pta ix.il y.xl 
 aXXo s£u> ; z\% x-m y_©pav Trvt-p'p.sSx 
 airo Tiav fcauotv, ww; va Vivat opoctK 
 
 (1) Where Words of more than one syllable are not accented the 
 Accent is either on the Capital Letter or the letter y, 
 
*44 
 
 So it is ; come and see ; you will 
 pass your time agreeably : you 
 •will meet with real friends, who 
 love you with all their souls. 
 
 My Friend r I like Men's Society 
 very well ; but that alone will 
 iiotdo; I should like to have, 
 a few Ladies among them ; or 
 the Country is to me a Desert. 
 
 Dont be alarmed : you'll meet with 
 Ladies : Do you think we are 
 so many Monks , and live in 
 solitude. We have , among the 
 rest , a Lady of Constantinople, 
 (i) a late arrival, who is the ad- 
 miration of us all, for her ta- 
 lents , excellent education, and 
 graceful manners. 
 
 Is she handsome? 
 
 Not very ; She's little famed in 
 that respect : Beauty is not her 
 charm; but she's not plain; her 
 countenance is rather pleasing. 
 
 That's not enough for me , my 
 Friend. A Woman to be per- 
 fect must have Wit and Beauty 
 united : in my opinion , this 
 latter is the essential ( the chief 
 excellence ) of the Sex. 
 
 You talk at random, like a hare- 
 brained boy: however come with 
 me , and , after you have seen 
 her , you may judge. ( for 
 yourself ) Grace of expression 
 emanating from an amiable 
 cast of disposition, and a highly 
 cultivated Mind often throw a 
 chann over the Person. 
 
 Eivat. djioi^ , ska. va iSr,; , bi)Ati 
 iTspKdei rccXXa xxXa* fis'Xei$ sibsi 91- 
 Xou; £'!)a/-p'.v£i? , ol otcoToi a' ayxTrouv 
 sH oXfl; tgiv ?rj; tyr/jiZ. 
 
 <I>.'Xe , tou? cptXou; tou; v/ja si? 
 TfoXXflv uttoXytKv , ttXt,v £iv p.s obi- 
 vouv , >cai aya-nrco va GUvsvpsivoijv jca: 
 oXi*yats cpiXat;* ei S~l ar, VJ i&yji ^ 
 tpaivefat waav ipviata. 
 
 ' Ewota (icj, OiXet? ejpst. k%\ •yov**" 
 xs;. 8appsT? ?:a>; stueQa xaXc'-^pct , 
 scat £cuasv si; ttiv (xovaljiay ; 5*&gu.sv 
 xi' 6'Xa; |/.iav TCcXiTiffcav. etvat veocpsp- 
 p.£vv5 xal ttqv 9aujj,a'C&p.£v oXot <^^x 73 
 -ttvcUjaoc T7,;, ttiv xaXwv TTfl; avxTpo ?.'/.', 
 
 Eivat Jtat copaia ; 
 
 "Oja to'cov , Kara roijfa <^iv eu- 
 tS'oxip.si" •« tbpatOTYi; £sv slvai to ttoo" 
 Tircy.i rr,; , ttXtv <^ev stvai Zoyvy/n' 
 to TbOOfJMTTo'v TV); aaXt^a sivai euapetrov. 
 
 Auto ah jas <p9xvsi> a^sXcps. icps- 
 TTit [ua -yuvai/.a , c^to. va r,vai evtc- 
 Xr,? , va Ivo'vti xat to -nvstijAa xai tt.v 
 s'j^oocpiav' sttskH ei; touto to tsXs'j- 
 TaTov -iTpoTSpnjxa, ci>vt<ra.Tai xara t'/.v 
 -;vo)»j.r,v u.ou, oXvj ri ous(a tou SvjXuxoy 
 -ys'vouc. 
 
 A?.V &{/.tXsT? WC CppOVl^O?, 77X05C fc>5 
 
 Vs'o§ eXacepofAuaXos' o>; to'ctov IXa p;a£y, 
 jcai orav tt.v 1^5 ftsXee; *p?vei. *H 
 
 X«P*S twv Xo'ywv icn^a^oucra a-b t-. v ,v 
 xaXocriivyiv rvis ^X^*) xal tv,v tsXsio- 
 
 TYiT'a tou voo; , ^'ivsTat cu^va <toXig- 
 p.05 Tot> <7(oaaT0;. 
 
 (1) Long Words in English , as in Greek , have necessarily two 
 strongly accented Syllables. I shall, as in Greek, mark only \h^ 
 more prominent of the two. 
 
III. 
 
 Heartily welcome , Friend : pray 
 walk in. 
 
 I salute you. ( the English never 
 use such an expression , but , 
 always , instead , employ some 
 specific salutation ; as, Good 
 day , I'm glad to see you , 
 I hope I see you well. ) 
 
 Sit down. Boy , bring the Gentle- 
 man a pipe, and tell your Mis- 
 tress to send in cakes and Coffee. 
 
 I am delighted to see you. I've 
 not exehang'd a word with 
 you for several days. 
 
 Do you bring us any News ? 
 
 Shocking , a dreadful Business. 
 
 What now? 
 
 IV, 
 
 Have you made the Bed. 
 
 I have made it. ( Yes , Sir ). Sec 
 Page 121, § 14. 
 
 Give me my Tobacco Bag , and 
 bring me a light 
 
 With pleasure. 
 
 This Tobacco's very strong , 
 where did you get ( buy ) it. 
 
 Where I always get it. Is n't it 
 good? 
 
 It's good ; but I'm afraid't'will 
 affect my head. 
 
 And suppose it does ( should ) 
 a little, that will do you no 
 harm , as you are going im- 
 mediately to bed. 
 
 Bring me a cup ( glass J of water. 
 
 Will you have wine also ( with it.) 
 
 No : bring me rather a glass of 
 spirits to mix with the water. 
 
 As you please. 
 
 Have you been to the Tailor. 
 
 I have ( Yes, Sir J. 
 
 Has he finbh'd my Coat? 
 
 1 45 
 
 r. 
 
 KaXu<g opiaste _, ^'.Xe 9 xoTuaacTS 
 pica. 
 
 2«; x,atg6T£v 
 
 Ka9t<jETe. Ilat^ia , ep*'psTS t*? hCs- 
 <Y£vs(a; tou evct t^i^tcouj^j xa! eiffeTS 
 •tH<; xupd; v« seiXr, to fXux$ jcal tq* 
 xacpcps. 
 
 . Xaipoaai va ©a; iS L oi f £%& fo'saic 
 fyipaiS a^'oy £sv a*; wj/tiXyjaa. 
 
 Mac ^pepfite TiicoT5 (xxvs'va ) vs'ovz 
 Tpoftspa xal ypura irpa^xra, 
 Ti naXtv ; 
 
 A. 
 
 "Eq-ptods? to xpeSSxu ; 
 To e^pcoaa. 
 
 Awffl [/.OU TO XaTCVOTFOU^t , y.at 
 
 cpspe p.ta tjptoTtd. 
 
 Ms-a xap&c 
 
 Aut8? 6 xarcvo; eivai woXXa a^u<-' 
 «ou tov e-rc^pe; ; 
 
 Ottou tov we'pveo wavTa" £ev eivai 
 r, xaXo? ; 
 
 RaAo; eivat, irXviv ^o(3cup.ai u^tvgjc 
 pi £aXiaip. 
 
 A; ok; SaXiavi xcp.f/.aTaxt* <5sv 
 ca? xdpei xkxov) eirei^vj OeXtT£ ice- 
 «et ( 'KXa-yiaaet ) djfce'owj. 
 
 <l>e'pe u,ia xounra vepo. 
 Op:^£T£ xat xpaai ; 
 O^t" xaXXTjTspa va p.1 ©e"p>i; |v« 
 crcTtjpaxi paxl, va to dvaxaTcocw us 
 
 T9 V&gfi, 
 
 0,ti d-fowraTe. 
 EwJfys; elg to# pa'©T»iv ^ 
 'Ei^a. 
 ivreXei«<?s to poy^o p.cu$ 
 
Kot yet ; but he says he'll btbag 
 
 it to morrow at noon. 
 Did you<see it ? What does it want. 
 He has not yet put on the buttons, 
 nor are the button holes made. 
 C There's no believing the fellow J. 
 The fellow's all falsehood. He 
 had promis'd to finish it in 
 three days , and a week has 
 pass'd without his having yet 
 brought ( come to bring ) it 
 me. What excuse did he make. 
 He says , as usual, ( the old story ) 
 that he has not had time; there 
 have been two festivals , and he 
 has not been able to work ^cn- 
 siantly. 
 Be it so ( Well , well ). Tell me : 
 has the person we were speak- 
 ing of been ? 
 Whom do you. mean. That Jew 
 
 ti whom you owe Money. 
 The same, to be sure. What other? 
 Yes ; he has; and he waited some 
 time : he went away out of 
 humour. 
 Burn him: hang him: so much 
 as he has robb'd me of 
 (made by me J with his exor- 
 bitant usury ; but however, 
 having once agreed ( passed 
 my vord J I'll give you the 
 money to morrow , and you 
 shall go and pay him. 
 You'll do well. 
 
 'Tis time I sbou'd go to bed : light 
 the night lamp, and take away 
 the Candle. 
 Good Night, (i) 
 
 ^spet ebpicv to f/.esr,u.£3t. 
 
 To et#e ? ; rt' Xeiws* ; 
 
 Aev EJ3xXev ax:'u.Y) tx xcuarrts , 
 H*» at BnXecau; <$iv slvai xau.wu.-va'.;. 
 
 ACito; 6 (XvQpwflres oXcv tj/E'j£iTat" 
 pi tvfj. &TC(xy^c6^ va to reXstoisr, efe 
 TpsI; fcuipai; , xwspxffE pa e^cjix- 
 $X , -AX: OtJCOfAKl £ev ^X0e va u.t zi 
 
 Ae'-)ftt to cjv£tOi<Tfi,£vov , ira>; ^ev 
 ei^e xxip3v* rrav xxt (foe c^cXxt* , 
 xxi <£ev niar^cos rcavTa va Sovkiuris 
 
 M r;vxt. n/c ftrj , *?X6ew 5 X^-a- 
 
 pe*e; ; 
 
 ITotcv Xlre , exsTvov t4v 'EjSpaCov 
 
 et; tov owotov xpetxrciTE itxpauS'ej. 
 
 Aiirbv , p'c'Caix* d;xs -rroiov aXXov , 
 
 MxXt?x f,)Ai , xxt ax? iirpo'ffjAEive 
 
 xaa7r,'(T?iv obxv' e^j^ 6 *axoeii£Xpi<ryi* 
 
 <£cuTtx vi tov xx<J*y 4 * a* i^rf? vi 
 x;v)avia9v)" To'aa jx.e exXe^e pi t» 
 
 ^iXOOOOV T0!i Ti UrapScXudv' ETTEt^ll 
 
 epos e'(Tj^.^uvvi«a pux <^:pa , auptc* 
 g:u £££0 waps^es *** 6* fray?; »£ 
 
 tov ttXtpuar,;. 
 
 0a xxu.£TE xaXx. 
 Twpx irps'rcEi va rrXay.xcai* avttjis 
 to xavrlXt , xxi irxps t6 (pis e1|». 
 
 KaX-fl vuxrx ca;. 
 
 (i) I here relinq ;ish MonsJ David's Dialogues for several reasons^ 
 and , among others , because the Phrases are generally too long, too 
 political, and too marked with National prejudices and Antipathies, 
 to be suited to an elementary Work like this, His Anti-Anglican] 
 
I. My Lady. 
 
 P. What is it? (What's the matter.) 
 
 I. A Visit. 
 
 P. Fresh congratulations? 
 
 t Yes, My Lady. 
 
 P. Did n' t ( i ) 1 tell you, I wou'd n't 
 see any one to day. 
 
 !•. Six are gone away , but the 
 seventh wont go. 
 
 P. And who may he be ? 
 
 I. Sir W Arnold. 
 
 P. Precisely the Man that annoys 
 me beyond every other : beg 
 him to excuse me, as I have 
 an Engagement , and can't 
 see him to day. 
 
 I. Yes my Lady. 
 
 PHRASES FRCni PAMELA. 
 
 PAMELA AND ISAAC. 
 
 i. MmH. 
 
 ifq 
 
 .epov <?ev 
 y 
 $h 6s'Xst mx 
 
 IX. Tl eivai ; 
 
 I. Mia i-Kia*.vU$; 
 
 II. IlaXiv 3£atpe;rt«rjjL9' 
 
 I. Nat- Mftje& 
 
 II. Asv aoi (a) elira £u era 
 8s'Xo> va «5"£^9a) xavs'va 
 
 I. "E-£v) E^uvav, 6 ecJV'tto; 
 avay^opr'ari. 
 
 IT. Kai T15 eivai auro'j ; 
 
 J. 'O I1H78US Ejvo'X^, 
 
 II. EfceTvoJ |xa>.t<7a , otvm u.'evoj^.eT 
 
 Orrb xxfte aXXov. H-tys tcu va jig 
 ffyurcaS •»}<??! , S'ixtI e'^co UTto'8£ai\> 
 CT7iu a iuti I'K'Cv. . xai cniu££&v $ki 
 rp.7Top6 v'a tov u;vii5"e^8<i. 
 I. Nai K-jpa. 
 
 LORD B» AND SIR. W. A. 
 
 W. Well met. 
 
 B. Stay, 
 
 W. Eh ! let me go : L.d Arthur 
 
 does not alarm me. 
 B. Tell me plainly. 
 W. I neither want courage spirit 
 
 nor dexterity. 
 R Answer. 
 
 E. KaXri avrauoatSi 
 
 Bi 2/raaoa. 
 
 E. E, 5<pej us va UTrsyw. e 6 'Aprcl'p 
 
 £ev p,s c&opiTst. 
 
 B. Elite' UO'J EtXtJCptVCO? 
 
 E-. Asv ucti XetTCci u.r,ri x,a,a$ 
 
 Tcveiiuaj urire giu^E^io'™;. 
 B* A7T0J4pt8y)Tt. 
 
 , ur.rg 
 
 Spleen could be very advantageously answered, if it we .e at ail 
 worthy of an Answer. I have much too high an opinion of the 
 Author to think he would in a second Edition repeat it. He wrote 
 in haste , and seemingly hi anger > and he wrote in Greece , at 
 a very critical moment , though he published in Paris. This may 
 excuse him ; but would not excuse my re-echo , which could do 
 him no honor. Even if competent instead of attempting additional 
 Dialogues of my own , I should prefer offering as I shall the Greek 
 Language of Greeks , short Phrases from two Comedies, the last, 
 Moliere's Avare translated by OEconomus. The few Phrases of a Ser- 
 vant, at the close , I have selected for the purpose of giving some 
 idea of the great irregularity of the Vulgar in spelling. 
 
 (1) Pronounced didunt, woudunt. 
 
 (a) The Genitive would be more in conformity with present usage. 
 
i48 
 
 W. I who have travelled. . ; . . E> T-vi 1^3 IrS&hjea ■» * 5 ?' 
 
 B. Answer me. B. 'Arioz^Mri (tot. 
 
 IV. What would you wish me to E. E15 rt fls'Xeis va est gscxgiO^ 
 
 answer ? 
 What I asked. 
 
 B. E.*fj 0, Tt c£ Eparwa. 
 
 A?7D HIS SISTER. 
 
 B. I bad better speak to Lady Dr 
 she will communicate to Sir W T ; 
 in my Name what I intended 
 to say to him. 
 
 r.I. My Lord , may I come m ? 
 B. Walk in. 
 
 II, Are you willingwe should have 
 
 a little conversation to day ? 
 
 B. Yes ; indeed , I want to have 
 
 some talk with you. 
 M. You seem discomposed. 
 B. With reason. 
 M. I feel for you ( I enter into your 
 feelings ) Pamela seems, from 
 the moment she changed situa- 
 tion , inclined to change her 
 manner also. 
 B. Wnatrea on have you to speak 
 
 to her d re vantage ? 
 M. S : r W has made me acquainted 
 
 with every thing. 
 B. Sir W is a blockhead. 
 M. Mv "^ephew is not to be thus 
 
 contemptuously treated. 
 B My Wife m st be treated more 
 
 respectfu ]y. 
 M. If you do not keep her within 
 proper bounds , you'll find 
 her a Woman like the rest 
 
 of J/.?. 
 
 B. Her conduct is in no way 
 
 blamable. 
 M. Prudent Women allow no room 
 
 for suspicion, 
 B. What suspicion can any one 
 
 have other? 
 
 B. KaXX^rspa va cixtXv'cw pi t^y 
 T-IG.zH Aaupnv. Aurr) 6s'Xci aver 
 
 KapaXtifvjv ra e'ea ziya jvap.?,* 
 
 M. MiXc'p^s, g /ta T/ - v a£ £lxv va eX$t>; 
 
 E. 'kikQ£. 
 
 M. 'A-yaTra; aqpepov va cuvcpXiWtt- 
 
 B. Nat , p.aXi<ra i%& xpe-av va 6p.i= 
 Xrco) f/.a£r, c.-j. 
 
 M. Moi3 qpatvtffat ff'JYX' 05 ^* 73 ?* 
 
 B. Ms <S\xaiev. 
 
 M. 2s ^•jty.rraSu. H' IXaus'Xx , a?' 
 cu Y"XXa|c xsttaVacv , <patvETat 
 6Tt Gs'Xet v' dfoagy xai to :$*(<. 
 
 B. ITsiav atr'av ey^eis <ha va t«v 
 
 M. O KajSa; d^; {/.' ETrXrpocpo'pvjcs* 
 
 B15 ra Trav-a. 
 B. o KtfPaXis'pvi? elvat jjiwpo$. 
 M. O avs^io; fjuc* £sv fejte'jret vi 
 
 jcaracpp;v^-a{ outw?. 
 B. V«v -pvaTxa' pou izpi-zi va tviv 
 
 rijiars. 
 M Av ^cv t-^v xparr'a^ ei? tq xa- 
 
 6xxc< 
 
 , sivai xat aurvj «v/,m? >;«,*■ 
 
 8«$ jcat at Xoirai. . 
 
 B. H ^a"yu«p rns <5ev elvai a;tcx«» 
 JJ. Al opdvijici 'pvalxe; <?gv <£i<^ov* 
 E. FEsiav Ottc^xv fcpsopet rtvi; v* 
 
$f. She is too intimate with Lord M, 
 
 Arthur. 
 B. Lord Arthur's my Friend. B* 
 
 M. Ah ! in such matters Friends M, 
 have more in their power than 
 Enemies. 
 
 3. I know his Character. B. 
 
 M. And might he not deceive you? M 
 
 B. You wish to rob me of my peace B* 
 of Mind. 
 
 M. I am jealous of your honour. m, 
 
 B. Have you any good reason to B. 
 make me feel alarmed about 
 my honor, 
 
 M. Sir W told me. ) M 
 
 % Dou't speak to me of Sir W, B. 
 I have no opinion of his pru- 
 dence, nor do I believe what 
 he says. 
 
 31. Allow me to communicate an M- 
 idea of my own. 
 
 B. Well! let's have it. B. 
 
 M. Do you remember with what M« 
 zeal and earnestness Lord 
 Arthur dissuaded you from 
 marrying Pamela. 
 
 B. I do ; but what would you infer B, 
 from the dissuasions of my 
 excellent Friend. Were they 
 not well founded. 
 
 M. Brother , Lord A rthur's Argu- M 
 ments might have done very well 
 elsewhere. But in London a 
 Kobleman loses nothing by 
 marrying a psnnyless Girl, if 
 of reputable character. I was 
 not incensed against her , on 
 account of her supposed mean- 
 nets of condition ; but was 
 displaced solely with that 
 lurking ambition, which I fancy 
 I see in her. Lord Arthur , 
 not being related to ns, could 
 
 149 
 
 "Exec -nrapa ?toX ? j Gappo; as to* 
 r*'>.op^sv 'ApToup. 
 L> MiXo'p^oi; 'AfTCup slvat cp:Xo$ 
 aoo» 
 
 *E , st; 7rapo'u,otx rcpa-yaxTx r A 
 yiXo'. ^uvavvai rcepicoo'TEpov a^o* 
 too; sy6p&6?. 
 
 rvtopt^to tov vjxpa/.rvipa tou„ 
 Asv iQ/.-opoijGi-: va araT'r,9ri; ; 
 2u £«T£ts va as xawoTj; va yaao* 
 tvjv i\a'jyj.x» aou. 
 Ms uovst £ia TTiv Tijpa* aoy. 
 'Ey^ei; xavs'va -ntGavdv Xcfyoii £tx 
 va as KtxaY); va cpo£>Y)8u) <ha rnv 
 Ttar.v aov ; 
 
 O Ka,6aXis'p-/i; aou si7rsv .... 
 M'rt jaou ava<ps'pv); t5v Ka(3aXis' a 
 priv* <^sv s^tt £t? xaaaiav uito- 
 Xyi^iv va (poovr.aaTa vcu, »ai $kv 
 sw^euw si; tcj; Xc^gu? too. 
 Na aou siTva) eva s&xaaaov, s'tcgu 
 sVaaa. 
 
 Nat, eiife aou tgv. 
 'EvGoasTaxj pi tto'gyiv a7?GU<Wiv 9 
 ical as 7vc'(j-flv ^uvaaiv 6 MiXo'p- 
 £0$ 'Aqtquq ai lTCO)pa*''v.st va an 
 vuacpsoSr,; tyjv HaasAcv J 
 Nai to svGyaouaai. *AXXa t.i ana- 
 wepatvsts octto tou; a7>rrp.e7i:TUcous 
 Xo'^cu; tou fcaXoy acj {ptXcu ; Asv 
 yjaav apa ^e OcasXuoas'yoi si; to 
 <^ijcaicv ; 
 
 'A^sXcps acu> 0! Xo'^'gi tou 'ApToi^ 
 ^a77opoyaav va ^yat xpu'ctact si; 
 ocaXov , To'ttov. Ei; ttiv Ao'v^pav 
 eva; Ka^aXispn; £sv yavsi tiim- 
 ts; , av vua^suOvi aiav irTwy^v 9 
 aXXa Tiarias'vnv xo'pnv. Ifyw £sv 
 *j5^ava>cTouv xar autifs <^a :i» 
 (»7foTi9su.evYiv suTs'Xetav tt,; tv'/jH$ 
 Tvi? , a 4 ari sXu-oup//)v jto'vov <^ia 
 
 EJCSiyVlV TV1V Xip'JTTTYlV XSVO^C^^.V , 
 
 c-rrou aoi icpaivevo va pX'-To E15 
 auTr.v. o" MiXo'p^o; 'Aprcup, «; 
 
net enter into this. Indeed if 
 we reflect on his earnestness 
 then, and his intimacy now , 
 we may believe that he per- 
 suaded you to relinquish her 
 from his desire to make her 
 1 is own. 
 
 H. You are exceedingly acute. 
 
 M. Believe me I'm very seldom 
 out ( mistaken. ). 
 
 B. 1 hope for once you are. 
 
 M. I hope I may be ; but I think 
 I'm not. 
 
 P. 
 
 My Lord I am here at your 
 command. 
 
 A Style like this no longer suits 
 the lips of a Wife. 
 Well then, my dearHusland, 
 ■what are your Commands ? 
 I have determined on gratifying 
 you. 
 
 Your whole study is to load me 
 with favours and kindness. In 
 ■what way are you now think- 
 ing to afford me pleasure ? 
 We will in two hours, set out 
 for Lincolnshire. 
 In two hours ! 
 
 Yes, get every thing ready that 
 you yourself may want , and 
 leave the rest to Mad. e Jevre. 
 Alas ! he minks no longer of 
 my Father. ( Aside ) * 
 She is confused ; it seems to 
 displease her. ( she does not 
 seem pleased. ) ( Aside ) 
 . My Lord. 
 
 . You have changed your Mind, 
 about leaving Town 
 . I shall always do whatever 
 you direct, (as you please,) 
 , She awakens my suspicions. 
 , I have n't courage to give 
 him uneasiness 
 
 r.ux;, $kv e^ivxrc va - axzybf, fa 
 T&touTcv" iixlizx sV C'/as9yu..<-v 
 tov tots rr:'Scv TO), 3C0.1 TO r:x'Av 
 
 p.Ej 6-t qi srre^e va r«v d'fr.ar,**, 
 
 <ha tViv £7ri6ju.iav tgO va ttjv 
 
 dir&JCTrlcTi auTo';. 
 
 O vcu^aoy eTvai %k$k iroXin 6i$s 
 
 fiisc6ai fiou 8t: oXi-fai; yopa^i 
 
 c<j3aXX6>. 
 
 'EX"JVl£cO QTt TCUT-/)V T*SV CpOpOtV %' 
 
 Traraoai. 
 
 To £??t6oM.&, aXXa ^ev to -m^t'jfn, 
 
 II. Kup'.e , t^ou s* k aat e^o ei; -?as 
 
 TrpouTa-fa; <rcu, 
 B. Auto; 6 toc'tto; c^sv aop.o'^et. tcXc'os 
 
 ei; toc v^siXtq p.u; crj^upy. 
 H. Nat KrarrviT= u,:u avsp > ft {*e 
 
 7Tfc<ra;£tc; 
 B. 'Airs^ao'.oa va as eu^ast^ca). 
 
 II. "'OX*j <jou i) tppovri; e.lya'. va fis 
 
 ejri^opTi^r 4 ? d^o euep^gatflM; > xai 
 
 Xapira;. Ei; t( ^o^s'^aai r^pa 
 
 va p. e 6ux,api?r! ar,; j 
 B. Hera £$0 woa; GiXouusv jju<?s'jsi* 
 
 <ha t/.v K&vTs'av to.u AivxoXv. 
 II. Mera £60 cbpac; 
 B. Nat, ETOiaaGov toc irpo; x?^ c ' v 5CU » 
 
 £ia <£e ta X&i7?a , cppovvi^si r, Ku-,a 
 
 *Is$p). 
 II. ( Otpct ! £V ivQupcIrat r;X e 'cv TOV 
 
 TCKTSpa p,cu.. ) 
 B« ( SupMifcrai* ^aivstttt on tw 
 
 ^ucaptsjel, ) 
 
 n. Kupis . . . . . 
 
 Z. Etactt juT«raiijisfi) va dbr,s?:c tw 
 
 BAiv 5 
 O, Bs'Xw jtapiT) -reavTOTa 0, t* *«I 
 
 kv p.s irpcq'a^?. 
 B. ( Me' ft&fo ei; uwp^iay. ) 
 XL ( Asv tcXu.5 va r& papuvw. )- 
 
& "What means this change. A 
 few days back London dis- 
 pleased you ; and now you have 
 n't heart to leave it 
 
 P. As you wish it should be so, 
 let's go. 
 
 B. I have no wish to go, unless 
 merely to please you 
 
 P. I am Tjblig'd to you for your 
 kindness. 
 
 E I am quite perplexed at this 
 c6!dness of yours 
 
 P, Excuse me , my heart is ill at 
 case 
 
 B. And why my Lady 
 
 P. On my Father's account 
 
 B. On your Father's account; Ay? 
 
 P. Yes my Lord it would dis- 
 tress me to leave him 
 
 B. What can be wanting in my 
 hou^e that your Father can 
 require 
 
 P. While deprived of libert7, 
 he feels he wants the best of 
 things. 
 
 B. His liberty is deferred for the 
 moment. 
 
 P. I know it very well. 
 
 B. Who told you" 
 
 P. Lord Arthur 
 
 B. Have you been talking with 
 Lord Arthur? 
 
 P. Y«»s my Lord 
 
 B. Who was present 
 
 P. No one. 
 
 B. No one ? 
 
 P. On the subject of my Father, 
 it was requisite that our con- 
 versation should be private. 
 
 B» ( She's right ) aside 
 
 i5i 
 
 B. ISxuiXx, ti xxtviv elvai touto ; 
 H?o oXt-ycov tyasp&v r\ Adv^pa ai 
 l&va'XOiZouQZ) . -<6pa <^sv 05 px" 
 ^■a -h xzoS'ix vd TVjv d^prij/j; ; 
 
 II. E -i:$h apscrr.tt (rot ( co'j , ca; (a) 
 cCt.o; , a; UTra-ywiUv. 
 
 B. 1 7^ <^£V £7?l)'JU,0> VOC UTTOCYCO Ttoi' 
 
 oe£ udvov <£td va as eu^apt^r.Gw. ° 
 II Eip,ai u7?0£pEa>; g{; tov x,aXso;r" 
 
 vyiv coy. 
 B. *A7Topci £i aurriv T-nv ^r/.po'TVi-rs 
 
 ecu. 
 II. 2uiA7rec&ft<JS as v/j.o rriv xap£!«* 
 
 a&'J s^vc^wpYjt/.s'vyjv, 
 B. Atari MiXe^ui; 
 II. '££ atria? tow ira-pd; «*cu. 
 B. Aid tov wqiTeoa siu s ; 
 IL Nat, MtXdp<h , vjQsXe pou xoixo- 
 
 ^«V7) VOC TOM d'fflCQ. 
 
 B. Ti KiaTVcpeT va X£;i}y) si; rov cT>co* 
 a u <hd ra xpsitooNj tcj ■»»*• 
 Tpo'c ecu ; 
 
 II. To; Xeiirei to scaX^repov , dcs'ou 
 toJ XeiWt ^ sXiu6sp:a. 
 
 B. H eXeuSspia toj £t& ?w wpaf 
 
 dva(3dXXerat. 
 II. To qgsupo wsXXd xaXdc, 
 B. iLto; cot to eiirsv ; 
 XI. 4 MtXdp^o; 'Aprcup. 
 B. naiXncs; pi rev MiXdp^cv J Ap" 
 
 ■roup ; 
 IL Nat, Kupts. 
 B. II0T0; Yirov ^apcov , 
 II. Kdvs'va; ; 
 B. Kavs'va; ; 
 II. Aid ttjv u:7o'0£<jiy tsu irarpo'; wcv s 
 
 ffip.sw£t vd *Ytv£Ts« oatXia jx'jsik&s, 
 
 B ("E^st ^Ixatcv. ) 
 
 (a) 2cu , cat before the Verb more vernacular, and , I may say , 
 
 .At present, mere correct. 
 
1 Si 
 ?. Are you displased at my 
 
 having conversed with Lord 
 
 Arthur ? 
 B. Nqj I am not displeased. 
 P. He is the only Man I estr-em , 
 
 for I think him honourable and 
 
 sincere. 
 B Yes, he's a good Friend 
 P. He is truly ■worthy of your 
 
 Friendship lit- speaks nobly and 
 
 with sincerity. He has all the 
 
 characteristics of nobleness and 
 
 ( correct feeling ) 
 B. ( She 's lavish in his praise ) 
 
 aside 
 P. He has great regard for my 
 
 afflicted Father 
 B. ( There's no harm , in her 
 
 speaking well of him on that 
 
 account. ) asi.le 
 P, My dear Husband is n't it 
 
 possible to relieve his mind ? 
 
 B. Yes we'll set his mind at 
 
 B- 
 
 case ? 
 
 
 P. But when ? 
 
 n. 
 
 B. When ! When ! as soon as 
 
 B. 
 
 possible. 
 
 
 P. He's easily discompo^'d , how 
 
 n. 
 
 sorry I am for this little failing 
 
 
 of his. 
 
 
 B. Prepare yourself for our de- 
 
 B. 
 
 parture 
 
 
 P. I am ready, whenever you 
 
 n. 
 
 please 
 
 
 B. Tell Jevre to come here 
 
 B- 
 
 ( hither. ) 
 
 
 P. You shall be obeyed. 
 
 n. 
 
 B. Don't go, unless you like it. 
 
 B. 
 
 P. When with you, I cannot but 
 
 be pleased. 
 B, Shall v/e invite any company 
 
 II Sol Jtaxooa'vsrat ort uiA-Xflsx- £»i 
 tov MiXo'p^ov 'ApToip ; 
 
 B."Oxi, oVv fxct (ae acj) xaxocpaivf.Tat. 
 
 II- E'.vxi o (/.s'vc; a^cov, ° 7TC '"' ~'f-S>» 
 xal (X3J (paivsra-. d^-cas'^a^o; xzi 
 EiXt«3tvns- 
 
 B« Wat, etvai xxXo: 91X0;. 
 
 II- Eivat a;'.c; aXr,0iva tt,z tptX'a; 
 gc-j. AoXil ay.Xw; > xxt pi eiXt- 
 xptvetav. Eyj.'. oXa ra wpcrepr'u.%* 
 ra tt;; eu^Jviia; , xal <ptXccppo- 
 guvyi;. 
 
 B- ( Tov ev/cwu.ia^£t wapa w'oXu. ) 
 
 II. ' E^st p.E-yxXr.v d-yarrYiv ?rpo; tov 
 Ta.Xai-wccv -jrarspa, [acu. 
 
 B» ("Av 78V eTEXlVTJ £lX TOJTO , i$ld 
 
 o^ev eivae -^ovr.pia. ) 
 
 II • 'A-^a^r.a-'vs [xo'j avsp, slvai tS"'jva- 
 tgv va aViv r,ti,7ropc r Jtx£v va tov 
 irapr.-y'-pr.awfjLEv ; 
 Nal , GiXoaev tov wapvippTiact. 
 
 *AXXa tco'te; 
 
 IIoTe wots* oacv Ta'x,t<ra ruxcps* 
 
 <5C0{X£V. 
 
 ( 2uY/,u^£Tai eu)wX«s" IIogov jxcu 
 sca/tccpa(v£Ttti tguto to ai*piv eXaV" 
 rwaa tcu . 
 Erbipxaou £ta va dva^topriCco^,ev» 
 
 "E^at etc cp.fi o-av Ss'Xr,;. 
 
 Eitce tvjv 'ie'SpYjv va eXOvi e^w. 
 
 O ptojto'? coy. 
 
 A'v £ev ?/««* tOxaptirrifi.jvvj , p:£v 
 
 exe?,-. 
 
 II. "Otp.v eluat pa& ecu, £sv •jjp.xo- 
 pa> va y.aat -rrapE^ euy. apt^r u, e'vyj. 
 
 B- ©IXst? va Tvpoc/caXs'awttEv eyv- 
 Tpo!<j»ou; j 
 
P. As far as 1 am concerned, 1 
 
 care not for any 
 B. Suppose we ask Lord Arthur, 
 
 P. Lord A would be less dis- 
 agreeable to me than any one 
 else. 
 
 ,B. Do you like the Society of 
 Lord A. 
 
 r. I have no wish for it • but if he, 
 were with us , it wou'd n't be 
 disagreeable to me ( it would 
 in no way discompose me. 
 
 B. ( She appears to me innocent 
 .Let me not suspect her ( aside 
 For the present we will have 
 no one. If you find it irk- 
 some ( get tired ) we will re- 
 turn to Town 
 
 P. I am uneasy about my Father 
 
 B. Talk to him. Assure him that 
 I keep your wishes in view. Get 
 ready for selling out. 
 
 V, I am ready, whenever you 
 Y/iah to set off, 
 
 i53 
 
 II. "Ocov to xxt' eui, £sv jAs'Xsi jxot 
 <ha xaMs'va" 
 
 £• A? 7Fpi<JX:tXSGCi)!J!,£V tov MiXo'p<5W' 
 
 *ApT:up ; 
 II- O* Muo'p^o? 'Aotouo vjOeXfi (xs &»• 
 
 c cL^zq'no'i] ©Xi^'coTcjcv airo jta8s 
 
 aXXcv- 
 B. 'ApeVxet <rot (ce)^ G'JvTpocpia to3 
 
 MiXo'p^cu ; 
 n» Asm ttiv ewiSypi , aXX' av vStov , 
 
 ^ev T^eXe pet (3<xpu<fav/|. 
 
 B« ( Ms <p*ivsrat aOcoa. Mtq ttiv 
 PaXXcajv ei; uxo^tav.. ) Ai« ttov 
 wpav ch'v 6sXs! eX6| fc«vsva§. Av. 
 JJaoeO?;, 6=Xop.ev e-JTt<r?%t ei; tw 
 
 ndx-.v. 
 
 II. IXcvco £ia t;v WaVlpa aou- 
 
 B. 'OaiXYKysTOU, fiUSalcoGS-Gv ott i'y^ 
 
 crpb 6©0aXa<sv rov -nc'Ocv ecu xal 
 
 tcv e<^i/.ov too. 'ETOtaaoou ^17. TOV 
 
 ^■/)ff£upo'vp.a?, 
 II. ©s'Xto sijaxi i'TOia-fl otav 6eXr,aYi? 
 
 va ava^a)prit>6t)u,Ev» 
 
 PHRASES FROM THE AVARE. 
 
 EXENTAVELONES, (i) 
 
 ZOITZ& (^) AND C1.E\NTHES. 
 
 In conversation at the back of 
 the stage. 
 
 E. ( thinking himself alone conti- 
 nues.) I dont know that I have 
 done right in b trying in my gar- 
 den the twenty five thousand 
 piastres they brought me yester- 
 day. My Gardener is careless 
 enough, and never goes into the 
 garden, unless I drag him there 
 with me. So much the better. Ne- 
 
 E'C'flvfaSsX&SvYi;, ZcotitE* xat K/.savG-yis 
 
 ( guvouuXouvts; ei; to Ecjcarepov 
 
 tcu GsaTpou ). 
 
 E. (vcp.'£«v OTi -sTvatpo'vo; £^aK:Xou9u ) 
 Aev £^£upco 6'u.ta? av s-fco £x.ap,a xaXa 
 >t' e^oscra ei; to irepiSo'Xi fi.ou Tal? 
 eixccuttsvts. y^Xta^s? -ypdacra x,a6o>s 
 {10O Ta^epav iyftz$' ^ irspSoXapvis 
 p.ou eiva'. ap;4£Tcc ajxeXifi? xal <^ev 
 -rca-yei '? to xspSoXt av ^c'v to'vs 
 oupci> {/,aT# pou. Tddw 5ta7.YiTepa» 
 M' SXov touto eixodiweyTS ^tXia^s; 
 
 (1) Sixty Needles, Pinhunter , Skinflint 
 («] Diminutive of Zani. 
 
254 
 
 ver the less, twenty five thousand 
 $> ; astres is a considerable sum 
 ior any one to keep about him. 
 (He sees Cleanthes and ^oitza ; 
 hush ) Hola ! I shall betray 
 myself! My warmth has de- 
 prived me of my wits . I 
 thought I was alone, and was 
 making my calculations aloud. 
 ( To Chanthes and Zoitza. ) 
 Hola! what's the matter? 
 C. Nothing , Father. 
 E. Have you been long here? 
 C. We are just come. 
 E. Did you hear ? 
 C. What Father ? 
 
 E. Here , now 
 
 C. What? 
 
 E. What I was saying. 
 
 K. Wo! 
 
 2, Assuredly ( You did I you 
 
 did! ) 
 Z. Excuse me. 
 
 E. I see you heard something. 
 I was saying to myself how 
 difiicult a thing it is now a-days 
 for any one to meet with 
 znone3^, and was saying happy's 
 the Man that has twenty five 
 thousand piastres about him! 
 K. We did n't venture to ap- 
 proach you j lest we should 
 interrupt your calculations. 
 E. I have done well to tell you 
 all , that you may not mistake 
 the matter , and imagine that 
 1 was speaking of myself, that 
 I forsooth had twenty five 
 thousand piastres about me. 
 K. We never meddle with your 
 
 affairs. 
 Jj p I wish I had them ! twenty 
 five thousand piastres ! ! ! ! 
 
 „ . 1 dont believe that 
 
 «»' That would be a glorious thing 
 °|fer me. 
 
 "Ypccrs, va ?a fJa<r<x xkveii; fta-*; 
 tcj, eiv3« pua roaoTYi; dp>i£~a- • . - 
 ( pXe-rca tov KXeavOnv xat vhv 
 ZcoViT^xv* <rt^a ) Atooi . Ato? p.oii 
 8e va •jrpo^tOa ! O* 0uu.b; {iovi Viipi 
 tov vouv ! 0£ppouaa irw; et^cu p.:'* 
 vg$ p.ci> x' sXcyaptaSa a^a* ( IIpoc 
 TOV K.A£av8v)V XXl T71V ZaiVK^av ) 
 
 E ! tI «vai j 
 
 K.. T^ote ffarsp acv . 
 
 £. Elifts TroXXriv upav e^Oj 
 
 J£. T"jpa or' viX9a(i.£v* 
 
 E. 'Hxoucare 
 
 K- Ti Ilarep po-j : 
 
 E» 'Ec^cb, *re'pa ♦ ♦ • • 
 
 K. Ti ; 
 
 E« "Oca &sya. 
 
 K- "Oy.i I 
 
 £. 'E|«iravTo; ! e^airavTcc J 
 
 Z- Me ou(LTra6aT£ ! 
 
 £. 'E^ci) pXi'7:o> , on ^xouaare xxti 
 ft. flatXouox (ie tov ep-auro'v p.cy t 
 itooov £6gxoXov eivai va eupvi xi* 
 veT? acf7rpa, tviv orlaepov. Kou eXs - 
 -ya." KaXoTUX ? » ^ h tr - «*°«* 
 ?psvTe x'- Xt *^ fpo'aaa {ixt# tou! 
 
 li. K* rp.sT? £s'v £ToXao!»<;«(i.£/ vi <ra; 
 wXYKiiaawfAEv , foiww; $i**5<|»tt{uv 
 
 too? Xo'yaotaffu.'ous ca?. 
 E. E"i«au,a xaXa , xat coU t* eiita 
 6Xa, G w-totvo)? £7;ap£r£ '£ava<rpo<pa xi 
 iTpa^tAa, xxl cpavxadOviTc, on eXe* 
 ■va <hx tov feLca'jidv {aou, 6'ti Tax* 
 
 *yp:'c<ja> 
 K.. 'H;aeI; ^sv ipftabop&v eiV fa; 
 
 uiro&e'ffsis ca;. 
 E- Au.7vot£ va ra Er/a ! Elxociravft 
 
 XiXta^E? 7?o'offa! ! ! . 
 K.. 'E^to £ev iu<t£uo> otu .... 
 E- Touro 3tov -rcoXXa x«tXY> ^cutoii 
 
 ««t« p.cva ♦ 
 
7 . But ttcse arc things. . . . 
 
 E. For 1 am in great want of 
 Money. 
 
 £. I think..'... 
 
 E. I should be quite at ease if I had 
 them. 
 
 K. You are. . . . 
 
 E. And I should not complain 
 as I do of the hardness of 
 the times. 
 
 K.. For Heaven's sate ! my dear 
 Father , there 's no room for 
 your complaining of the times ! 
 All know that you are rich 
 enough ! 
 
 E. Bow ? I rich enough ? All 
 who say so are liars ? A 
 greater ia'sehood can't be. All 
 who spread such reports about 
 me are mischievous Variets, 
 ( evil disposed. ) 
 
 }£. Don't be angry, 
 
 E. Ah ! it drives me mad. My 
 own children betray me , and 
 become my enemies. 
 
 II. And is every one your enemy 
 that says you are rich ? 
 
 E. Yes ! These reports of yours , 
 and your extravagance will 
 be the cause of my ruin ? 
 ( being betrayed ) or of their 
 coming at night , and cutting 
 my throat, ( head off) thinking 
 jzie made up of Florins. 
 
 1 55' 
 
 K. A'j-ri £d fly at •jvpa^aara . . . <, 
 E. &' v/jta tk&Xyiv dva-fxr,v dira despot- 
 ic. 'E^'to scyy.Zcj.'i.K 
 
 E- ' HQtXa eiaOat tvoXXx dvctTrauasvcs, 
 
 av TCt V.J/JL I 
 
 K- Kal arsis il<sbz ..... 
 
 E- llx: &i'i ViikXa, vd xXoucoaat , xx* 
 
 8<i>; jcocifcvw , fid tov xaipbv , on 
 
 glvnti TjoXXa &us\)yr,; I 
 £. Av dra7ra; rev Geo'v ! KaXs ITar?' 
 
 ■JTX.'iY) , £s'v EQJSl TOV TOTTOV TOU vd 
 
 xXstt.eafle gsi; £id tov x-xipo'v ! OXot 
 to '^eupouvi ort t^e.TS ttXuutov dp- 
 xeTo'v ' 
 E* IXi;; 'E-fo e^o -7?Xoutcv apxero'v' 
 "Ocroi to Xe'-j'cjv sfva.1 i|ieys-au • Me- 
 f<xX'$T£pov ^suaa £ev eaTropei vd 
 •yeyTi. KootOTpowot eivoa gggi fiicna- 
 wetpo'jv Te'rota Xo'-y.a fid ?' ejisv*. 
 
 Z. Mr, £d Byae'vers • 
 
 E- "A ! tooto pi ^atacvi&i. Td io\a 
 uou rexva vd ui irpo<?(ocuv , xal 
 vd "yivwvTai ev/Spipi aou. 
 
 K« Kal iyj)o6$ <ra; eivat, 6Vt? Xefs** 
 or: e^5T£ -rcXouTOv ; 
 
 E« Ncuaxs ? Aura ecu rd Xo'fta xat 
 rd tfy&d ecu 8s vd <raOouv airi* 
 
 vd p.s Trpoooiacuv ii vd eV 
 
 6ouv tyjv vuxra vd aOU JCO^OUV T9 
 xecpdXt , voai^ovre; ae sax&\ -jeua- 
 TOV GpXtooi. 
 
 EXENTAVELONE5 AND ZOITZA. 
 
 E. There , so much for our lady 
 likebeaus ( Dandies) they have 
 no more strength than a gar- 
 den stick. There my child. 
 that's what I have decided on 
 for myself. For your Brother, 
 I have nVd on a Widow , 
 
 E. Fid '^e rd £apfytx,a r apy/vToirciAail 
 Eivcu f£pd xjci <5yvard iaa as ir<x~ 
 Xoux-ia. Et£t «^d xo'pn acu. Touro d-jve- 
 ^daica <^td tov iaau-o'v acu. Aid tov 
 d^eXcpc'v ecu e$idXs£a aiav xd~dav 
 j^Tfipav , 7T£pl tx; 6icc(a; p.s" '|j.v,v.cav 
 OT^epov to ir'pu;, Eceva 6g v« c'f 
 
i56 
 
 they were talking to me about 
 this morning , and I'll marry 
 you to M r , 13. 
 
 Z/To M.rB. 
 
 |£. Yes! a shrewd, prudent, mid- 
 dle aged Man ! he 's hardly 
 fifty. Every body 's loud about 
 his' Wealth 
 
 Z. I'd rather not marry , if you 
 please Papa. 
 
 E. And I my child, my sweet, 
 my darling had lather, if you 
 pleas? , marry you 
 
 Z. I beg you'll excuse me Papa 
 
 E. I beg you'll excuse me, my 
 child. 
 
 Z. I am Mr. B's most humble 
 Servant. If however it be 
 the same to "you ( With your 
 leave however) curtsies, I'll not 
 have him. 
 
 E. I am yours most humbly ; but 
 ( bows ) with your leave you 
 shall have him, this very e- 
 vening 
 
 Z. This Evening ? 
 
 E. This Evening! 
 
 Z. ( curtsying ) that can't be Papa 
 
 £, ( bowing ) that shall be, my 
 
 child. 
 Z. No ! 
 E. Yes ! 
 2. No, I say 
 E. Yes I say. 
 Z. On this point you will not 
 
 force me. 
 E. On this point I will force you 
 
 Z. I'd rather die ( kill myself ) 
 than have him for a husband 
 
 E. You shall not die, and you 
 shall have him. Did you ever 
 see such insolence ? Did any 
 one ever see a child talk in 
 this way to her Father ? 
 
 '-yrav^psyo fie tov Kupttfov Bsp&i- 
 
 Z. Me tov wjo'.tXw Bap<JaXa(i.7:e , i{js.7rav; 
 E. Na(<jy.j ! A v9p«7vov YiXw.cop.svGv, xal 
 
 qppo'vi(i.ov , xal pox^o'v ! Mom; tyii 
 
 tcG; •jvevrivTa. Ta -jvXgotiq tgu £i 
 
 oXot id cpy)p.t£ouv. 
 Z. E'vu, Traces jjlou, £ev uTrav^peuciiatf 
 
 dv eivai opic^s; aa;. 
 E. Kac '701 , jco'pyi jxcu , JWfcK&vd jxou « 
 
 yji^eue'vy) uou , Oe va eg ivavopetJ>tt) 9 
 
 av eivai op;G-p.;; oa;, 
 Z. 2a; fyiroi (Kj^y/opviaiv , TcaTsp iaoo. 
 E. 2a; foxS oof £o>pY)oiv , xo'pvi pou ' 
 
 Z. Eiaai Ta7retvorart) <JguXvj too Bap<5*a* 
 Xaa7roujATCa."Op.u; — (xaavst ox,"n* 
 (i.a T7pG5X'jvrioeco;)p.s tyjv dc^eidv $a? 
 £ev QeXw tov eTvapeiv. 
 
 E. Etu.su TCwreivoTowqs (JouXo's cj«;. — - 
 **O k aw; ( KajjLvet xai auro; a/Tiu-a ) 
 pi Wiv dchia* ca; , 8e va tov s-^dpric 
 
 m». : 
 
 Z. 'A~<js ; 
 
 E. 'Awg'^s! 
 
 Z. ( xaavouda cyr.u.ix. ). Touto £ev fi- 
 ve rat TraTep u.gu! 
 
 E. ( xapuv jcat auTO 1 ; cx% a )• Touts 
 8s va -yivr. xopyj jacu ! 
 
 Z.*Ox.t! 
 
 E. Naiffxs ! 
 
 Z. "oyeajcs , era; Xs-jfoJ 
 
 E. Nai'yedxs , ca; Xs'-j'w. 
 
 Z. Ei? TO'J-o to Trpa^pa £ev Qe'Xsxs p.' 
 dva-p.dcsiv. 
 
 E. Ei; touto to icpa^aa 6e' va ca? 
 dvx-yxxcci). 
 
 Z- 2»oTovcu.at xaXiOTSpa , rcapd va 
 'irapio tg'outcu olvo$<?.. 
 
 E. Asv GiMTo'vSffou , >-a ; - x<"» ewatpsts; 
 Tia '<5e; d^iav-p&Tud i ei<h ttots 
 xivei; jcopiT^t va 'pXn TOiouTOxpo'wwc 
 tov waxipx TG'J j 
 
%. And did ever any body see 
 a Father marry his Daughter 
 in such a way ? 
 
 E. It's an excellent match. No- 
 body can find fault with it. 
 I'll engage, all the world will 
 commend my Choice. 
 
 Z. And I'll engage that no one 
 in his senses wi!l commend it. 
 
 E. ( seeing Demetrius at a dis- 
 tance ) There's Demetrius ! are 
 you willing we should make 
 him our judge. 
 
 Z. With all my heart. 
 
 E. Will you aiide by his judg- 
 ment. 
 
 Z. Gladly ! I'll abide by whatever 
 he may say. 
 
 E. "Tis settled. 
 
 * 5 ? 
 
 Z. K et^e ttotI xavet; rcaTspa , vat 
 
 'rcav^psuv) TQtouT07po'7iroȣ t^v xa- 
 
 pviv tou ; 
 E. To pipe; eTvat iroXXa >caXo'v. Ttrore 
 
 £sv e^ei va 'tty! xfaziq. Sto'!//-^ 
 
 €avo , 6'Xo; 6 icoo-(Ao; 6e va'-rcaiveo-fl 
 
 Tviv s^Xo-pi p,a'J. 
 Z. K. s^'o) <r&''^Yip,<x Pavoi , Sri xaveTc 
 
 eppovtao; £ev 8;'Xei tviv eiraivscEiv. 
 
 E. ( SXc'-ircov tov Avi(7.YiTpaxviv - airo u.a"° 
 
 . xpav ). Na 6 Avi jxrir pax-vis ! 6eXei; v« 
 
 tovs icau.wp.ev jcpuriv ^t.x^ ; 
 
 Z. 2T£p-p>. 
 
 E. Ikiyzoou tviv Kpiatv tou ; 
 
 Z. Mera x a pa* • euxap&s'outf.a& e k °» T{ 
 
 E. TeXsiucre! 
 
 Demetrius Exentavelones and Zoitza, 
 
 E. Come here Demetrius ! we 
 have chosen you to decide 
 •which of us two is right, I or 
 my Daughter. 
 
 D. Your honor no doubt. 
 
 E. Do you know what we are 
 debating about. 
 
 D. No; but your honour can't 
 be wrong, for you are justice 
 itself. 
 
 E. I wish to marry her this e- 
 vening to a steady, rich husband 
 And this madcap gipsy has been 
 telling me to my face that she 
 despises him , and wont have 
 him. What think you ? What 
 say you ? 
 
 D. What do I say ? 
 
 E. Yes ! 
 
 D. Humph ! Humph ! 
 
 E. What? 
 
 E. 'EXa '<5\» Attu.vjTpa'xvi • «' l<haXe£ap.sv 
 va JcptvYi; Ti? a-JTo tou; oud p.a; e/e'. 
 <^(xaiov , S^tl) , Y, 71 xo'pYi W.0U. 
 
 A. H ? euyevia aa; , AiOevra ! yja$U 
 
 au.cpt{3oXiav ! 
 E. 'E^Eupei; -srspt t:vo; eTvai 6 Xo-yo? u.a$; 
 
 A. 'O^t* rrX^v r\ eu-yev-'a aa? ^ev ejAiro- 
 pstTg va £%viT.2 ac^ixov , ^toT: eia9re 
 6Xo; ^txatocuvv;. 
 
 E. Arrows 6sXu va tyiv uirav^ps'^w p. 
 eveev av6pto-Kov xat «ppo'viu.ov seal 
 TfXouctov &v tiX'jtw. KtauTYj v) crpi-^'Xa, 
 ■so rop-yo'va, u,s twite xaTa irpoao- 
 rcov , on xov xaraepcovet, xat ^ev 
 tov E-rcotipai. Ti ce ^aiveToct ; Ts 
 Xs'jsi?; 
 
 A. Tt Xs^w y 
 
 E. Nal ! 
 
 A. E" ! |! 
 
 E. T;; 
 
s?)8 
 
 D. I say -that, in the mam, 
 
 I am of your opinion for your 
 honor can't be hut right ; but 
 the young Lady , however is , 
 not altogether wrong; for.... 
 
 E. How ? Mr. B is a man of 
 great worth. He's a Stran- 
 ger it's true; but he's of good 
 family, respected, mild and a- 
 miable, and in good circum- 
 stances. He has no children 
 by his first marriage. He had, 
 as he says, two, but they were 
 murdered together with his 
 wife while on one of his Jour- 
 nies. Whom could she meet 
 with better. 
 
 D. True ! but the young Lady 
 may say, that you are a little 
 hasty in the Business; and that 
 a little time is requisite, that 
 she may see whether their 
 dispositions suit. 
 
 E. Humph ! this is a chance that 
 any one ought to catch at with 
 open arms. I am here of- 
 fered an advantage that I shall 
 never again meet with. The 
 
 l . Man's to take her without 
 
 Dower. 
 D. Without Dower? ( fortune), (i) 
 
 F. Without fortune. 
 
 D. Oh ! Then I have nothing 
 more to say. There indeed; 
 that's an argument that at once 
 convinces me 
 
 E. And as for me! it is a con- 
 siderable saving for me ! 
 
 D- Assuredly ! the matter don't 
 admit of ( is past ) contradic- 
 tion. The young Lady indeed 
 
 A. Evo) XeVV'— or: * >:) :•( :; up.h c,fc 
 tyiv -y*(&«.Y)v ax;' e-nrenSY, ri eu'yavia w# 
 S'h Ep.7ropstTc va ixr,v f^wrs rKxatcv, 
 'Qum; — kxI xurfl r, xx^ouax &k& 
 vjii 6'Xov to ao\*ov. Erret^r,. . . . , 
 E. nj>\,-; O JtuptT^TO? Bap^o^apiiroufji^a? 
 etvai av6?o>TCo; K^toXcyo? • Eivo; givgi 
 dXr'fliva, eivai oaco? su^sm^, Ttp.vjji.svc ', 
 •yXu/.o;, rue^c; , xai jvcXXa *u3 £ f yj- 
 
 £ev (fv. Ti'jcva. Auw el/.s , x,aOo; 
 Xe'fsi , xxl rou ttvlpjxav pz^i '[>>* 
 tyiv yjvaT:<a too , si? itvt tod t*- 
 %zio>.. Etciov aXXov lp.Tff0g5t iJOTfl yk 
 
 EU3Y] XiiXr'v^OV J 
 
 A. AXr,9tva • IIXvjv r, xo/.Kiva u-co*'. 
 va aa; EtTTfi , ort civ va fha^Efi 
 cX(*pv t<x Toa-yaaTa' xa: oti /_;> = •''- 
 £eT<u oX/yo? xaiio; va i<5"yj x,ai. aufn, 
 av v, xXigi; f*is ep.ircpst v» 'ratpsiacfiji 
 as fav, . . . 
 
 E. E" ! Autyi sTvai ata Euxatpta , r^v 
 07ro:av TroeTvet xavst? va tyiv itfc-r^ri 
 pi ~a <h>o rou x-?' a - ^T** ewocpxta 
 e^ca u.tav euTuy^av, tt.v gicgscw xXjXoj* 
 itcu ttote <^ev 8e va tyiv sSpm. O av- 
 
 A. *Kuc. ! ; Tp:""/.a ; 
 E. Xtopt? ivpolxa ' 
 
 A- Q" ! EotO TvXsOV (?SV E^W TtTTCTJ V« 
 
 etr:a). fiXsirere £« ; Na eva; Xtry^S* 
 c<rt; eu6u; pi JtaTcwsesflfit. 
 
 ■E. Kiap.p.s ! tojto -ytx t* spiva e(va; 
 x.au,-7Tc<TY] cixovcaia- 
 
 A. Bs(3aioTaTa •' To rccaypa <h'v ir::o (- 
 •/z-x: avTtXo-y;av.'AXY]Qiva,v) -//or, sas 
 |p.wopst va oa; sv6jp..av) , ox: 6 fa- 
 
 (i) The former is the legal tsrm f the latter more usual in con- 
 versation. 
 
may remind you that marriage 
 is a very delicate subject, and 
 requires consideration: that one 
 may thereby become happy 
 or miserable throughout life : 
 that a union , that is to last 
 for life should be form'd with 
 great care and circumspection. 
 E. Without fortune! 
 
 D. You 're right ! that settles all. 
 I don't dispute the point. But 
 some may say that in such 
 cases one ought undoubtedly 
 to con ult the inclination of 
 the Lady. And that great dif- 
 ference of age, disposition and 
 sentiments frequently exposes 
 marriage to distressing vicissi- 
 tudes. 
 
 E. Without fortune! 
 
 D. Humph ! You need not repo&t. 
 I know all that. Wlio can pos 
 sibly resist. But some fathers 
 would think more of gratifying 
 their daughters than of their 
 pockets. They could not endure 
 the sacrifice of their children 
 to their own gain , but would 
 rather endeavor by every other 
 means to establish the union 
 on the congenial sentiments of 
 the parties ( espoused ) so as to 
 preserve uninterrupted its ho- 
 nor peace and joy , and. . . 
 
 E. Without fortune. 
 
 D. True! this stops every one's 
 mouth. Without fortune. How 
 can any one resist such an 
 argument. 
 
 E. ( looking tbwards his garden, 
 hush ) Hark I think I hear 
 the dog bark. Perhaps they're 
 after my Money ( to Demetrius ) 
 Don't stir , , A'U be with you 
 instantly. 
 
 fie; etvxc -yrpxYJ&x woXXa TO&IXdV v 
 xat y^eta&rai lepoooyrv' on , pi 
 TO'j-o [xn^zl va ^s\?i xhzlz fe&w 
 X'K $ Susv/riz et; oX7jv row tin i^v* 
 4'n, y.ix truvTpovia, -Jin; GeXet £iap~ 
 Ktas.iv p.5'x,pt Gxvarcu, -jvps-m va 
 cuji.'iwvvjrat pi fis^otXYiv gjcs^iv kxI 
 7vxpariop'.-i(7iv. 
 
 &-'Eyj.TS. &lm,Ur* ! ToSto to. xoTrret oXx* 
 Ae'v <rx; iyveg-ig^fti. 'Ep/rcopajv ou,^ 
 
 ftcix; irspi^affs::; , avau/piJEoXu:; *rp?> 
 ■Rgs xxveT; va nraparvi^/j rfa jcXotvj 
 r?ig K.o~:Xa$. Kai , 6'ti >i aevaXY} 
 c^tscpopx xf,<; •ffkix.iz; , jcxi rri; <$\a» 
 Oi'ffice? , >cxl To>v opovY)p.xra)v x.aaver 
 rov ^aaov va u-uro'xsvrfct wcXXaxt? ee$ 
 GXifjspa cj(i3epYi/.0Ta. 
 
 E, X&>pU 75pot3«a ! 
 
 A. A' ! <h\ y$ita%47Cii va jji to 'j-avas^- 
 irfrre. To 't-i'joo) rcoXXa xaXa. Ooio? 
 ^ta^oXo; ep.^opst va evavT«i>6^! 
 EIa'/jv , slvxt xacu.7i:ci30t rcaT^'pes , 
 ctTtvs; rpojcpivouv xaX-siTepx va euyx- 
 pt<TG<*» tyjv ico'pYjv rwv, irapa r£v 
 araxxouXav twv. Ot TOtofjTC. £ev 6ro- 
 cpcpcov va GuctccXouv ii Ts'xva tov 
 6t; to iowv JCi'p^o;" aXXx friTotiv irs* 
 ptocfovepov obvo icxv aXXo Trpa-yjia , 
 va GetAsXtaWdi to ayvoexs'otov et? r/iv 
 C'ju.'pw>viav row av^po-yuvcj, ^ croix 
 ptflWpaX«TTS« d'hxxcirox ttjv ti(jlyiv , 
 *at tyw e''j>wnv , xxl rriv x~?av t&'jj, 
 
 XX!. ^ 07T01X. . . . 
 
 E. Xdopt? nrpoixa ' 
 
 A. MdXtga ! to'jto KXciet to 50119s kx- 
 6sW;. Xcopj; irpcua ! Ha>; v' avT'.- 
 Ca9ji xxvii? £15 eva to:outov Xo'yov I 
 
 E> ( KytTx^iiv rpo? tq irspi(3o'Xt tcj 
 crqd )• Ai^ol ! Mo.u ^as'vBrai v'axouw 
 rev cxuXXov va ^au-j'I^. Ila; xxl 
 arstpa^ouv t' diTrpa {ao-j ; IIpo; to* 
 Avj^TOTpajtisv ) M^ caX%;! Na (i€ 
 x. &«39a(?a„ 
 
i6o 
 
 Exentavelones , Demetrius , and 
 Master John. 
 
 E. Come now Demetrms and lend 
 me your assistance here. Hola 
 Master John, I have left you 
 till the very last. 
 
 J. What's your pleasure. 
 
 E. I am going to give an Enter- 
 tainment this evening. 
 
 J. Marvellously strange ! how 's 
 this. ( how now ). 
 
 E Come tell me , will you give 
 us good fare ( a good dinner 
 or supper. ) 
 
 J. And why not, if you give me 
 plenty of Money. 
 
 E. What the deuce ! Nothing 
 but Money. These Men talk of 
 nothing else but Money ! Mo- 
 ney ! Money ! Nothing runs in 
 their heads but Money. 
 
 D. Nor I , in my life did I ever 
 hear so impertinent an answer. 
 Humph ! A mighty art forsooth, 
 to provide good fare with plenty 
 of Money. This the veriest clown 
 •would do. Nay our old Cat 
 would do as much v A good 
 Cook should know how to 
 give good fare for little Money! 
 
 J. Good cheer for litt.e Money ! 
 
 D. Yes. 
 
 J. Faith, I wish your honor would 
 let me into this secret. Other- 
 wise , take my place, tie on my 
 Apron , and do Cook : you 
 uneddle (and make ) with every 
 thing : you're like Garlic in 
 every Dish. 
 
 E. Peace ! What shall we want 
 John. 
 
 ££yivtc$ £>.(.'; vr;; , AKftmrpoiiCfte , k*\- 
 (i) ivup Ttavvvj?. 
 E» EXx rcopa , Ar,av)Tpa>cvj , va jii 
 €or,bihari; s£d>. E* x,)p Tiavvfl ! £G£vcG 
 d^pvi/.x oXov k u^epx. 
 
 F Tt vvj cOpifftto; e?x; 5 
 
 E. Ef<a, y.Op Tiavvo, 6e va xxpa arrows 
 
 Tpowrs£t» 
 r^ Mct^'aAc^'5a 4 aa ! tt5>; rirav auto * 
 
 E. Tia Tre'5 1x2 6s voc p.x; xx^vis xaXcs 
 W* i 
 
 r» Mua ap. -yiaTi" '<sx jtol £&££ ttcoX- 
 Xa -ypdoia. 
 
 E. Tt £tx€cXo ! c'Xo w-ssct.. Tour' os 
 av3?(i>7cot ^b exouv osaXo Tirore 
 va Vcuv , aovay.a •ypo'sca, 'Ypdas-a » 
 •yoc'asa ! Tcutov tov Xo'fov lyjjuvi 
 iravra *? to voD twv ■ypo'off x ' 
 
 A. MvicJ'' £70) £ev vixoucfaEi; Tr,v £a>xv [/.oo 
 Tj'gcv do^iav-pcwov diTro'xptaiv. A - 
 M^xXyj t£^vy, j*x8e, vx Jtajiip jcxvei; 
 xaXa ^a-pra yui woXXa "Ypdata. 
 Tojto to jwcjivee xal 6 srXsov oupics 
 yjoptaTYj?;. To xxuvei x' r, ^dra p,x;. 
 o' xxXo; ofxa-^sipo; irpewet va xa k av?i 
 jcaXd <pa-pQta (as oXfya fpe'd**" 
 
 T- KaXa <pata pet r Xtya -ypcata ; 
 
 A. Naii I 
 
 r. Ma tv aX^Seta o-a*(i.7re»pei5 "n ofyeiv- 
 <hd a' p.a8$t p.ai »' etf&sV auTO tow 
 p.u<rt;<.d. Et <^£i [/,r, , irap' tv d£ici 
 ja' jcal Cwaou rf,v recu^ta p.' xxt j£- 
 vst (jtasipa?. 2t oXa t<x wpsfaar 
 dva>tx-<ov£ta £i<ia> p.saa , cdv tci» 
 jcpouaau^' '; ra cpxia. 
 
 E, Suairo ! ti 6e va p«s x? £tac ^ c " v *"? 
 ridvv»; 
 
 (1) Usual in speaking to an old Servant. 
 
& Let your Steward look to that; 
 lie knows how to give good 
 cheer for little Money, 
 3E-. Pshaw! I wish you to an- 
 swer. 
 
 J. How many shall you (sit down) 
 be at table? 
 
 E. We 1 shall be eight or ten : say 
 eight: where eight can make a 
 meal , ten may (will find some- 
 thing to ) eat. (i) 
 
 jD. Certainly. 
 
 J. Well! say ten pounds of meat 
 for Soup and Bouille , ten 
 Fowls , a Lamb for stewing. 
 
 E. What the plague : this would 
 be enough to feast (entertain ) 
 the whole Toyiii. 
 
 X. Roast. . s . 
 
 E. ( Puts his hands on John's 
 Mouth ). A Murrain on you ! 
 You'd eat ( me but of house 
 and home J up all I have. 
 
 J. Saltnsii ( Sturgeon J Salad. . . . 
 
 161 
 
 V. Ap.'va §£$& ^ 'frifpouffo? 'tfa; (a)! 
 A0t6; £s'p v.« 'a%'j. x.«Xa cp&Va p.si 
 
 Xqa 7po'eia. 
 E. 'fkpoo I 'E-yw 8s'Xa> va p.' aTro/.p'.^r;; 
 
 r. Hoc? 
 
 : va<r{i ; tou roa^ 
 
 E-. f Stopping his Mou 
 still ? 
 
 More 
 
 E. @i va p.aaGs mctw 7 y5 tfsica. Ba'Xe 
 
 ctj o/.tw. Exe: —oj 6e vx <^avouve 
 
 A. Es'j3aia ! 
 
 r. KaXo 1 BaXss. s£ oOfca^st; xps'a; [3ou- 
 d'tvo <^ia (SfouTTSfi fcvi €oaW. AsV.a, 
 i'pviSet;. 'Ev apvl <5"ia p.a"ysipv)UTO.... 
 
 E- Ti (haSoXo ! Aura oOavouvs v« 
 «tXsuffo> qXyi tt,v wsXiTeia 2 
 
 r. 'on t» .... 
 
 E. ( [Sakci to yspt tou si; to <ro'p,a tc3 
 *up Tiavvrj ). A' xa.TYipap.ivs! 'Eau 6s 
 va cpa; 0X0 to 610$ p.ou. 
 
 X\ Eup^ia , SaXar 
 
 E» ( asTx tou opK^si to (ro'p.a;. Atfo'aa; 
 
 (a) ©erraXutov I'Qo; va ffpo^s'pw&iv &; eirl to 7tXsT<tov xa apcevtxa cvop.ata 
 as apOpov SyiXu/.o'v. H' c'JVYi9e».a Ep.eivsv aff'o, tou; ffaXatou; Awpis"; p.a£. 'Ex.sTvct 
 4'Xsvov,« Y^Tapxapo;, vi 060770;, yj Ic6p.b; », xal 6'Xa xa oOata^ixa xcov 
 waauTw;' i'^e ■ffspt AtaXsV/irov IajcsoC Zu-y/.epov. OEconomus. 
 
 (1) It is difficult here to give , in English ; a correct idea of the 
 different senses of the Aorist ©qh'oevs > and the Present xaw^ouve. 
 
ONOMASTICON 
 
 OR 
 
 LIST OF WORDS OF MORE IMMEDIATE USE 
 UNDER DIFFERENT HEADS, 
 
 4.VWWV* 4AAAMA* WVWIV* 
 
 N. B. This Mark * indicares Word's to be of Hellenic 6rigin not yet ge- 
 nerally in use, this mark § Words, of foreign origin very generally in use* 
 
 Of Heaven and the Elements ■. 
 flip i tou eupavou xx\ tuv ?otxet<sy. 
 
 1 tod , 6 <^sb§ , gen, cu. 
 
 Jesus-Christ, 'ivjcrcu- ICp^o?, cu. 
 The Holy Spirit, rd otyov "7rvej^a. 
 The Virgin , ^ Travoqia, ia;, tq 0so- 
 
 t:occ; , ou„ 
 The Angels, ei a-^sXct, w»j 
 The Saints , ot a^toi , iwv. 
 Heaven , e oupavo; , ou. 
 The Heavens or Firmament , T £ 
 
 ^gpi'wua , arc?. 
 Paradise , 6 wapa<hi<ra$ , cu. 
 Hell , 7) *o'Xa<i ; > ew?» 
 Purgatory, to aaSapno'piov Grup ), toy. 
 The Evil Spirit , 6 £taj3oXo; , ou. 
 Fire, -fi <pioTta, ta?. * t£ rcup, tgu «upos. 
 Air, 6 ae'pa; , a. 
 Sea , if) OaXacca , vi?. 
 Earth , v) <yyj, •?;$. 2 ( t6 x^^*? kto ? 3 ) 
 
 Land opposed to Sea, Vi s-epea , 
 
 Sun , orXteej tou. 
 
 Moon, to cpe'napt , ecu, * tj <j£Xy'vy)> »;. 
 
 Star, e Rcrip > ~ e'p*?. t© «<7poy. 
 
 Ray , Beam , •£ * fork , tvo?. Sun 
 
 Beams , at r.Xiaxat a*T:ve$. 
 Cloud , ro <7uwe<pcv , ou. it clouds, is, 
 
 or is becoming cloudy, c'jvveoia^ei. 
 Wind , o avey,o; , cu. 6 aspa;. it is 
 
 windy, tpu(ja. 
 P«.ain , ^ ppoy^ , vJc» Heavy Raia , 
 
 pa^alx £pcx"fl. Drought , ava- 
 
 ppc/'.a. avc{js.(3pia , &?. 
 Thunder, Clap of Thunder, $ 6pov- 
 
 tt. , r;. It thunders, (SpovTa. 
 Lightning, * irpawYi, vj ; . it lightens, 
 
 GcTpaTrret. 
 Hail, to yxl&fy , tou. it hails, v^aXaftx* 
 
 or pi'nrTet x.aXa^{. 
 Thunderbolt,* 6jwpauvb;, cu. a^c 
 
 tccXshl 
 Snow, Toxio'vt, iou. it snows, ^tcvtC*t. 
 Frost, 6 rca-pc , ou. it freezes , ira~ 
 
 •yo'vet. 
 Ice , o xpus-aXXo? , ©u. 
 Dew, ^^po'ao?,oo. vifycaiJc, i£$« 
 Fog , Mist , + xaTaxvta , ia?. 
 Earthquake, 6 casfio? , cu. 
 Deluge, Flood , i xaTaxXu<m5; , «£ 
 Heat , ti ^eVfl » vtt . 
 
 Cold 
 
 y T5 JtpUOV j CU* 
 
Of Times and Seasons. 
 
 flept 7cu xsupou »a; toW up&v t&uetou;« 
 
 Day 5 ^ v\as'pac, a$. 
 Night , ^ vu^to, , a$. * ttj; vuxto's; 
 Noon , to {Asuviaspt, tou-. 
 Midnight, t« ^saavuxra. 
 Dawn , r, aupi , «s- 
 Daybreak, T a ^apafAaara. ra |wfjcspe5- 
 p,«ra. it dawns, or is dawning, 
 
 Sunset , ^ ^uat^. t\ Paff(Xeu k «.a tou 
 
 ViXtcu. the Sun is setting , {Jaoi- 
 
 XeC'st 6 f'Xtc?. 
 T!ie Morning , to* 7roupvo , ou- 
 Evening, T0 ppa^u , cteS. adv. dbco- 
 
 (Jpa&n;. This evening , d«o'<j/e. 
 Hour, yj t'opa. half hour, pwrhfyai. 
 
 quarter of an hour, to * TSTaprcv, 
 
 cu. to § xouapro , tu« 
 To day, cTjtupov. 
 Yesterday , e^Gs?. e%'$. 
 To morrow , auptov. the day after 
 
 to morrow , t-qv aXXr,v riuipav , 
 
 ttjv erauptcv. 
 The day before yesterday , xpo^flsc. 
 The day after to morrow, ajQauptcv. 
 Alter dinner, to awo-Yeup.a* 
 Week , YJ ||Uop.a£a , c$. 
 Month , 6 y.-frva;, * tou pwjva'j. 
 1 'ear , o xP Q ' v °5 j ou - ^ Ito.?, cu?« 
 
 yj xpovia , ta;. I wish you a happy 
 
 new year , c «$ eSjpjmu aaXviv 
 
 Moment , * ?l ^ , yfc. 
 Spring , ?i avoifis , yj;» 
 Summer , to xaXoxatpi , tou. 
 Autumn , to 1 ^Qivo'-irwpov , ou. 
 'Winter, 6 xetpuvac, a. 'Tis winter, 
 
 X£i{/.wvia<js. 
 festival , ^ loprvj , ife. Holyday , 
 
 aq 070'Xn, y;;. 
 Working day , ^ x«0npipwft , vJ^ B 
 
 1 63 
 2taj.f 0/ ffo Week. 
 
 At H t uipat; ttj? 'E^ojua^ee* 
 
 Monday, y^ (huTe'pa, ec$. 
 Tuesday, titbit*)* n;. 
 Wednesday , vj re-pa^ , m;. 
 Thursday, ^ tts^t^ » ««■ 
 Friday, yj 7rapacr)CcU7: , vie- 
 Saturday, to § aafJfJotTO, ou. 
 Sunday , yj xuptowq , jfo 
 
 2%e Months. 
 
 January , § o Javouapto? , tou. 
 February , § 6 ipsSpcudptoc , im> 
 March , § 6 pap nog, tou. 
 April , § o airptXios , ts»> 
 May » § o {/.d'to; , tou. 
 June, § 6 louvto'c , tou. 66ept<7YK» vj. 
 July, § 6 iwXto; , tou. 6 aXwvapng, «* 
 August , § 6 aufousres , cu. 
 September , § 6 oswrsjApaws , iouj 
 
 6 Tpu-yTitr,; , $. 
 October , § 6 ojtTwpptog , tou. 
 November , § 6 vos'fxSpto? , tou. 
 December , § 6 <hxs>Ppto? , tou. 
 
 Fasts and Festivals. 
 
 At S^o'Xaig > set EopTaTg. 
 
 New Year's Day , to vsgv etc?, yj 
 ( xu.£pa ) tou oV^iou BaouXeiou. 7iaf- 
 
 . JWCP ovl **. 
 
 Circumcision , yj ^eptTo^ ? *);• 
 
 Epiphany, Twelfth day , toc Sec? a- 
 veta. Ta <pcoTa. 
 
 Carnival , r] aicoxpeia, eta?, plur. 
 at d7v05cpeiaT?. 
 
 Lent, -ji aapaxo^-vi , 715. ■« Tssffapa" 
 jco^yj. 
 
 Fast, 7i vviceta, etas* to fast , to ab- 
 stain from flesh, vticeuw* rpw-ye 
 ^^victu.a, - cotpaxo^tava«to break 
 
x6\{ 
 
 fast voluntarily , JtaraX^a. - in- 
 voluntarily, apratvoaat. aor. uflvjv. 
 
 To eat flesh, rjpw*ye> Tvaar/jxXtvoc , -j» 
 apTUcr.u.a. 
 
 Passion Week , $ fwyaXvi i^oit^a. 
 
 Palm Sunday, t<x Pacta, ai«v- 
 
 Good-Friday , vj p.s<yaXY) irapaffXEUTr* 
 
 Easter Day , Vj AauTrpW , •«;. 
 
 Easter, T <$ n^xa- 
 
 Ascension , 7» ava>^i? , * eo;. 
 
 Whit, Sunday, yj irevTVixo?*!, 
 
 All Saints, ■« IcpTr, twv ave'tav -jvavTMv. 
 
 Christmas day , t* yjpif ofrysvya > cay- 
 
 Harvest , 6 8epi<jud; , o5- 
 
 Vintage , o Tgu-yog , eu. 
 
 Ecclesiastic Orders, 
 
 Tlepl exHXTiOUxq-txav A'£uojv,aTWV. 
 
 Patriarch, oir«?fw«p#sc, cu et v 
 Metropolitan , 6 pjTpo«oXiTYi§ , ou. 
 Archbishop , 6* apxiswicrxpwes , cu. 
 
 6 <5"iCf^rj'r"/;? , cu. 
 Bishop , o s ^i<jx.c—og , cu. 
 Legate , 6 scapes; , cu, 
 Presbyter, Priest, 6 rcpco-quTcpos , cu. 
 
 o -^a-rea; ; a- 6 teped? , £<■>?. 
 Archdeacon , 6 apy^iaaovo; , cu. 
 
 Subdeacon, uWtoxovos , cu. 
 Beacon, 6 £tax,cvo; . cu. 
 Archimandrite , 6 apx l f**v£p(Tn$, cu 
 
 or r ( . 
 Curate , £ e<pvj 4 usptos , toy. 
 Prior, 6 rr/ouuLsvcs , cu- 
 Monk, 6 jtaXo-jtspcs , cu- 6 p.waT«v, 
 
 CVT0C- 
 
 Nun, vi scaXcYpeta, sia?- "« * fiCva£ouea,Yi;. 
 
 Preacher , 5 ispe/«ipu£ , uxo;. 
 
 Hermit , <$ kuxvitv)? , ou- 
 
 Convent , Monastery, T o p,Gva<r«pw;vj 
 
 Customary Articles of food [ 
 
 Ta '.TAe'ov cuvctOccaJva 
 
 Bread, 
 
 ro tywiM , toy. 
 
 new bread, 
 
 E^xaipc^. I gain my bread — 
 my livelihood, sj3ya£a> To^OfMucu- 
 Water , to vapiv , cu. clear , pure 
 water , jeaOapov vege'v- — thick , 
 disturbed QoXoV — cool , ^u^poV 
 hot, ^o'v- lukewarm , tepid , 
 yXtapo'v. — boiling , j3pa?o'v- 
 Wine , to xpaat, too. 
 Bleat , to Jcps'as , eaTO?. 
 Fish, to «|>a'pi, tou — fresh, § r ar 
 ^e'rix.o. vw-rro'v. — * stale , <jaj(Xov». 
 Boiled Meat, to 6pa<rov. to vcpi- 
 
 3p«£0, cu. 
 Roast Meat , T o $yjt-ov , cu- 
 Cake , Pie , to § fAivoupsiu , too. 
 
 to 7TXa/.cuvTiov , icu. v 7T'-a, a;. 
 Soup , § iij (jcu-a , a;- 
 Broth , to C« 4 ut , tou. 
 Salad „ § »j <yaX»ra , a;. 
 Sauce, § tq saXr^a , a;. *to E'aPap 
 
 p.x , arc?- 
 Ragout, Hash, to apTuaa, *t*s» 
 
 to xapuxeufxa 5 octo;. 
 Dessert , § t« ©pourr-a , wv- ra otto- 
 
 pi)dc , «v- 
 Cheese , to rupt , tou. 
 
 Table Articles, 
 
 Ta wepl rr,v Tpcc-^s:v. 
 
 Table , to Tpaws'Ci , icu. 
 
 Chair, § yj xapixXa, a;. xo&asXa, «?•' ' 
 
 Table cloth , to Tpa7Te£op.fl«!.TtXo , txu 
 
 or ou. 
 
 Fork ^ TO ITYipCUV. , tea. 
 Knife , tj p,a/acpt , to& 
 Table-napkin , § ti rar^ta , a?. 
 Spoon, to xou-aXt, tou» to ^cuXtapi, &CU. 
 Gravy spocnj sauce-spoon, #ouT«Xa- 
 
plate, § t6 wiottc, ou- to Tptvaato.v, tou. 
 Dish , § to ttiotto , ou- yj arcXa^a, a?. 
 Candle , § to xeoi, tou- Taper , r6 
 
 oVytaxspt , tou. 
 Lamp , § ~h XouT^e'pva. * 6 Xupcc. 
 Night, Lamp, § to xavrtXt ? tou. 
 Wick , to cpuTtXt , vou- 
 Candlestick ., to Xu/vapt, tou. 
 Snuffers , to ^aXt^cxEpt. to xepo^a- 
 
 Xt^c , tou. 
 Chafing Dish , § % <pou(3ou , ou?. 
 
 ^ (pvjyou. ■ 
 Basin , § y\ Xexocvn , k- 
 Water Jug , to xcupxpi , ^ou. 
 Cup, Glass, Tuou-jva, a?, to woTVip^tbu. 
 Bottle, § ii p.T;cTtXXta. to p.-rro>4aXi ? tou. 
 
 Large — , ^ota'Xa. 
 Tea or Coffee-cup, § T b <pXtT^a'vt, toy. 
 Saucer, § T b £ap<?t , to y. 
 Porringer , 6 § TSVT-Sesej , e\ 
 Coyer, § i Trocro^a , a;. 
 Large Basket, to xo<ptvi tou- Large 
 
 hand basket , Vi xaXafla, a;. Hand 
 
 basket, T b xaXaOt , tou. 
 Bread tray , r, 7irtva^wTV2 , r;- 
 3 £ Pints, § r, 6*xa , a; , phir. at 
 
 Animals etc, us'd for food. 
 
 Zwa e^cocJ'iy.a, xat ^obcpa ei'^Yj twv 
 xpsarcov. 
 
 Ox , to pw^t , tou. Ox-beef , T b 
 S&^ivo'v , ou- understood xps'a;. 
 
 Cow, t, or/eXa^a, a;. Cow-beef, to 
 a-pXa^ivov xpc'a;. 
 
 Call , to tj.ooyj.pi, toy. Teal, to* 
 (Aoo-^apto-tov. 
 
 Sheep , to 7rpo'Pa-ov. Mutton , to 
 
 7Tpd£stOV, stou. 
 Ewe, Yi TrpoSaTiva , a?. 
 Lamb , T o xpvt, tou- the Meat , T b 
 
 apvigtoy , tou, 
 Log , Pig" , T« 'ycupouvt , tou. o yol- 
 
 i<35 
 
 ps? , ou. Pork , to x ''p tv ov , ou* 
 Fowl , -fl opvtfla, , a?. § r xo'ra , a£* 
 
 Hatching Hen , % KXtosea , a;. 
 Cock , o TTJTStviJ; , ou. 
 Hash, Mince, xpea; appeXt<rov , -^ 
 
 xpuu,s'vgv. 
 Sweetbread , T a -^Xuxa^ta , ta>v. 
 Tart , § i\ wtra- Must-cake , ^ 
 
 [/.ou^aXsupta , ta?. 
 Ham , to ^otpojAspt , tou. 
 Sausage, § T b Xouxovtxo, cu. 
 Smok'd meat , 6 7ra<70upp.a; , a« 
 /b/«?-meat, § 6 xecpTe? , e. § © vtoX« 
 
 p-a; , a. 6 <rapf/,as, a. 
 Caviar, T b ya£t*pi. igu- 
 Salt fish-roe , to au^oTapavo , ou.' 
 Pilaf , § to 7rtXoc^t , tou- 
 Sweetmeats, § 6 ^aXSa? , a. 
 Melon , to* tcstto'vi , tou- Water 
 melon , to ^ei k u.ovtxo < , ou. § t£ 
 jcafTrou^t , toy. 
 Cucumber , to a-y^oupt , tou. 
 Gourd, to" xoXoxuvQtov , tou. to xoXo* 
 
 xu6t , toy. 
 Chicken . to raTetvo'-rrcuXov , ou. § ?£ 
 xotq'ttouXov , ou* Chickling , t$ 
 xXtoacoTCOuXt , toy. 
 Pigeon , to TTEpt^e'pt , toy. young 
 
 Pigeon , to rcepKrepaxi , toy. 
 Woodcock, r] opviQo^aXto^a, a?. § r\ 
 
 ^TUxaT'Ca , a; , y\ i-uXo'xoTCf , a?. 
 Partridge , r) <7rep<hx& , a;. 
 Thrush , r\ x ( x xa , a?. 
 Figpecker , 6 ouxo^a^o? , ou. 
 Lark, 6 xopu^aXb?, ou. r ^-apiflpa, a^> 
 
 ( tq auTapt'6pa. ) 
 Quail , to opTy-yt , tou. 
 Pheasant } 6 oy.ortocvo^ > ou. 
 Turkey , § r\ xs 6 ?X a , a;. § ?£ 
 
 VTivTto, tou.- ^tavo; , ■yaXXo?. ou. 
 Gqosc, yj pv«, a;. Goslin, to xvi- 
 
 vaV.i , tou. 
 Duck , -fi TrairiTia. to ira77irt. tc3. 
 
 Duckling , T ^ t.^ktAm , toy. 
 Hare t o Xc^b; , ou« 
 
i66 
 
 Rabbit, § to scruvaXXi , too. young 
 
 Rabbit , to y.cuveXXdxt > tou. 
 Deer , to tapxd^t , tou. 
 Wild Boar , to d-^picyoupouv© > toy. 
 Stag , * yj s>.x<po? , ou. to iXdsi, ttu. 
 Game, rd a^p'^t , iou. to xuvr.71 , tew. 
 
 Fat 
 
 , to r>a.-/s<; , ou;. 
 
 Season ing for food, 
 
 Ta aoTUorista, 
 
 Salt , to aXa? , aT0$. 
 Pepper , re TriTs'pt , tou. 
 Pimento, yj ^i^epta, d$. 
 Oil , to Xd^t ^ tcu- 
 Vinegar, T 6 #& , wS. 
 Verjuice, * ityoupuhc , a?. 
 Mustard , to «tvdm , t©u. S ^ H-o- 
 
 cap^a , a?. 
 Clove > § to •yapoucpaXo , ou. 
 Cinnamon , * to xtwdu.wp.ov , ou« 
 
 § T[ xavs'XXa , a;. 
 Caper, yj xd7nrapYi , yj$. 
 Laurel , ^ ^dawi , yic 
 Mushroom, to ^av.Tdpt, toy. 
 Onion , to xpou.p.uch , i«u. 
 Garlic , to" axope^o 5 cy. to* ov,o'- 
 
 po^cv , ou* 
 Orange , to rcopTe^dXXt j toy- Se- 
 ville Orange , to 1 vspavT^, leu. 
 Lemon, to Xt^o'vt , iou. 
 Parsley , ^ {/.av^ave;? ou. to u.ax.s- 
 
 <$Wct, toy. ^ (jwpaxha , tag- 
 Celery , to ceXtvcv ? ou. 
 Purslan , r. ■jXus'pi^a , a«. 
 Endive , wixpaXiifcs , t<5W pa^us*. 
 Lettuce, to {/.apouXtj too- 
 Cress , to xdpthxp.ov , oy. rk xds^a- 
 
 p.a. Small Salad , caXdrs. 01.7:0 s 
 
 xdp^au-a. 
 Butter , TO SoUTUpOV 5 O'J. 
 
 Lard 9 to yjstptvov reaves. 
 
 Milk , to -ydXa , tsu "ydXxRTO?. 
 E §S 3 to «U7« , ou. hard egg , 
 
 du-yov -rrnxTo'v. Soft egg , tymoi* 
 Poached egg, ceO-ya rvy«n?& 
 Omelet , to o-^cuyyaTO , ou. 
 
 Fish. 
 
 Ydpia. 
 
 Shellfish , ra o^paxo'iJspu.a 9 wv» 
 Cray- fish, yj xapaot^a , o;, 
 Prawn , V» fapt^a > a?. 
 Lobster, q d^axo; , ou. 
 Muscle , to p.u£t , tou. 
 Oyster , T 6 yptft, tou. 
 
 Scallop, TO KTSVtj toy. 
 
 Razor-shell, ^ owXfiva, «c« 
 
 Sole , TQ-^Xcooaa , *i;» 
 
 Eel , to jikx j tou- 
 
 Roach , yj rpi^Xv!. § to {i7tapu.ffouv£» 
 
 Pilchard, § y; oapch'XXa , a;. 
 
 Anchovy, Smelt, ^ caapt^a, a?> 
 
 Vegetables, 
 
 Xoprapixd. 
 
 Peas , § T « iri&'XXt*. Chickpeas, 
 to ps^Cet, toy. Parch'd peas , -h 
 Tpci)Y«.Xt« , id;. 
 
 Artichoke , v\ di'xtvdpa ? a;. 
 
 Spinage , § toc oravdxxta? ta>v. 
 
 Sorrel , yj £uv(8pa } a;. 
 
 Beans , Ta xouxta , ta>v. 
 
 Kidney - Beans , toc ttaaeuXta, tSv* 
 
 Turnip , , to *^"yuXt, toy. 
 
 Radish , to p 2 77 aw 5 toy. 
 
 Carrot, * to £auxo$ , cu;. Ta pe'l«a. 
 
 Leek , to wpdoov , cu. 
 
 Asparagus , to a^apd^-yt, toy. 
 
 Cabbage, ?6 Xd^avov , ou- to xpau.- 
 7rt, toy. to /.pajA-nroXd^avov. 
 
 Cauliflower, to xouvou^t^t , toy. 
 
 Pickled Cucumber , y, d-^Youpapji.tfc 
 
 Sourcrout, r, Xa/avapaia 7 ta;. 
 
 Rice , TO pt^t ? tcCi. 
 
"The Dessert, 
 
 Ta e-jrwpwa'. 
 
 Apple, yb pftev,G3« Apple Tree, 
 
 ii t u.y)Xta j t«j. 
 Pear , to a:n£i , tou. Pear Tree ? 
 
 •h aroe tot ? ta;. 
 Peach , to pc^oV.vov ? cu. Peach 
 
 Tree , r, po^axivta, ta;» 
 Apricot , § to xafffi , tou. § 75 napTa- 
 
 Xou^a , a;. Apricot Tree , v xai- 
 
 <na, ta,-. 7) T^apTaXcucha , ta,'- 
 Cherry, to xspaVt, tou. Cherry Tree, 
 
 yj xepaaia , ta;. 
 %"ig ? t» cuxov , cu. Fig Tree , <3 
 
 <nx:a, e«;. 
 Pium , to ^a^afffctivcv ? «u. Plum- 
 
 iree, vj ^ajAac/^vta , ta<;. 
 Strawberry , § ^ cppaouXa , a? . 
 Grape , T « ca^uXt , tou. Vine , T d 
 
 ap/rcsXi , tou. 
 Pomegranate , T0 £<o£i , W u. Pome- 
 granate Tree, vj £ wo \ a - , l5; . 
 Sweets , Sweetmeats, to T Xuxb , ou- 
 Walnut, to xap^t, tou. Walnut 
 
 Tree , -fi xapu^ta , ta;. 
 Nut, to Xe^ro'xapov, tou- § Nut Tree, 
 
 TO CpOVTOllKl, tGU. 
 
 Chesnut, T0 xaVavov , o». Chesnut 
 Tree, ^xa<ravta, ta?. 
 
 Almond , T o ap.u-ytaov, ou. Almond 
 Tree , j) df/.uy<^aXia , ta;. 
 
 Mulberry, T o auxa>tvcv, cu. Mul- 
 berry Tree, * cuxa.utvia , ta;. 
 
 Quince, T0 xu<5am , tou. Quince 
 Tree , ^ salvia, ta;. 
 
 OliTe and Olive Tree, ^ Xa k. ac . 
 
 Degrees of Kindred. 
 
 \ BaGj/.ot tts; (ru^^Eveta?. 
 
 Father , h *x?i m , «. * Tc5 waT ^. 
 Mother , 4 ^T3 ?a , T yj ; ^ rpo < ? . * 
 //.awa , a;. . 
 
 1 6? 
 
 Grandfather , I *&**. 6 w 
 
 TCOUXY); 5 VJ. 
 
 Grandmother., rWpcpmap , ,w 
 Great, Grandfather, 6 \^L 
 
 W95 ? ou- 
 
 Son , j yj^ ■ fa 
 
 Daughter, ,u 0?YJ , ^ * flaYfl6T£ 
 
 ttI; 6ufaTpo';. 
 Bother, c a <hx 9 o;, ou. —Mater- 
 nal , oAXcps; a ^a R ,tg> a , — : 
 Paternal, cato irarepx. Brother 
 and Sister , or two Brothers , 
 toc a<h>;ia. 
 Sister, Vj a £sX<$ , y?;. 
 Eldest , pvf&fotps f epy , # fe?0V(/ 
 wpeo^urepos , e'pa, ef0 v. n ^ 
 Totox©;, 6, ft, 
 Youngest , Wo ' T;po; , £0TJ ,. epov . 
 vewrepo; , ipa , e p 0v . 
 
 Uncle , 6 Osbtc , cu. 6 ^a'ptxTra; , *. 
 Aunt , ^ 6si ' a f a?# ^ tf ^ ^ 
 
 Nephew, 6 avsfo, , tou. Niece , 
 
 ^ avs^ta , ta;. 
 Grandson, — Grand Daughter , 
 
 o » TQ ^"yovo;, ou- 
 Cousin, 6 il^a^ yen. 
 Brother in Law, 6 pvatxa'^X?,;, «,. 
 
 o T a ^Ppo; , ou. § 6 xouvvciaroc , cu. 
 lister m Law, ^ pvatxa^v!, yj;. 
 
 •'T xouvvotara , a;. 
 Step-Father, 6 mBt?h( , e0< . 
 
 TputS; , ou. Step-Mother, v^ we fiipa, 
 
 a;> vi u.yjTputa, uta;. 
 
 Mep-children, T i w ^vt«, t5>v. 
 
 Sons Wife, * vup . ?yj , ^. 
 Parents , l T ov£l;, £W v. ot yovetol, um. 
 Husband, Wife & * „<r 
 Biidegroom, 6 vu^io;, t'cu. 6 w - 
 
 % ? , eg. Bride, ^vu w , , t . 
 Illegitimate, voV ,,, Gv . § ^^ ar 
 
 Godfather, § ^^ , cu . Go(L 
 mother, ^ou^apa, a; . Alsa 
 Persons giving away a Bride. 
 
i68 
 
 Sponsor, 6 ava^c^e;, cu. § 6 vcvo;. ou. 
 
 Female, Sponsor, f, avo^ox*^ *> vova '- 
 
 Godson, God daughter, 6 , -n deva- 
 
 ^£y.-rd; , ou , 6 pa:rn<rtu.io'; ou, ^ 
 
 Woman in Childbed, 7) Xs^tuo-a, a?. 
 
 jNurse, x fju^acpa, a;.:?)77apau7'vva,x;. 
 
 Relation , 6 , tj c-j-^yevyj; , ou;. Rela- 
 tions ^ oi 81»7^V6t5 > wv. 
 
 Friend , © ytXeg * ou* — ^ ci'Xrj > x;- 
 ri eptXsvx&^x, a;. 
 
 Enemy , tyb?o$ , a , oV 
 
 Widower, Widow, 5 XA 00 ? > *> "/. T '? a « 
 
 Heir Heiress , 6 , -h xXy)covc'«,o?. 
 
 Guardian , 6 Eswrp6wog , cu. Ward, 
 
 * £T'.Tf O^UCLUVO; j TO £7TtTS07;c'J0U.t'- 
 
 v/i 6 , iq , KytyXixeg. 
 
 Betrothing , 6 appacoiv.aaao? , off. 
 
 Marriage , V; uTrav^peia , £ta;. 
 
 Wedding , 6 -yaao; j cu. 
 
 Alliance by Marriage , r, avpizzM*- 
 pjia , aa; , The Persons so al- 
 lied , to cugureOsp&toy. ra eupwre" 
 fepiaxa. 
 
 Different States of Mail 
 
 and JF'bman. 
 
 Atstacpoi xaTa^ocast-; t©3 av^po; scat 
 
 ts; fuva'.v.o'j. 
 
 Man Mankind generic , 6 avOpu- 
 *»c Man specific , husband , 
 
 6 avo^pa; , reu av^pc';. 
 Woman , Wife, r, -yuvaTxa,- a?. 
 
 Old Man , * 6 -yepwv , evre?. 
 
 Old 
 Woman , y\ -ypaia , ai'a;. Old , 
 ^spo; , -ypsia, eta?.' 
 
 Young, new, veog , ea , s'ov. Young 
 Man , youth, o V so?, Young 
 Woman, 3 yea- 
 
 Lover, Sweetheart , © a-j-a-r-iKo; , 
 cii. 6 epa<^y,; >eu. 6 £ptau.svo; , r, a-ya- 
 ^r,TixTi. % gpa<rpia. r c'peoaa'vr,. 
 
 Infant , to (Sestfo; , ou;. Child, to 
 
 Boy, to <x$pi , tcu. Girl, $ x^ 
 
 little Girl , to xcpaartov > (ou=. 
 Bachelor, 6 avurav^po;, ou. 
 Bachelor , Spinster , o , i wapftevsc. 
 Master , Mistress of the House , 
 
 o vGtxoxupv;;, yj. r, voi/.oapa , a;. 
 Man-Servant j Maid-Servant , « 
 
 (^cuXo?, ri ^ouXcc. 
 Maid-Servant , § j oavTlrfxa. r.£cu- 
 
 XeuTpa, a;. 
 Peasant , c x«p'-*'~^? > t- Peasant 
 
 Girl , y> y«piaT'.cro-a , a;- 
 Stranger , Foreigner , £ivo; , r„ ov. 
 Pauper, cp-royjc , r, , o'v- 
 Mendicant , Beggar , 6 frtixvcf; , cu. 
 
 ^wao^Tr.c , 6b- 
 Thief, ox.Xe'cprr,;, r, or ou. 
 
 O/" Dress. 
 
 Ta ir£pl tx c'v^uaxTa.' 
 
 Coat, to cpc'pEjia j (Xtc*. § to pcu^-j : ' j * 
 Hat , § 73 JcaTrsXXo'. * to ffxwc^iovj iou. 
 ^ x £ > § ^ TTiiou/./.a, a;. 
 Cravat , 6 Xaiu.c<hV/:'; , r, or cu- 
 Cloak , to £^<oc:p( 3 tou. to i~'j.'K>yyl~ 
 
 p€ti.« 5 arc;. 
 Waistcoat , § to y.X/x'i. § to sox.- 
 
 x.ap^i ; icu- 
 Smallclothes, Breeches,§ T 6 Spa/.l/.c5» 
 Drawers , to irfwp^xo , nu- 
 Stocking, §y.aXT?>.. § to y.aXT^uv'., tou. 
 Shoe, § to ■xo.t;o~j~'C: , tou- 
 Shirt , § to UTTCx.aa'.acv, cu. 
 Sleeve , | to p,av'i/.'. > ou. 
 C^P 5 § V! orjcoucpta , ta;. 
 Scurlcap, to ©eat , tou. 
 Pocket, § v) r^iiiti, v;^ 
 Ribbon , String , Lace , f, xcp<h'X- 
 
 Xa , a;. 
 Button , T b y.oaTri , icu- 
 Buttonhole , ^ 6v;X£ia , st?.;- also 
 
 slipknot. 
 
Knot t i xo'aTTc; 5 CUi 
 Glove , to y_etpoV.Tt ? to5« 
 Handkerchief , § 70 pavTiXt , top? 
 Cbaplet , string of Beads , to xepr 
 
 'jroXc'Yi , tou- 
 Watch , to wpoX^iov , 10U- 
 Buckle , § ■« oiarria, t«5- 
 Garter , jcaXT£e£sTYi$ , yi or c «. 
 Ring, to ^axTuXt^i, tou. 
 Comb , to xte'vt , tou. 
 Razor , to £upa<pt ? tou. 
 Sword , to cwafit , icu- Sword 
 
 Wound , 7) o7:a8ta , ia?- 
 Girdle ., i Itfvvj , «?• Waist-band, 
 
 to 6pay.ot(6vn ? to?. 
 Pistol , § -h 7u<roXa, a?- Pistol-ball 
 
 Wound , y) w^oXta , tag- 
 Bridle , § to *ysp.t , tou- * e X*Xtvos ? 
 
 ou. *to yjxXtvscpt ? tou- 
 Halter, § to* xamcpt ; io5. 
 Saddle , * to ei^fjrmiv 5 icu. § ^ ce'X- 
 
 Xa ? a;. 
 Stirrup , r -rrarnTpta ? ta§> § to 
 
 XvytX, ecu. 
 Whip , r, [xoc^a » etc- 
 Switch , to" pafJo^l , tou - 
 Boot , to Oiro'b^naa ? arog* 
 Spur , to cptapvtgr.pt , tou- 
 Head-dress , § to ej»uq><»«/.a , ato*. 
 
 to kTevtcixa ? arcs. 
 Petticoat , to {ucocpougavo , tou. 
 Apron, i\ <jrc<^a> tot?. 
 Gown, To<pou?-avi> tou- -h § po'j/.iraj a?. 
 Pearl, to p.ap*yaptTapt , tou. 
 iSecklaee, Vj apj/.a6ta, i«s. vi Tpa^Xtoc- 
 Ear-ring , to oxoXaoi/tt ? iou« 
 Curled , § y.aT^apo? , yi, o'v- a-ycupos > 
 ■» , dv. Oiie with curled hair , 
 c-jcupo[A«XY);;.Hair-band or buckle, 
 to xaT^ape. to ^ou-ypo'. 
 Fan, to ave{.u<pipt , tou. 
 Busk , § 6 {/.iroueros , ou. 
 Bracelet , to 1 Ppax'.o'Xt , tou. 
 Pin , i) xapcptT^a 5 «g.- ri €eX«- 
 
 169 
 
 Pincushion , § to" jcou(3«pt , tou. 
 
 Scissars , to ^aXio\ , tou. 
 
 Thimble , r\ (SVxrtuXr.epa , aq. 
 
 Needle , to PsXc'vt , tou. 
 
 Thread , r xXw^ , rfc. 
 
 Paint, to cpTtacuch , tou. to fcomva^M 
 
 tou- I rouge, epTtetvojMu. Rouged,, 
 
 ajxe'vo?- 
 Beauty-spot , yj eXeta eta?. 
 Rose Water , ps<h>Vap.9 , ou- 
 Hair-Powder , tf wtfiit > «?, 
 
 BOX , T« KOUTl j IOU. 
 
 Jewels, Ta <hau;avTi>ca ? wv, ?& -jfrs^ 
 
 -pa^ta , i£>v. 
 Diamond , to oNaaxvTt ■> tou, 
 Emerald , t$ Gf/.apavfS'i , tou. 
 Ruby, to pouaiuv. , tou. 
 Toothpick ,* j] o^ov-o^'Xuwt; , t£o$. ! 
 Cloth , to iravvt , tou. 
 Distaff, r, po'joea , a?. 
 Sphidle , t6 K^pajcTi 5 too. 
 
 Silik. , TO p.£Ta^t j tCU. 
 
 Worsted , to p.aXXt , tou. 
 Starch, glue , § i « 'XXa , « ? J 
 
 Soap , to caircuvt , tou. 
 Sheath, Needlecase, r, Owxvj, v.;. vj 
 (3£Xovo6wy), *!<;» 
 
 Prt/fi 1 o/' f/ze Body. 
 Ta f^eprj tou cwp.aT0?, ; 
 
 Body , to 1 xopftt , tou. Shape , Size 
 Height , t6 avacrti{it,a , aTog. § t<3 
 {iTTo't , tou. Waist , tq p,jcv) 7 r,$- 
 
 Head , to xecpocXt, tou. 
 
 Face , to TrpocwTtov, ou. ^ (xsufn - 
 iq;. Vulgarly, xk p,ouTpa, tav. 
 
 Forehead, T 6 xcutsXXo ; ou. * to ;>. ■- 
 
 TW77CV 5 CU. 
 
 Eye , to p.art , tou. Glanee, ^ p,a- 
 
 Tta, ta?. 
 Eyebrow , T 6 cppu^i , tsu.' 
 Eyeiid , to €Xs<papov , ou. 
 Eyelashes, T a ji«tTo»Xa^« , twv; 
 12 
 
tJO> 
 Pupil of t!ie eye , $ y.^y , *s. 
 Ear , to aurt , ioi>. 
 Hair , -h rpt'xoc , as. Head of Hair, 
 
 the Hair , toc [/.aXXia , t&v 
 Temple , 6 xpoTa^o?, ou. s tiviXt-y 
 
 Y*« , «• 
 Cheek , § tV jjLocyouXo $ ou. 
 Hose , y\ {/,'jtv: , vi?. 
 !N6stril , to' pouGouvt, teu. 
 Beard , ra -vsveia , etwv. to shave, 
 
 i-up-'Cop.ou , shaved , vpivog. 
 Mouth , to* c%a , arc;. 
 Tooth , to' ^o'vti , iou. 
 Tongue , $ -.j-XtoGcra , uij. 
 
 ^P > T ° l X e ^°s » cu? - 
 Mustachio , to' j^eus-axa , .ttw. 
 
 Chin 
 
 j TQ 17-VjYOUVt 5 lOW. 
 
 Keck , 6 Xaip:o; , o3.. 
 Throat , 6 cpapu-y; , u-yyos. 
 
 Back, 
 
 7j pacx r ' » r 'S- 
 
 Shoulder , $ ttXoctyj , vi?. 
 
 Arm, cppc-x.i'-'iv, ovoc. to' x £ '? 1 » lc ^> 
 
 Elbow, 6 «7"j'wv«i;, a. 
 
 Fist . 
 
 o T?l 
 
 580; , cu. Blow with the 
 
 fist , V) *ypo9ia , a?. 
 Rand , to' x s P l ? te "° 
 Finger s to ^aVroAo > ou. 
 Nail. , t» wyi , tou. 
 Stomach , to' ^optaxt » t0 ^» 
 Chest , Bosom , tk^? , t4§3 
 Breasts, T <x 6u£ia , Sv. 
 Belly , -j) xctXiat , iac?. 
 B.ib , ?j 7rXeupa , «?. Side . to' irXeu- 
 
 pbv , ou. 
 Navel , 6op-c : «X»? , «u. 
 Thigh , to' jAYjpt , AS. 
 Knee , to' 70'va , tou yo'vaTo?- 
 Leg , T0 ' o-xs'Xo? , ou?. t* we'eh, tou. 
 Calf of the Leg , yj avt£a, a?, ts 1 
 
 •ya<7po>cv7ip.tov j iou* 
 Foot , to' iroo^api. Sole , 7) Ttareiwa. 
 
 I kick , xXoT^aw , 5. kick, xXot- 
 
 £ta , ia;„ 
 Heel, Vj ©T£pv# , a?. Shoe-heel , 
 
 § T9 y T8M«WUVl_? l9Uj! 
 
 Colour, complexion, ri xpia« 5 arc^ 
 Form , to' Gyr.pa., a-c?. 
 Gait, Carriage, * to 1 ep«ndfaipa,9iTc«« 
 Plumpness , T0 ' ffa > s , ou;. * i, eu- 
 
 Slenderness, Slimne^s-, r, Xvpfcue, 
 vjtoj. 
 
 Brain, 6 puaXdc, Brains , T cc pwaXj*. 
 
 Blood , to' cctixa j a-o?. 
 
 Artery , $ apTYjpk , ta.j. 
 
 Vein , y, oXs';3a, ag. 
 
 Muscle, 6 {jwtav , e'vo;. to' ffOMmxaxif 
 
 too. 
 Skin , to' tostO j tou. to' ^s'ppxj aro;. 
 Heart , yj »ap<?ia , tar. 
 Liver, to* cry)X6m , tou to v s^o'ti , \gm} 
 Lungs, 6 •rcveup.wv > ove^. 
 
 Intestines 
 
 , Ta svrspa, tov. r<x ev- 
 
 ToaOta , twv. 
 Bladder , i cpouarxa , ac. 
 Spleen , -^ o"7rXr;'va , v.%. 
 Gall . Bile , ^ X oXy, , jg$. 
 Saliva, to 1 aaAtcv , iou. Spittle. 
 
 to TTTucaa , arc;. 
 Perspiration , oifywtas, -tou e^pwrosJ 
 Cough , 6 Svi^a? , a. 
 Catarrn , 6 JcaTappou^oo. rb ci>vocy-/^ ? 
 
 toD. affected with a catarrh ? 
 
 Ka-appViaffjAevos. (ruva^tofjLs'vo?. 
 Breath ? ^ avawvoyj > ^5. r' a^vwTcci 
 
 The Senses. 
 
 Ta atofivjTTipta. 
 
 Sight, * % opaat? > ew?. 
 Smell , r 6'c<p pYxitf ? eo?. 
 Taste , ■« Ysustij j swj. 
 Touch , * v) amx > ^?. 
 Hearing , yj «3ce^ , r?. 
 Sense , to' atcrOviT'iqptov. 6 voCi$. 
 Sensation, Sentiment, ^ aUtoi*^ 
 to' at«8y3p.aj aro;. 
 
Of Study. 
 
 Ti ittyl ttjv cnro-jfKv. 
 
 The Study, to' cjcou^a^nptov , tou.' 
 Book, TO* [3'.6XlOVj tui. to 1 x, a P Tl ? l0 ^« 
 
 Paper, to' x«.$t\. 
 
 Quire , to* Tarpa^tcv , tou. 
 
 Pamphlet , it <puXXa<5*a , a?. 
 
 Lear , to* cpuXXov ? ou. 
 
 Page , to' HaratSaTov 3 eu. * t) gsXIsj 
 
 Pen , t&* jcov<5*uXi ? tou. re' TTTspov j 
 
 o r J. § ^ nrsvva 5 *;• 
 Ink , to' (j.sXavi 5 tou. 
 Writing case or Ink stand ? § to 
 
 JcaXctaapi , 10U. ^ u.sXavc0'/ix.y) , >#£. 
 Penknife , to* jcov^uXour'^oupcv , tou. 
 Twnie , § 6 0-7:0:70? , m. 
 Sand , 6 «fi$w>s 5 ou. 
 Seal, Wafer, rj <j<ppy^t^oc.. §ri pouXXa,a?. 
 Letter , r)-fpaa>y) , xc„ 
 INote , to" «ypaj/.y.aTiov ? tou. to 
 
 •^atv.y-.ocTetxt 5 tou. 
 Writing, T o -ypx<|n{/.ov j arc?. 
 Pencil , Black-lead , Pencil , T 3 
 
 t M.oXu£t , tou. to pi.eXuj3o)c&'v$uXo¥ , ou. 
 Lesson taken , T * p*3&%%, a~o;. 
 \ Lesson given , % Trap^cci? , e«$. 
 
 I give Lessons , wafa^i^w. 
 Translation , tf u.eT«&g£«?ic , eco?. 
 Exercise, T o ' 6s'^a ■, «to?. I write 
 
 Exercises, eeixaTO-ypaaw , el?. 
 Portfolio , to x a pTc<pi»Xaxtov. 
 
 Musical Instruments. 
 
 Mouoixa op-yava. 
 
 Violin , § to pioXi , tou. 
 Flute , * 6 auXo? , ou. <pXo-yc'px , '*$. 
 Bag-pipe , § tf *#t'a , et 5 . 
 Guitar , ^ )«8apa , a?. 
 Harpsichord , T o /.uyrraXov , w. 
 Lute, ^ Xupa? o^. 
 
 Harp, g ri apwa , «?J 
 Trumpet , $ GaXxq^a , a?: 
 Drum , to* tu(xtto,vcv j ou. 
 
 Pa/ta q/" a House, 
 
 l T i 
 
 Ta 
 
 TOU OGtTnOTlO'J. 
 
 House , to' cr-rr/rn ? tou. * r, otxi'ccj 
 Door , § Vj -nro'prst, a?. * ii 8upa , a;J 
 Room , § 6 o\Tas > «• 
 Hall , § yj saXa , a;. 
 Court-yard, i owXt*; , ^, 
 Window , to' wapafiupov ? tou. Te' : 
 
 -rrapaSupt j tou. 
 Kitchen , § yj xouT^va , a?, to* j/.*- 
 
 •yetps'tov , st'ou. 
 Court, auXo'-yupo; , ou. r, auXvi} ■?);• 
 Well , to* xr.-yac^t, tou. 
 Stable, q-auXc;, ou- 
 Wine-Cellar , >h oivo8wcn , r,?. t^ 
 
 UTCO'yS'.GV j etou. 
 
 Stairs , § i axaXot ? a?. 
 
 Step , Stair , 5 €a8u.o$ , ou. to* oca- 
 
 Xo-svaTi > tou. 
 Garden, to' Trsptflo'Xi ? tou? 6 xwtocj 
 
 ou. § 6 lAirajcTCs;? s« 
 Fountain , 4 (3ou<r/) , n?. 
 
 Floor, to* Trarcop^ot , ato;. 
 Terrace, to* ^ujict, oiro;, -/} acpa- 
 
 xia > ta<;. 
 Granary , * to- tiropoXiov j i'ou. t* 
 
 § accept ? tou. 
 Roof, tj a/.sV/i , ^5. 
 Tile, to* xEpap.i^i, tou. 
 Glitter j § to xavaXi ? tou- 
 Wall , to § Toupocpt j tou. c roly^oq, oxi* 
 Chimney , § cpou-^ccpo; j ou. 
 Brick, § to tgujBXov , ou. to «Xi8ij tou- 
 Floor , to TraTWf/.a , aTO?- 
 ' Cieling, i opocp^j ou. § to Tapcsvtj wy. 
 Oven , § 6 cpoupvo; , ou. 
 Beam , § $ ^psvTa, a?. 
 Plank ,\ to cavi^t 5 tou. 
 Water-closet , 71 xP £ ^ a ) e ^? j ^^ 
 
*7 a 
 
 Hire , B.ent , T o v votxt , tea\ 
 
 evot5upv-,4ou. 
 Piaster , Stucco , 6 -y6i|ro> , cu ; 
 Lime , ^a^.SeVr;; , r,. 
 Marble , to' pocppapcv , cu. 
 Stone , * re'Toa , a;. 
 Dovecote , * 6 wepi^spewv , & 
 
 Furniture. 
 
 Looking Glass, o xaSpsVrvis > *r.' 
 Sofa, * 6 (jccpa; , a- 
 Bed , to' xpe{5{J«frri , tou. 
 Sheet, to x artv^o'vi , leu- 
 Mattress , T o v c?3>aa , arc^' 
 Pillow, to ! § {AagiXXapt, ie8» to 
 
 -jrpoaxs'epaXcv , cu. 
 Bolster, v; aaxpuvac a , a?- p.a£tXXapa. 
 Curtains , Bed - Hangings , * to 
 
 Mosquito Curtains,^ xcuvcu~tspa 3 :x;7 
 
 6 xtovtoTTcXc^'c^ , eu« 
 Bedclothes , tV w<£irXcapt*j a?o;. 
 Chamberpot , to' oVfY&ta , eto3* to 
 
 x«TGopXoxdvj*apo 5 ie§; 
 1S T i gilt- chair , to' ftatAw , 107. 
 Tablet , *' 6 wtVot| , coco;. 
 Border , Frame , to v ittJto&fc § 
 
 to xivapt. 
 Chair, § 4j kap&cX«& y v xa6txX«, 
 ' Carpet , § to v freuxc , too. t*- 
 
 ttt; 5 vjTcr-. 
 Chest , § to' <p?pTc/pc , tou. * r xt- 
 
 ^cotoc , cu- 
 Bureau, Clothes Press, § to' IfctX&ft. 
 Chandelier-lustre, © r&Xu&aio?, afou. 
 
 to' TraXuxavTtXo , tou. 
 Tapestry , T0 X xevtv)u.« , are?. 
 Painting, *jeVfpa?t a, »«$. or t £;. The 
 
 art, Vi SitffpowpiK, or y> ^to^p'osa txr>, 7tf. 
 Gilding , to' ^p6aci)|j.a ? aro;- 
 Statue, to' a-^aXaa, a-o?. The art 
 
 of sculpture , * a-yaXaaTowoua , 
 
 iaq. r, a^aXy.ftTOTVciviTixri , 7;;. 
 
 Bust ^ * y; npCfOU.^ , 7;;. 
 
 Pedestal, *^ c ' 'pa8pcv , cu. * $g^ 
 
 at; , £«£.' 
 Portrait, 4 sixc'va, oc- 
 Cage ,- to' xXou(St , tou. 
 
 Of the Fireplace, 
 
 - Ta irsp: ~v;v xau.tv.ov. 
 
 Fire, Vj ocma , t£;. 
 
 Fuel, Coal, T o v § xa'pjkuvd , cu. * 
 
 avGpa| , axog. 
 Ashes, r^axr-fl , r,-. 
 Fireside, $ i"<ma , 6 qjou^apss. 
 Burning stick - Fire brand , £«*- 
 
 Xo;, pSj to' <$*auXl , tou. 
 
 Log , ts' |uX©V , CU. 
 
 bellows , to 1 ©Uaouvt s tou. 
 Fire-Lan, to' avsu'.irr'pt , teu» 
 Brasier, § to' {ii^aXij ' S. 
 Shovel , tg x ©Tuapt , tou. 
 Tongs , § V) p.ic<jLa , ta?*- ti jruyar 
 
 vsx, a*. 
 Matches, T0 * £a£t, tcu. to 63ta'j&- 
 
 rapt , tou. 
 Steel , i?ypo'J5oXc; , bu- 
 Flmt, § to (rcoovapt j t;u» 
 Flame , TioXo'-ya , a-. 
 Smo^e, 6 jcotTjvos , 00. it smoL.es . 
 
 xa-Trvt&L, 
 Soot , 7; KftffHflE j ia;- 
 
 Of Kitchen Utensils. 
 Ta orxeuyj tou [/.oyystpsi^u. 
 
 Spit , vl cou^Xa , a;. 
 Pot-hanger , y^ xpejjwfqpa \ a*. 
 Kettle, Boiler, to' xa/.a.Si , w*. 
 Copper , § to v xa^a'vi , too; to yjk- 
 
 •/.<iiu,% » aTo;. 
 Fryingpan , to T-^av. , tou. 
 Gridiron , 7, ea^otsa , a;. 
 Saucepan, § 6 TET^spe's, e. Pipkii?., 
 
 6 TR?a; ? a. 
 
CullendeC} to* Tpu7ry,To*v 5 cj. 
 
 Skimmer , xo £a<£pt<piipt } too- 
 
 Pitcher , >i ? auva , a?. 
 
 Water- Jug or Jar , § to jiwpixi. toy, 
 
 P«^il , § <5 xooSa? ,.«• o ci^Xo; , C'J. 
 
 Pot, § to' t£cuxoXi ? tou. 
 
 Chafing Dish , yj you&>y, cv;. 
 
 Grater , T o v -ypu^e , tew. 
 
 Pestle , to' pu^ox^t , toy, 
 
 Sroom , 7j cppoxaXta , ta;. to capwaa; 
 
 aTo;. § 7) axou-rca, a;. 
 Piisler, § 7i TraT^a^oupa , a-. 
 
 Cy Cellar Articles, 
 
 Ta tt? oivoGyixr!?- 
 
 Hammer , to' c^ypc , io r J. 
 
 Cask , rb 6out£i , toy. 
 
 Barrel , T b gap A: , low, 
 
 runnel , to j^wvt . toy» 
 
 Bung , to couTvwp.a , aT©c» 
 
 >v me , to xoact 5 toti- 
 
 Dregs- Sediment, * T p6-ya , «;. 
 
 Beer , * <$ £680?, oy- § vi (ZTcippa, .a;; 
 
 Must, § 6 u.oij^o;,oy- to -yXeu^oc, oy;. 
 
 Belonging to the Doc?% 
 Ta Tr; 6upa;. 
 
 Key , to xXft^t ? tou. Picklock or 
 
 False Key , T b .avtixXetrrt , tou- 
 Lock,7J xXet&Dcpiaj la;.^ xXei£ovt«> '.a;- 
 Bolt , 6 wepari); ? ». * 6 ^o^Xo; , aj. 
 Hinge , i iilM , £. 
 Threshold , T o xartfyXo'.ov , 00, 
 Bell, § Vj xa^waye'XXa > a;. 
 Small Bell, xoo^ouvi , ia3. 
 
 Of Stable Articles. 
 
 Ta e£>pt<jxo'fx£va £:; tov <rayXov' 
 
 Hay , to x,o'pTcvj oy. to ^cpTaot, toy. 
 straw, ros a^upa , toy. 
 
 *7 3 
 
 Stubble , ii xaXauua, ia;. 
 
 irougn , 7i oaTvvi , n;. to wapi? icjJ 
 
 Manger, Rack, § T a xa-p.sXXa. 
 
 Bran , ta Trirupa , wv. 
 
 Curry Comb, 7)£u<rpa, a;. 
 
 Barley, T b xptQaptj wu. 
 
 Oats , 7} ppo'aY] , r,;. * 6 atftXarlj co7;o<. 
 
 Sieve, to xo'axwovj ou. 
 
 Horse , to du.o-yov 3 ou. 
 
 Mule, § to fjt.ouXapt , tou- 
 
 Ass , -yai^aec; , eu. to -yawoupt, tou- 
 
 to •yo^api , toy , this last signifies 
 
 also a Load. 
 Groom , * i7rrcoxojjt.o; , oy; 
 
 Of a Garden. 
 
 Ta £uptarxo'{x.£va £t; to raptpo'Xtov* 
 
 Bed , ri 7rpa<ua , ta;- 
 
 Scarecrow, to <yxioVpov,ou. r, axtaxrpx- 
 
 Trellis, yi Ttup-youXt k , ta; yi xp£(3a w 
 
 Tapta , ia;- 
 Arbour, * to cxr'vcoaa, aTc;- 
 Rose, to TpiavTaouXXov , 00. vi Tp'tav* 
 
 raouXXta ? ta?. 
 Jasmine or Jessamin, § t» ^au£- 
 
 fit , C'J- 
 
 Pink , § to -yapo'cpaXo j ou. 
 
 Lily , to xeivsv j. o». 
 
 Violet, TO 10V> T0ij lO'J. § to jxavo'jat, 
 
 tcO- 
 Hyacinth, 6 uaxuvflos, ov. 
 PoppV ? * 6 away, ovo?. 6 XaXf'c* 
 Apple tree etc. See page 167, 
 Box, to* iruHapt ? toj. 
 Pine Tree , 6 7teuxoc? ev. 
 Fir, IXaTo; ? ou. 
 Oak , 7) ^pu; , u,o'?. ( to <S*£v^pov. ) 
 Poplar , 7] Xsuxvi , 715- 
 
 Elm , 7) <JTT£X&ta, eto:?. 
 
 Lime, TJcptX-jpa, a;. •« ©tXo'jpsta; eiar. 
 Beech, * £-fft|$g > c 1 :. 
 Myrtle, r ( ^ypTo;. 
 Thyme, 5 e-iao; , oy. 
 IVursery, T 6 ^urwptov , tou. ' ' 
 
1 7 4 
 
 Ivy , 6 y.'.Gac; , s8 6 y.iorfffltpyj* , vi. 
 Arm , Limb , T o xXuvapt , toy. 
 Branch, to xXa^l, tcu. 
 Wood , Forest , to &£cg$ , co?. 
 Shade , yi cr/.'.a , tac- o i'a>c.oc , tcu- 
 Bsrsin , Pond , Reservoir , § $ ^a- 
 
 Canal , Conduit , * to auXaV.i , toy. 
 Ditch, § to x«^«j«. 
 Spade, to Xicrapi , toy. 
 
 Dignities, 
 A';t«ascTa'. 
 
 Emperor , 9 SaaiXsu? 9 (<*;• 6 koto- 
 
 jcparwp , opo;. Empress , f, fiaai- 
 
 Xtoca, r,s> or a;, vi a&TOicpaTogtff- 
 
 ca , a;. 
 King , 6 p^Y*;, a. 6 PaaiXeus- Queen, 
 
 r paciXiaaa 
 Prince, § 6 wptyy^, «?o*. 6 o.tfvnt&y. 
 
 Princess , yj ^pfyxiTrsffaa. tq xu- 
 
 p(a , tas- 
 Duke , 6 r^stAwv ? o'vc$. § 6 <£Vjc , 
 
 ^ouxo'?. Duchess , 5 frysjiovlsj &t«. 
 Count, Earl, Countess , § c, rj xo- 
 
 [xn?, mTo;, 7i xo'y.-fiasa, a?. 
 Marquis , § 6 p,apxe<roo?. Marchio- 
 ness , v] [xapxsaiva , a;. 
 Baron , § 6 Sapwvo; ? ou. 
 Baroness , § yj Saftivtooa. 
 Knight , 6 hwreus • §»c- 
 Ambassador , § » SXt£vis , ri. * 6 
 
 icps<r€u; ? £(1)5. 
 Governor , 6 sTrap^o? , ou. 
 Consul, § 6 xovcroXo?, ou. * icpd![e- 
 
 vo; > ou. 
 Vice Consul, * 6 avmrpo'^evo?. 
 Lord Chancellor, Keeper of the 
 
 Seals, ixe'-ya? Xo-pSa'r/)?. 
 Chancellor, § 6 xa-YxsXXaptG? * toy. 
 
 § c xav~£eXiepY)s , r,. 
 Superintendant Steward, Bailiff, 
 IrftTSOWo; > ou« 
 
 Treasurer , * ByiaocypoayXa; , ewo;« 
 President, ^-xpo'e^po?, cu. 
 Counsellor , * 6 fJouXeurr,; , ou. i 
 
 supt^ouXo? , cu. 
 Judge , 6 ^uccktv:* > ou. 6 xjitiq; , cu. 
 Barrister, 6 auvvi^opoi; , ou. 6 (J'ixg- 
 
 Xo'-j'o; ) ou. 
 Attorney , 6 IvrbXeu; , e'w?. 
 Secretary , & •ypau.jj.oi.TcU; , E6>;. 
 
 Xo^oOsTyjij. 
 Magistrates , 01 ojpxovres > o'vtwv. 
 Common - Council-Men , ot <*>,- 
 
 p.o^'c'povTe; > dvTtov. 
 Primates - Chieftains , 01 frpoe^&TESj 
 
 (OTGOV- 
 
 Notary , § vwtapio; * tcu. 
 
 General , 6 ^pa-rvi^o? > ou- 
 
 Generalissimo , Commander m 
 Chief , 6 apxKrpar/170; , cu- 
 
 Cavalry General , Commander of 
 tl^e Horse , 6 "ra*pjt?Si___ 
 
 Lieutenant General , © sparr^o^ cu. 
 6 Ta;iapy w o;^ ou. 
 
 Major General, u-o<rp*™'ps> ou. 
 
 Colonel , 6 -/.iXi'tx-pyo; > ou. 
 
 L. 1 Colonel , 5 uwexiXtapxo? j w'- 
 
 Major, 6 avxiy^Xiap^c?. 
 
 Captain , 6 ixorovTaffyosj cu- 
 
 I. - Lieutenant, * 6 avQsxxT'.'vrapx;,-. 
 
 Il.d Lieutenant , Subaltern , 9 6$e- 
 »«TdvT«pxo?- 
 
 Quarter Master , <7o%o£oV/!c ? ou. 
 
 Sergeant , ^ex-a^ap/os » o«. Ser- 
 geant Major , c irpwTo^xx^scp- 
 3t©5, cu. 
 
 Corporal, 9 we 4 u.flra£a&x,0c > cu. 
 
 Army , to crpaTsuua f cctg;. 
 Division, * r, [xdpa , a?. 
 Brigade , * ^ vj^tjiopiec, tag* 
 Regiment , to 7a*\aa , «xto;. 
 Batallion , 6 Xo'xoe > «u. Square , 
 
 to ttXivSi'cv 1 iou. 
 Troop , r, tm , n?. 
 Company, ieKiipz? &%- 
 
Corporal's party , -h ?retiw:a<; 3 a^o?. 
 
 Hank, £up$, ou. 
 
 File , 6 c'-y.o, , ou. 
 
 Infantry- Fooisoldier , 6 tte^o? » «5. 
 
 Horseman , 6 wpwsu$ ? e'co?. 
 
 Infantry , to 7«£wcoV- ot tje'Coi. 
 
 Troops of the Line , to oitXitixo'v. ot 
 
 eifXttai. Liglit Infantry , ©l ^iXoi- 
 
 ot eu'Cwvot. 
 Cavalry, to srfwixoV <Jitirjms> 
 Cuirassier, 6 Owpx/iocpo'poo eu. 
 Dragoon , 6 ^ijxa^o? > ou. 
 Lancer, 6 y.ovTocpo'pos, ou» 
 Trumpeter, e cxX™ rta , ou. 
 Artillery, § apTtXXep'Ia. Cannon , 
 
 § TO TOfCl" 
 
 Gunner, § 6 TowtT&ns > 7> 
 
 Sentr}' , Vj <puXx>c« , ■?;'?• Patrole 
 
 Picket , § to kc'XXi , ray- 
 Pioneer , o6o'j£-r,j> , vipo;. 
 Spy-, Scout , 6 y.aTaa/.O'reo; , / pt>. 
 Standard , Colours , Ensign , ^ 
 
 mfuxio, , ai'a;. 
 Baggage , ^ a-rcoaxsuV) , rfc- I am 
 
 packing up , cuffxEua&ojAou > aor 
 
 Admiral, 6 s-paTvrfo? , c vxuapyoc j cu. 
 Captain of a Ship of the line, 6 rptvr 
 
 pap>C ? j °u* 
 Captain of a frigate or Smaller 
 
 Vessel, 6 uwoTpivipapxos > ou. 
 First Lieutenant, 5 dvTiTptY]'px'pxos,ou. 
 Midshipman , © u7vo<j7!fA8Uocpopo$ , ou« 
 Pilot , 6 xpwpsu? j etas* 
 Boatswain , 6 jceXe^s > #&V 
 Fleet , 6 q-o'Xo;. S *) ap^a^a. 
 Squadron , 6 p.ucp6? <ro'Xo;. 
 Flotilla , 6 q-oXioco? , cu. 
 Ship , Vessel , to ttXoiov- rt >cxpaph. 
 
 Ship of the line , iraparaxTucGv. 
 
 Three-decker^ TpiwXoCiv. Tp-'cpw- 
 
 •rov. two-decker , o^Xouy £r 
 
 rpwTOv- 
 Frigate, § Ticpps^aTX, a;. 
 Corvette , § T o jwpSsTTov > ou-. 
 Brig » § 70 flpijctov ^ m»5- 
 
 ; j ? 5 
 
 Appertaining to Fortification} 
 
 Tflt TTCOt T*1V O^UpcoCtV- 
 
 Citadel , * \ axpowoXt; j £&>?, § t» 
 
 »xspo , ou. 
 Fort , Castle , T o cppouptov 5 too.' 
 
 § r4 }ia«7f© , ou. 
 Arsenal, 71 ovXctoftui j n?„ 
 Wails , -« TStxYi , £>v. 
 Rampart, T q Ipugi*. 
 
 Palisade 5 
 
 Xapaxcajxa , aro?. 
 
 Bastion Tower , 6 7*6^05 , ou» 
 Battlements, ^ etoxXS-is , ew$. 
 Curtam , to [ASTaTvup-ycGv * iou. 
 Siege, v) iroXiopKicc , t'a?. 
 Capitulation, ^ cuupao-t;, eco?. 
 Sortie , 7J ex^pojATi , %. 
 Assault , 7j Tei^op.a}( ( ix> la;. ri 7rpo~ 
 aSoXv) > vj$. 
 
 Professions , Trades. 
 
 'ETray/s'Xj/.aTa >cxl Ts^vai. 
 
 Printer , £ Turio^pa^es 5 ou. 
 Physician , 6 ixTpo? , ou. 
 Surgeon , • ^stpcup^o? , ou. 
 Druggist , Apothecary , © fappawo- 
 
 'Kto'kni, j ou. 
 Barber , § 6 j/.7rxpprs'pYis , vj. * 6 
 
 >C0'jp£U? j e'&>?. 
 
 Baker , 6 ^oaa; , a- 
 
 Butcher , § 6 ^ajcsXXapto? , t'ou- * © 
 
 y-pstOTTciXvi? , ou. 
 Vintner , Tavern -Keeper, § 6 tx« 
 
 Pepvxpyi; , vj. 6 xpaTOTrwA^;. 
 Shop keeper , 6 e'p^ar/ipta'pv;?, vi« 
 Tailor, 6 px<pT*i£ ^ yj. 
 Boot-maker, 6 u7ro^yip.aT«? , a. 
 Shoe-maker , 6 wawourW; , v. 
 Cooler , § {/.iraXot>{i,aTac y a» 
 Sculptor, 6 a-yaXjAXTOTTotos y ou. 
 Painter , 6 £co*yp«^os > ou. 
 Carpenter , © TireXeKavo; , ou. 
 Builder , Mason , Brick-layer , © 
 
 xTigy!? 7 v) or eu» 
 
*58 
 
 Locksmith , 6 xXsiv <x?d$ , £< 
 Bliller , 6 p/jXwvd? , d- 
 Laundress , -h 7rXu<rpa, a?. 
 Goldsmith, j o y£vdo-/Jo<; > o'cu. 
 Comedian, Player, Actor, <5 &770- 
 
 xptTr,; > ou. 
 Musician , 6 p.ouffi&bg , bu. 
 Armourer, o 677X377013; > cu- 
 Porter, 6 |Sa<rd£os> ou- 6 dx,9c»o'pe? > cu* 
 Cook, 6 L/.a*i'£tpa; , a 6 [Ax^etpo;, ot>. 
 Gardener , * d xvjwjpbs, oD. 6 mpir 
 
 poXapn? , r). 
 Vine-dresser , 6 d(A7re"X0up"j , e; ? eu* 
 Ploughman , 6 £et>fa<; , «• 
 
 Bodily Imperfections, 
 
 2o>p.aTi)«a eXaTTwp.aT«> 
 
 One-eyed , {/.ovo'caBaXtAo; , , f • 
 
 eTspo'<p0aXu.os» , rt- 
 Blind , (rpapo; , tj > e'v- TUcpXos> in j oV 
 Cross eyed, aXXr.Qopc? , yj , dv. 
 Hump-backed , xaptfroupy); , a- pa- 
 
 X,ityi; ^ tc<ra- 
 Lame, jcout^o; > ili , m } y.uXb?? v; ? ov» 
 Deaf , xoucpo; , vi , oV 
 Dumb , pou€6; , ri , o'v. 
 Stammerer, rpauXi;,^} ov» 
 Bald , <paX«xpac , © > V 
 Dwarf, vivos* ou. 
 Giant, 6 71-yavra; , a. 
 
 Accidents Diseases , e£t\ 
 
 'ATi>x,>5(Jt.y.ta fcal K$<a?iat* 
 
 Happiness, Luck, r, tu^a-.iAovia, [as- 
 
 r, eutuyta • to.;. 
 Misfortune , % ^uxia , fas- 
 Chance , yi tu-/yi. to x duTo'(xxTov j ou- 
 Invalid, dppw^o;, 6, tV dvY3p.7;opc; , vj 5 
 
 cv. he is unwell , $h ^wopet. 
 Sickness , Disease , Ailment, yj d?- 
 
 po><ria ? (a;. >} vo'so; ? cu« to' tt%- 
 
 Feve£ , -fj fi/piAv, , •/,;, I r.(L$b%»a\*c', , 
 
 OU. 5 7TUp£TC; , ou- 
 
 Ague , -rd eru-yxpua , uwv- to pT-jr,; ^ 
 cu;. the fit is on him , tov vfais 
 to 1 pTyo;. 
 
 Shivering, «f dvarpr/JXaic. A shiver- 
 ing has seized him , tov r.X0o.v 
 d-jr-rpt/JXa:;. dvaTpt^iafft^ , dvo;- 
 Tp[^iacru.a. 
 
 Gout , yi Tjo^oc-ypa , a?. 
 
 CoIlC , XO)Xl>CC770V0?. 
 
 Measles , r, xoxxtvd^a , a;. 71 dcpax^ : - 
 Small-pox , -f euXsfid , id;, he is 
 pock-marked, pock- fretted, iyu 
 eu'X6*y.a!<;. etvatt EuXoyiaaiAi'vo;- 
 Itch , >) i|copa , ag- 
 Scrofula , a l xoipa&s , wv- 
 Abscess , to : obs&cxjAa , arc;, to' 
 
 cTTUp:- 
 Swelling , to 1 Tjpvisfj.a > aro.;- 
 Scratch , to' £ouypdvic-aa , c.to;. 
 Slap, Smack , Box , § 6 (atc«tSo«. 
 
 * to" paTnaaaj aT0<;. 
 Swoon, y) Xt7o8uy/.d, id?- /j Xqcp.doo'oa^' 
 Death , 6 Oa'vato; , to. 
 
 Reptiles and Insects 
 
 IprrSTa kcu evToaa- 
 
 Frog , paTpajrcc , ou- .SaOox/.c- , ou. 
 Snail , 6 caXtayyo; , cu. 
 Spider , r\ v.pdyyri , vj?- 
 Serpent, to cpi^i ^ too- 
 Butterflly, ^ ire-raXou^a , a?. 
 Hy , ri [AUi-j'a ? a?. 
 Musquito , to xouvfluiri 5 is> 
 Caterpillar , ^ xdXa , a?- 
 Worm , to a/.ouX>ixt , isu« 
 Louse , r ( yslpa , a;. 
 Flea, 6 -LuXXo? , ou- 
 Bug 1 , xoptb; 5 icu- 
 Ant, t3 jjtupp.wyj" j wu. 
 
Rural Objects. 
 
 Road , 6 ^poLtc? j oi> 
 Plain, § 6 y.t.u.tzoc, , ou. to ■rcscuacvccj a;- 
 Valley , •*) xciXa^a , a?- 
 Mountain, to [Bouvov, ou.* rob'po;. ou$- 
 Wood , to Macros ? 005. 
 Hedge , r, <ppay.Tn ? vis- 
 Tree , TO (h'v^pov , Otl- 
 
 Nest , -ft ipwXsia , eta?. 
 
 Corn , to cu-ocpt , iou. 
 
 Turf , Verdure , r, -jvpaaiva^a , a;. 
 
 Meadow ? to Xipac^i , iou. * e Xei^wv* 
 
 &vo?. 
 lake , Pond, riXi'pn , »$. 
 Rock , Spa^o? , ou. 
 
 fxeX&y.ptvo,;, ii , 
 Red , jco'jhuvgs 
 
 XOXXtVWTVO; , 7 
 
 Green, 7^*7 tvo 
 Yello 
 
 Rivulet 
 
 River 
 
 , to puaici , iou. 
 
 j TZOTXU.QQ , 
 
 Bridge , to ^ecpupt , iou- 
 
 Marsh , d SaXro; , ou- marshy , 
 
 SciXtw^vis 5 6 , vj. 
 Mill , 6 ^6X0? , ou- Wind-mill , 
 
 c avsfxo'^uXo;. Water-mill. 6 vs- 
 
 pifiuXc?* 
 Village , to y^copiov* to x. w ? 1 * » t0 ^° 
 
 Appertaining to a Town. 
 
 Town, City, ■£ ywpa, a;- * iro'Xi;, ew?* 
 Church , y) ijutXvxna , ia$. 
 Hospital , * to vosofcojjLStcv j etou« 
 
 § to c-nriraXi , icu. 
 Market , § to •rcafrxpt , iou. § to 
 
 Teapot , tou= 
 Port, 6 Xvji.sva? j svo<;. 
 Custom House, § T e xoupfptt, i«y. 
 
 TO TSXlOVtGV, tCU« 
 
 Prison 9 § V] x,^^ 5 *!§• vi cpuXaxr, vfe. 
 Coach , Carriage , T b a^t , icu* 
 .Shop-Workshop, to sp-ygn-rlpiov, iou. 
 Magazine 9 § to p-a-^i, »u< * r, 
 a7ro8riXVi > »<;• 
 
 Colours, 
 White , ao"7vpo£; ; n , ov. 
 Rlaek, p,aup^<s, n , §'v« blackish , 
 
 177 
 
 ^£?o?, 71, 
 
 Reddis 
 
 v. yellowish , 
 
 oupoc- 
 
 ptvcs, 
 xcTpivtOTub; , Vj , 
 Blue , pxPus, sia, u. sky-blue 
 
 Crey, ^axToei^riS} c,^. ash-coloaredj 
 
 A^tASpT)?. 
 
 Violet , * toet<K; s c, i 
 
 Minerals . 
 Gold, * 6x,pu<rb;, ou- to pala.u.tf.%, 
 
 arc?, adj , ^aXajxu.xTs'vto; , 1a, tcv. 
 Silver , d ap-yupo;, cu. Toao-yjai, iou. 
 
 adj , acvjpivtos , to, , tov. Silver 
 
 Coin , Money , T a acnvpa, 
 
 Plate, toc acyip.Ka. 
 Iron , * & cr^mpo? ? ou. to ett'ehpov, ou- 
 Lead, to pXupt , iou. 
 Copper , d xaXjtb; , ou- § tg p.-nra- 
 
 fclpt-, iou- 
 
 Brass, § to jcaXat , iou- 
 
 Tin , d 7T«<puXa5 , a. 
 
 Sulphur , t® 6siaan , tou- 
 
 Glass , to OaXt ? icu. 
 Verbs. 
 
 To Study , G7tcu<5a£co. aor. o- a , or 
 £a part. pass, c^s'vo;. chafiafr* , 
 aor. oa. part. pass, gjjisvc?. 
 
 — Learn, ^aOaivw. by heart , — - 
 {AotGaivw arf a£w , a7ro7Yj6i£w. — * 
 rehearse , Xe'-Yw dr's^o). mentally, 
 Kurd p.s'aa. 
 
 — Read , <JiaPa^w , ava-yivw ox.tu, 
 like, fivcacrxtt* 
 
 ■ — Sign , U7rc^pa'<pw. 
 
 • — Seal, § 6ou)Xo'vw. crcppa'yt^o>^ 
 
 — Fold , £iirXdv M . spread, ^sc-rXovtor 
 aor. tocra, part, pass, w'p.e'vof. 
 
 - — Correct , ^top'tovu- aor. w «!x 
 
 partic. pass. ^topSe^svo;. 
 Efface , er^uvw. irr. 
 Translate, ^eTa^pa(o). aor. aa. part. 
 
 cp.evoj. 
 
 i3 
 
i 7 B 
 To Continue, sl-aKoXouOS, sT*, or a?. 
 Finish , teXsiovm. aor. toca- part. 
 
 pass, cttpivoc. 
 Do , make , wav«. in*. 
 Know , 7i;£usw. irr. 
 To be able , * £uvauat. irr. 
 Pronounce , -frptxpeptd. 
 Accentuate , T&vi'(o>. aor. <ra. part. 
 
 pass. <7»j.c'vo?. 
 Say, speak, Xs-p. converse , cat- 
 
 Xw , etc 
 Prattle , chatter, § Xaxpi<h6tf. X«t- 
 
 am , ets- 
 Bawl , vociferate , cry , ccova"£o>. 
 
 aor. £». 
 Open , ftvc^-M. nor. -^c^a- Adj 
 
 instead of part: past , dUoix-rc?, 
 
 vi , o'v , opened. 
 Shut, <rpafXv« , a.;, aor. y^a- part. 
 
 pass. oxyjxoiL ifoq' common in- 
 stead of pa Ft. past, adj ayatlv 
 
 cs; , T, , o'v. 
 To be silent, otw77w,a;. aor. n<jx- 
 Call, jipa;w , aor. £«. 
 Answer, a7roxptvGp.'at. aor. Ovjv- 
 
 Of eating and drinking. 
 
 To drink , tt'vw. 
 
 Eat, T p«jfy a . 
 
 Masticate, chew , pasw , a;, aor. 
 vicx. part. pass, y^e'vo;. 
 
 Swallow , xccrairivra. 
 
 Cut , xo'tttw. aor. <pa. part pass. 
 xofAftsVo;- 
 
 To clean , wash, rinse, xXuvco aor. 
 eVauvoc- pass. sttXuGviv. part. pass. 
 icXujAevoc. 
 
 ■ — Fast , vr.csuw. aor. gk. 
 
 — Dine , -ysjc^ai. aor. e^euOviv- to 
 breakfast , «po7s6o'p.x'-. 
 
 * — Sup , ihiirvS ,srt- or a;, aor. via*. 
 
 < — Get drunk to intoxicate one- 
 self , ixsOufe). [aeCS> , a;, aor. u era • 
 
 **— Satisfy, and to be satisfied ? 
 
 X.c|?Tatvw. aor. fyfy T owr*« part, 
 pass. £o*praafievGc. See P- 88. 
 To Be hungry , TC£tV u ? g.. a0IV 
 a<ra- part. pass, weivctajievos , 
 hungered. 
 
 — Thirsty, ^a, £?. aor. asa- part, 
 pass. ^ac^e'vo? , thirsty. 
 
 About going to bed and rising, 
 
 To go to bed , wX'a-yiaSa. aor. 9 ** 
 
 CT;'fflTfa). 
 
 — Rise, get up, c7iX3voii,at.pas£* 
 
 OI CYl/.OVft). 
 
 — Sleep, xotuupcu. 
 
 — Make sleep , aircxoi^w , xoi- 
 [*{£©. aor. ao.. part. pass, xu- 
 
 (Ataas'vo;. 
 
 — Go to sleep , faexotguapflu. aor; 
 infav. 
 
 — Awake , or keep watch, d-ypuir* 
 vw , sT$. aor. yja'a. ecjAat I^uttvo? f 
 
 S^'JTTVO; , 7) , OV. 
 
 — Repose, rest oneself, *-exeuoa- 
 fraat. aor. gByjv. part. pass. £s> 
 xtupafffAsvof. 
 
 — Dream, foeipsuopou. aor. 6y;v. 
 ■ — Snore , pc^aXiCw. aor. G x. 
 
 — Awaken , — rouse oneself 
 £Hu7rvd) , a;, aor. yiaa- whence, 
 |uwnTJt$ ? vi , dv, sprightly lively. 
 
 — Dress, Iv^uvw , aor. <j<x. to dress 
 
 oneself, 
 
 ^uvoy.at. aor. 8r,v. part* 
 
 pass. svcWs'vg?. dressed. 
 
 — Undress , Ix^uvw. aor. era. un- 
 dress oneself, sx^uvotxai. aor. 8/iv. 
 part. pass, e'jc^u^s'vo? , undrest. , 
 
 — Comb , xTsvt'rw. aor. era- comb 
 oneself , xrsvi£op.0H aor. <j8vsv. 
 part. pass. xTevtapivoc. combed,], 
 dx.-s'vi^c? , 6 , vV , uncombed. 
 
 — Wash , ttXuvw , vt'Sw , aor. $«'. 
 wash oneself, -reXuvc^at- vi'Souxi; 
 aor. cp8r ( v- part. pass, v'.u.asvo;.. 
 •tTC),UTO^,avtcp>o;, 6 , A> unwashed 
 
To Paint, cpTiavcf/.at aor. c 9nv. part. 
 
 pass. , cras'vo? , from , cpTiavw- to 
 
 make , 
 
 Common actions. 
 To Laugh , T £X&> , a;, aor. a <j a . 
 ■ — Weep, xXaico. irr. 
 • — Sigh , q-sv^w-ava^sva^w. aor. lot.. 
 - — Breathe , ava7rve'co • irr. avaaatvw. 
 
 aor. ava. 
 • — Sneeze aTspvi^oaat. aor. scorsp- 
 
 — Gape , yawn , ^aajxoupctoufxau 
 aor. riGviv. 
 
 — Blow, puff, <p<j<jw, a;, aor. y^a. 
 
 — Whistle , ei>p^to. ccpup-'^co. 
 
 — Listen , hearken, axpoa^o^sct. 
 aor. vi/.poaaOyiv. 
 
 — Hear , cbwuw. aor. <ja. part. 
 pas, e a , (jjASvo'c;. 
 
 * — Feel , ai<j8avofy,a'.. aor. ai<jflav9r,v^ 
 
 » — Spit , cpr'jto. aor. aa. 
 
 - — Blow or wipe the nose , a r:o- 
 jAi>£i£tt; aor. iaa. snuff the candle, 
 § ^cpTiX^w. aor, <y a . part. pass. 
 
 - — Perspire, l^povw. aor. W aa. part. 
 
 pass, t^ptofxev*;. in perspiration. 
 « — Wipe, ccpoup t ';Cw , aor. ax. part. 
 
 pass, aas'vo?. 
 - — Tremble , Tps'jxw. 
 "■— - Cough , pvr/w. aor. |bc- 
 sr- Pinch, § T&IA1T& , J?, aor. vi <t«. 
 
 — Scrape, scratch, scrub, £6w. irr. 
 ■ — Tickle, •yap-yaXiSw. 
 
 Actions of kindness hatred etc. 
 
 To love , a-ya^M > a?- aor. yjaa part. 
 
 pass, yi'^syo?. 
 Caress , -^ouhuw. aor. 5%. part. 
 
 pass, j/ivb';. 
 Flatter , xoXaxsuw. aor. «j a . part. 
 
 pass, p.s'vo^. 
 Make much of, court friendship , 
 
 7trspi7totou|/.ai. aor. tiGviv* 
 Embrace , * sfoiva£ou.ai. dqxoCXt£©p.3Ci, 
 
 »79 
 
 aor. ffflviv. part, pass., a^xxXiff^gyo;. 
 Kiss , (^aa) , eT; , or a;, aor. yj<j a . 
 Salute , ^aipsTto , a?. -7rpcaxuva> , elg* 
 
 aor. YKja. 
 Teach , (5*i^(X(txm. Ip|j.Yiv£'j&). 
 Nurse, nurture, bring up, rpsfpca. 
 
 aor. <Ji a . part. pass. Gps^e'vo;. 
 Suckle , pu'Cocvw. aor. £ a . part. pass. 
 
 Punish , nrai<huco,. aor. <y«. part. 
 
 pass, {as'vos- 
 Commend , praise , siraivw , sT$. 
 
 sTratvou^.at. aor. s(hv- 
 Blame, accuse, xxTYifopu, e ?;. 
 Give, <K£gj , irr. ^api&o, 'aor. asc. 
 Procure , irpofv/iBeuu, aor. ora. part. 
 
 pass. ^svo,-. 
 Deny, apvoujA*t. aor. rjGviv. 
 Minder , |jwro£(£«* aor. a «. part. 
 
 pass. ffjAsvoc- 
 Defend, u7rspa<77n£o[Aai. § £ia<psvTS'5<o. 
 
 aor. da. part. pass, uAvo$. 
 Beat, strike , th'pvw. irr. xtu-jtw 5$. 
 
 aor. yjca. part. pass. , n^vc?. 
 Hate , ^taco, ei;. aor. nca. part. 
 
 pass. Tfi'jAsyofr 
 Drive away , d\apw. aor. £x. part. 
 
 pass, -ype'vc?". 
 Pardon , auy^wpto , u;. aor. Yiaa» 
 
 part. pass, np^'vo; . 
 Dispute , (ptXovstxw , sT?. quarrel , 
 
 scold , axX:vw. aor. waa- part. 
 
 pass, wu.s'vo;. 
 Protect, Tvpw^arsuo). aor. era uTrspa- 
 
 ffiri^ojiai. aor. <j9r.v. part, pass, 
 
 cru-c'vci;. 
 Abandon , l^xou- aXetraa. leave 3 
 
 acpivci) , irr. 
 Fear , be afraid of, ^ouuatj stcas, 
 
 and &crc.t. aor. I^viflriv- part, 
 
 pass. cpoG'.c[j.sv&?- 
 Frighten, cpo^o- aor. ca- threaten, 
 
 cpopEpi'Ca> , aor. <ja. 
 Tremble f «v7/* /e«r J jgou.^<a , 
 
 aor. ^-x. part. pass. Tpc'xanras'vs;. 
 
To observe^ see, look at, fiXsVw irr. 
 
 xuTTa^w. aor. 1%. Oetopto , et?. aor. 
 
 viff-x. part. pass. , Tnusvo;. 
 Move , jcivS , eis, and a;, aor. «aa, 
 
 part. pass. , vj^svog. 
 Examine, i^Ta^w. aor. ca. part. 
 
 pass. , ffttsvo?. 
 Smell act and /ze«£, p.upi£«. aor* 
 
 ca. tc euaopcpov TptAvra^uXXov, [a.6* 
 
 pias tv. what a fine rose. s/neU it 7 
 
 ppi^et &oXa , it «rce/& well. 
 
 Of Diversion and Amusement. 
 
 Divert, amuse oneself, ^taax.^a^w, 
 HscpavTo'vw. § l-yXevri^tfl , nor. aa. 
 
 Sing, -pot^'&'j^o), el; and a?, aor. yjca. 
 
 Dance , ;/op euw , aor. era. 
 
 Jump , leap , tty.^w , a;, aor. y)aa. 
 
 Play , t:x : Zw. aor. <•*. 
 
 Ride, § jta|3aXXixe6td. 
 
 Gain , jcep^&a). aor. ca. xep^aivto, 
 aor. ava. part. pass, nusvc;. 
 
 Lose , yjxvo. aor. aaa. part. pass. 
 
 Bet,pa£to qi'.yxy.z- cctyru.ari^w.aor.aa 
 Risk , xiv^uvsuw aor. a*. 
 Joke, ^ttpareutt. aor.aa. u.£tmo^cu.xi. 
 Stand C upright ) ^sjtcjxai opdefc. 
 Bend, kXivco. aor. va. part.pass. jasvo?. 
 Stoop, ax.usro). aor. J, a. whence , 
 
 a/.ucpTo? , 7i , dv , stooping. 
 Turn , fupi£io. aor. .:<. part. pass. 
 
 CU.3V0;. 
 Stop , ^au-a-a ?atGpai> irr. 
 Walk . 77eptxaTM j eT;. aor. vifra. 
 Walk forward , wpoJtaTtoj &!;• iike, 
 
 ^arS). 
 Go, TrvTYatvw. irr. 
 Come , £pyjip.at. irr, 
 Remain , p,= vw . xa$op.at. irr. 
 Run , Tpe'xw- irr. 
 FoHow, axoXouOtb, eT; , and a;, aor. 
 
 v.ra, part. pass, np&og. 
 Escape , -yXuto'v©. aor. <ocrx. 
 
 To sel off, or out , y.iasuw. aor. a «, 
 
 ©eu^ta , irr. dvaywpw. 
 Advance , Trpoyopo , els- aor. r ( cx* 
 
 part. pass, yjas'vo;. 
 Remove from , *ir©p,awpuvM. &co^$- 
 
 xputopat. aor. 6v0r,v. part. pass. 
 
 ff.r:: u.zz.yj<j tjJvo; . 
 Approach , act and neut, bring 
 
 near, •KknmaX^' <pe'p&> xov-d, la-f 
 
 /oaai xcvT?:. 
 Fall , 77=otw. irr. 
 
 Slide, slip , -fiu^St , a;, aor. y,<t«; 
 Arrive, ©8avw. irr. 
 Enter , ippeuvu. irr. 
 Go out , e^a:vw , in\ 
 Ascend , dvaifJaiva , irr. 
 Descend, xxTatflflKvta. irr. 
 Hurry «cf, p t xTw. aor. <jx. hasten 
 
 »c« , Pta^oaat. aor. ff r , v . part. 
 
 pass, (jas'vo;. 
 Begin , apyivw , a;, aor. viaa- part; 
 
 pass. v:p.svG?. dp^l^w. aor. <ja. part. 
 
 pass, ewe've;. 
 Help , aid, p. 2 -a7;idvw. aor. *£,' 
 
 p.irt. pass. cu.svo?. 
 Succour , p& y ,8w , el;, aor. vxja, 
 
 part. pass, yjuivo;. 
 Grasp, seize, hold firmly, x.sy-&, 
 
 E15. aor. r,aa. 
 Cure , larpcjo). flspawsuw. aor. ? a. 
 Bleed, ©Xe$GTOjji.co , el;. eS-pc^a) ataa.' 
 
 Of buying etc. 
 Ask the price , epwrw tw» Tip,Viv.» 
 
 7Tc'aa i'yet. -reo'cra § xc^^si- 
 Measure ; prped , el; , and a?. 
 Buy , ayopdfr. aor. aa- part. owsvoj.' 
 
 at a high price , dearly , dxoif3d. 
 
 cheaply , eOGyjva. for nothing , 
 
 for a song, ^apitr|*a. 
 Sell , tvoXG) , eTg. aor. naa part. pass. 
 
 r,uiv&;- 
 Pay , -TXvjpo'vw. aor. coca, part 
 
 pass, touivc;. 
 Oiler, 9tpo<j^ps'pft). o:'pw. 
 
To propose, TvpopaXXw. aor. faps(&&iu 
 Lend, <5Wt£o). aor. C a. borrow, 
 
 &wet£o[/.xi. aor. ff8ny. 
 Cheat , cajole , ^eXS , x;. aor. act. 
 
 acra. pass. 6yiv- part. pass. rysXa- 
 
 cue'vo'?. 
 
 Manual Acts. \ 
 Work , ep7a(^c{y.at. aor. gQviv. £ou- 
 
 XeOcd. aor. ax. part. pass. f/.svc?. 
 
 jcgtcioTw , aor, aa- 
 Touch , lay hold of, Trtavw. aor. ax. 
 
 i^iZu- aor. act. £a. aor. pass. 
 
 ^8y;v. part. pass, i^vf^hoj^ 
 Handle , pxlxaao}. t|viXa^S, 
 Bind, tie , ^'vw. irr. 
 Untie, unbind , loose, Xuco. aor. 
 
 ax. part. pass. u.hcq, 
 Leave, acpivco- irr. 
 Remove , take away, l^a^w. irr. 
 Take , ra'pvw. irr. 
 I)raw , drag, Tpapw , a ; . aor. act. 
 
 r,£a- pass. xxOviv. part. pass. T pa- 
 
 (k-fui'vo;. withdraw , TpafkiGO^au , 
 Fly, 77£tw, a;, aor. a ;a- 
 Rob , steal , xXs'tttco. aor. <J/a- part. 
 
 pass. p,ae'vo;. 
 Search , rummage , <J,ay.vM. aor. |x. 
 Gather , cuva^u. aor. | a . part. pass. 
 
 Collect , (xx^o'vw. aor. «£a. part. 
 
 pass. , waj'vo?. 
 Present , irpocrwgoft). -7rappY]G'.a;/o» 
 
 aor. (j a , part. pass, cf/.svoc 
 Receive, ^epat. oar. i^s^Ovjv. Adj 
 
 ^e/.to;, Tl j ov. 
 Squeeze , ccpi^w. aor. fc. part. 
 
 pass. /y£jt, = vct<;. 
 
 Hold , ga^o), a?, aor. a £ a . npara), el; . 
 Rend, tear, ana, aq. aor. aca. part. 
 
 pass. 57racr{7.£vo;. 
 Spoil , destroy , X aXv5> , a;, aor. 
 
 exaXaaa. part. pass. ixlxau.ho;. 
 Crush, Guvrpi&o, like T p#o>. 
 Hide, xputctw. aor. <jia. part. pass. 
 
 i8r 
 
 To Cover , ffx*-n;a£o). aor. <jx. part. 
 
 pass. <7t/.evo;. 
 Uncover , £sc)6Mra£co , avaxaXuirTw , 
 
 aor. ^a, part. pass. [A^e'yqs. 
 Soil , § XsgoW- aor. oca. 
 Clean , -r:a<rps6to. aor. ax. 
 Rub , Tpt'^w. aor. act. tyx. pass. 
 Irpiinv and sTptcpGr^. part. pass. 
 Tpiu.ui.svo;. 
 Scratch, ^ou-^'pavrc&j. aor - <*a. part. 
 
 pass ff'pavqc 
 Paint, ^o"ypa«pi'2Jco. oar. ica- part. 
 
 pass, gixsvo?. 
 Engrave , ^aXxo^pacpcd Iv^apaTGi; 
 Draw , outline, -ypaow- {-/vo^pa'-pa), st^ 
 Sketch , a X s£ia£a). aor. <jx. 
 Embroider, xsvtw, sT?. or a-. aor.viaa. 
 Gild , xpuco'vG). aor. coca. 
 Plate , ac7fl[7.o'v«. aor. <oo-a. 
 Print , t'jttsW aor. wo-a- 
 Build, xTt'^td. aor. aa. part, pass, 
 
 cras'vo;. 
 Plough , 6p-p'v<o. aor. waa. 
 Kill , axoxo'vo). cpoxeuw. oneself, <hmtq~ 
 
 vop.at- 
 Wound , 7rX-/i7o'vw. Xa[3oW 
 Saw, -reptov^w. aor. ax. 
 Sail , TvXs'to. ap|x£vi^tu. 
 Row , KtoTTViXaTw, el;, rpapci T0>«U7ri.' 
 Carry, cps'p«and ^e'pvto. aor. act. sept- 
 pa. aor. pass. ecps'pGviv- part. pass. 
 (pepas'vo?. whence , vsocpspu,e'vc; » 
 newly arrived. 
 Transport , jwuPaXifra. aor* aa- part. 
 
 pass. cTuivoS" 
 Pound , xoTvav^o). aor. <y<x. part. 
 
 pass, saevo;- 
 Bake, iLyivoj. aor. vio-a. part. pass. 
 
 <|r/)(/.s'v.os- whence , to (Jt/itov- 
 Boi!, ^pa^w. aor. ax part.pass. ff^evo?- 
 whence , to £pa<rdv , boiled meat. 
 Fry, TYi-yav^w- a or. ea. part, pass* 
 
 CU.bVO;. 
 
i-te 
 
 Operations of the Mind. 
 To remember, evOup.duu.aij sTaai and. 
 
 acat- aor. ^Oviv- 
 P,.emmd , evOi/jii^>- aor - ^a. 
 Forget, hcaow, ei;- ^y,vw > ?;• hke, 
 
 -/avw. to lose. 
 Foresee, provide , 7tpcf3Xsir«»- 
 Meditate , pteX«S, a;- aor. y,ca. 
 Premeditate , wpc^eXeTU , a;. 
 Be willing, U>M- frr. 
 Desire , foidujM* > «S- aor. yj<rat- 
 Think , £o#$Juu: aor. <r8r,v. 
 Believe, iii<reuG>. aor. <ja. 
 Doubt , aacpi[BaX>.w. aor* &(jtyi€tAa> 
 
 Suspect , UTTOTTTEUtO- fotOTtTeUW TGV 
 
 ftOpcaffrt, I suspect the Man, 
 fe'jr&TTTS'jcfxaioTt Oocyeiv/i (Auto xougg, 
 I suspect that this will turn out 
 ill , or end badly. 
 
 Observe remark, irapctTYipw, &!;• aor. 
 viaa- part. pass. , r^evc;. 
 
 Beware of, take care of, attend to, 
 <puXoqcy.ai. aor.yjjft/. irpoor/M. 
 
 Know, ^vtaptfr. aor. fe. part. pass. 
 
 Imagine , aw/rotof***- aor. <j9r,v , 
 
 part. pass. , cuivo?. 
 Wish , £ (J X cu.ai. aor. sflgqOttv. irr. 
 Hope , iXitffr' aor. ca- 
 Assure , psfJaio'vca. aor uaa. part. 
 
 pass, wpie'vo?. 
 Judge , xpt'v<s. aor. va- 
 Conclude, infer, duuvicepaivto. aor 
 
 ava. part. pass. , ousvo;. 
 Conjecture , sikq£©- aor. est- part. 
 
 pass, <ms'vc?. 
 Resolve , determine , a-nrccpao^w- 
 
 aor <j a . part, pass , auA^o^ 
 Feign, xapcvotujA- TCpoff7r.toup.aij eTaou- 
 
 To be irritable , rapjurspvcaat. 
 
 — be quiet, to calm, or compose 
 oneself, rjouYjJ&i)- aor - ax - 
 
 — be deceived, mistaken , XctvOa- 
 vcu.ca. irr. 
 
 Embroil, Eu/jrspthuto. aor. oa. iu.irep- 
 <hucu,ai. aor. Onv- part, pass., uivof. 
 Envy, to be jealous, SyiXeum , and 
 ^cuAsuto. aor.oa. <p6cva>j eT;. aor.r,ca» 
 part pass, vi'jilvps- 
 Hate, {i.i ff S, si?- aor. *<*«.: part. pass. 
 v)ii.£vb$. whence , fudiMs » « > e v j 
 hateful odious. 
 I am sorry , ui xowowcuveTai. 
 I like it , to vo?i{le6'o{Mft* p.' aps'asfci 
 
 I don't like it , £ev u/apeaet. 
 To be angry , 6'ju.cvm. aor. woo,. 
 
 part. pass. 0uu.Mu.evc?- 
 Pout, sulk , pdtifr>' aor ' l<ja '- part * 
 
 pass. p.av'.au.s'vo?. 
 
 Quarrel dispute , u.aXo'vu- aor. w<j<x? 
 
 Offend , hurt , give pain, jrucfra&u- 
 
 aor. act. ava- aor. pass. aOmv-part, 
 
 pass. , a'pevoc' 
 
 It goes against me, I find it hard, 
 
 <5uay.cXsuou.ca j aor. 0r t v. 
 I lament, XuTrouu,ca, eioxt , or Saa(« 
 aor -/.8r,v. part. pass. , townpivoc , 
 afflicted , £ev Xuirarai toc foirpa , 
 he grieves not about , does not 
 regret the Money , wap'anrovou- 
 txai , sicca 5 aor. s'8r,v. 
 Weary, tire, /.oupa^w. aor ff a. part, 
 pass, au.fvc? ^cratvco, act. neut. 
 aor. irr. asa- part. pass. , faosar 
 uivcc, act. and neut. , I have 
 tired my horse, aire gas* to aXo-yoii 
 m 0U . My Horse is tired, to aXo-v/a 
 
 F I ?< I S, 
 
i83 
 
 The following are errors tliat may mislead, and therefore 
 oiHit to be noted by a leirner. Same few others have been 
 unavoidable; but they are such, or so circumstanced, that 
 they can hardly , it is hoped , lead to a mistake. 
 
 ERRATA. 
 
 Page. 
 
 Line: 
 
 6 
 
 5 
 
 co 
 
 17 
 
 II 
 
 9 
 
 ib. 
 
 13 
 
 ib. 
 
 ib. 
 
 ib. 
 
 14 
 
 52 
 
 22 
 
 1 5 
 
 1 
 
 3r 
 
 3o 
 
 4a 
 
 22 
 
 54 
 
 23 
 
 69 
 
 12 
 
 9° 
 
 7 
 
 109 
 
 i5 
 
 SIO 
 
 32 
 
 112 
 
 5 
 
 *3i 
 
 24 
 
 For 
 
 'ysXa 
 
 TO '^W34£ 
 
 to e^oJte 
 
 TOU TO TZ9. 
 
 tou to ira 
 
 sppifa 
 
 'ypacpoupia^s 
 
 sirysvaia ca; 
 ti va xa'jxw 
 
 read ^ a po'« 
 
 — {AOU 
 
 — fsXa 
 
 TO '(5Ws 
 
 ' ' TO E^ftHK 
 
 — -tou to' ttoc 
 1 — • tcu to 'rca. 
 
 — V 
 
 eppupx See P. 77 , l. x5. 
 
 •ypa^oujAa^s 
 cop.sOa 
 
 Tt va xajxw 
 
 — Figure 6 ought to be placed before « If ken oW.vj» 
 line 22. 
 
 — <V/fer say reac? « the latter » 
 
 — incipient Vowel read incipient /o/?g- Vowel. 
 Chapter has, in references, been sometimes misnumbered, as at P. 4 5 
 
 and 58; three should , in such cases, be added to the number. 
 

 W 44 1 
 
.^.•"•..^ ^♦..-••.-V ^..•••.^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 V.* 
 
 
 
 .*'*. 
 
 
 
 ^ « 
 
 c° ♦} 
 
 I ■ 
 
 
 
 %^ .-J 
 
 
 «&* 6 © • • « ^. 
 
 
 Deacidified using the Bookkeeper proca« 
 Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
 Treatment Date: July 2006 
 
 PreservationTechnologiJ 
 
 A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATI^j 
 
 1 1 1 Thomson Park Orive 
 Cranberry Township. PA 16066 
 (724)779-2111 
 
 "„ ^ ^